Home

Manual for Model 336 Cryogenic Temperature Controller

1. 1 DIO1 Data input output line 1 2 DIO2 Data input output line 2 3 DIO 3 Data input output line 3 4 DIO 4 Data input output line 4 5 EOI End or identify 6 DAV Data valid 7 NRFD Not ready for data 8 NDAC No data accepted 9 IFC Interface clear 10 SRQ Service request 11 ATN Attention 12 SHIELD Cable shield 13 DIO 5 Data input output line 5 14 DIO 6 Data input output line 6 15 DIO 7 Data input output line 7 16 DIO 8 Data input output line 8 17 REN Remote enable 18 GND 6 Ground wire twisted pair with DAV 19 GND7 Ground wire twisted pair with NRFD 20 GND8 Ground wire twisted pair with NDAC 21 GND9 Ground wire twisted pair with IFC 22 GND 10 Ground wire twisted pair with SRQ 23 GND 11 Ground wire twisted pair with ATN 24 GND Logic ground TABLE 8 7 IEEE 488 rear panel connector details Electrostatic Discharge ESD may damage electronic parts assemblies and equip ment ESD is a transfer of electrostatic charge between bodies at different electro static potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field The low energy source that most commonly destroys Electrostatic Discharge sensitive devices is the human body which generates and retains static electricity Simply walking across a carpet in low humidity may generate up to 35 000 V of static electricity Current technology trends toward greater complexity incr
2. Heater Range 1 Off Med Low High Heater Range 1Off Med Low High Heater Range 1Off Med Low High Heater Range 1Off Med Low High Heater Range 1Off Med Low High Heater Range 1Off Med Low High Heater Range 1Off Med Low High Heater Range 1Off Med Low High Heater Range 1Off Med Low High Heater Range 1Off Med Low High FIGURE 5 1 Record of Zone settings Menu Navigation Zones Output 1 or 2 gt Zones gt 1 to 10 Interface Command ZONE UJ o oS A gt w O oS A gt ve O oS A Upper boundary Ramp Rate 0 1 100 K min Control Input fault De Upper boundary Ramp Rate 0 1 100 K min Control Input fault De Upper boundary Ramp Rate Control Input 0 1 100 K min Default A LIB OC OD Upper boundary K Ramp Rate Control Input 0 1 100 K min Default Upper boundary Ramp Rate Control Input 0 1 100 K min Default A OB OC OD Upper boundary K Ramp Rate Control Input 0 1 100 K min Default gt UJ o oS A gt ve O z A gt ow la S A gt ow o o A Upper boundary Ramp Rate 0 1 100 K min Control Input fault De Upper bound
3. TABLE C 4 Lake Shore DT 500 series silicon diode curves no longer in production PT 100 PT 1000 Breakpoint 1 030 0 3 820 030 0 38 20 2 032 0 4 235 032 0 42 35 3 036 0 5 146 036 0 51 46 4 038 0 5 650 038 0 56 50 5 040 0 6 170 040 0 61 70 6 042 0 6 726 042 0 67 26 7 046 0 7 909 046 0 79 09 8 052 0 9 924 052 0 99 24 9 058 0 12 180 058 0 121 80 10 065 0 15 015 065 0 150 15 11 075 0 19 223 075 0 192 23 12 085 0 23 525 085 0 235 25 13 105 0 32 081 105 0 320 81 14 140 0 46 648 140 0 466 48 15 180 0 62 980 180 0 629 80 16 210 0 75 044 210 0 750 44 17 270 0 98 784 270 0 987 84 18 315 0 116 270 315 0 1162 70 19 355 0 131 616 355 0 1316 16 20 400 0 148 652 400 0 1486 52 21 445 0 165 466 445 0 1654 66 22 490 0 182 035 490 0 1820 35 23 535 0 198 386 535 0 1983 86 24 585 0 216 256 585 0 2162 56 25 630 0 232 106 630 0 2321 06 26 675 0 247 712 675 0 2477 12 27 715 0 261 391 715 0 2613 91 28 760 0 276 566 760 0 2765 66 29 800 0 289 830 800 0 2898 30 TABLE C 5 Lake Shore PT 100 1000 platinum RTD curves Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 174 Appendices 3 02081 3 05186 3 17838 2 96 2 3 02133 38 8 Sy 3 05322 13 10 72 3 18540 2 81 3 3 02184 37 7 38 3 05466 12 70 73 3 19253 2 67 4 3 02237 36 6 39 3
4. ccc cece e cece eee e eee e eens 35 3 5 6 Two Lead Sensor Measurement cece eee eee 35 3 5 7 Lowering Measurement Noise cece e eee eee e eee eeed 36 3 6 Capacitance Sensor Inputs Model 3061 ccc cece cece eect ete e eee e teens 36 3 6 1 Wiring Guarding and Shielding sss 37 3 7 Thermocouple Sensor Inputs Thermocouple Model 3060 37 3 7 1 Sensor Input Terminals ccc eee cece rr 37 3 7 2 Thermocouple Installation cece cece cece ence eee ee ee eees 38 3 7 3 Grounding and Shielding cece cece eee eee ornari ne rri eee e nena 38 3 8 Heater Output Setup cc cto aaa 38 3 8 1 Heater Output Description m e 38 3 8 2 Heater Output Connectors eee 39 3 8 3 Heater Output Wiring i 39 3 8 4 HeaterOutput Noise I ee ens 39 3 8 5 Powering Outputs 3 and 4 Using an External Power Supply 39 3 8 5 1 Choosing a Power Supply cee cece ence eee eee eee tees eennnes 40 3 8 5 2 Power Supply Setup eee e cece cece eect e 40 3 8 5 3 Connecting to the Model 336 ccc cece cece cette eee teenies 41 3 8 5 4 Programming Voltages Under 10V eee ee eee 41 4T General A EEE E ARIA ENEE E EEE AEE RESA 43 4 1 1 Understanding Menu Navigation ccc ceee eee e eect teen eeeaee ees 43 4 2 Front Panel Description cine oss a 44 4 2 1 Keypad Definitions
5. cece cece cece eee e eee 23 2 6 4 Thermal Mass iii 23 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS Chapter 3 Installation Chapter 4 Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller 2 6 5 System Non Linear yenen isteria a RSS 23 vB prendi aio aaa 24 2 7 1 Proportional B ir e ii eda a 24 2 52 Integrali 24 2 7 3 Derivative D n ye earn 25 24 4 Manual OutPUt ataron nata besa RENE 25 2 8 Manual TURING A AS 27 28 1 Setting Heater Range tic de 27 28 2 Tuning Proportional 2 erret ae a ani 27 28 3 TUNE Me duen ie ea 28 2 84 T NNE DerVatVe veia 29 LESE SUID ERR 29 2 10 Zone TUNNE cei o YER E IM EETH RN bete EF ORIS ER iii 30 2 11 Thermoelectric DEVICES oce eerte roi 30 3l General saec EDU ERR UR A nani 31 3 2 Inspection and Unpacking sssssssssssssssss e eee e eee ees 31 3 3 Rear Panel Definicion naa io a ae Rea ta 31 3 4 Lime Input Assembly e e eene 32 34 1 Line Voltage ona RE ERR abi 32 3 4 2 Line Fuse and Fuse Holder cronica rar 32 3 43 POWEP CONG ici RA 33 3 4 4 Power Switch Li iii 33 3 5 Diode Resistor Sensor INputs 0 cece cece cece cece I me een 33 3 5 1 Sensor Input Connector and PinoUt cee eee cece ee eee eee ee 33 3 5 2 SensorLead Cable renin rt Ee en Oa EEEa AERE AEREE 34 3 5 3 Grounding and Shielding Sensor LeadS reer rrrr ee 34 3 54 Sensor Pola iii cdi eR ERR 34 3 5 5 Four Lead Sensor Measurement
6. Model 336 common commands are detailed in section 6 6 1 and summarized in TABLE 6 6 6 2 3 3 Device Specific Commands Device specific commands are addressed commands The Model 336 supports a vari ety of device specific commands to program instruments remotely from a digital computer and to transfer measurements to the computer Most device specific com mands also work if performed from the front panel Model 336 device specific com mands are detailed in section 6 6 1 and summarized in TABLE 6 6 6 2 3 4 Message Strings Amessage string is a group of characters assembled to perform an interface function There are three types of message strings commands queries and responses The computer issues command and query strings through user programs and the instru ment issues responses Two or more command strings or queries can be chained together in one communication but they must be separated by a semi colon The total communication string must not exceed 255 characters in length A command string is issued by the computer and instructs the instrument to perform a function or change a parameter setting When a command is issued the computer is acting as talker and the instrument as listener The format is lt command mnemonic gt lt space gt lt parameter data gt lt terminator gt Command mnemonics and parameter data necessary for each one is described in section 6 6 1 A terminator must be sent with every message string
7. Bit Bit Weighting Event Name 4 16 MAV 5 64 ESB 7 128 OSB Total 208 Service Request Enable Register Query SRE term lt bit weighting gt term nnn Refer to section 6 2 6 for a list of status flags STB Input Returned Format Remarks TST Input Returned Format Remarks KWAI Input Remarks ALARM Input Format Remarks Example 6 6 1 InterfaceCommands 127 Status Byte Query STB term lt bit weighting gt term nnn Acts like a serial poll but does not reset the register to all zeros The integer returned represents the sum of the bit weighting of the status flag bits that are set in the Status Byte Register Refer to section 6 2 6 for a list of status flags Self Test Query TST term lt status gt term n lt status gt O no errors found 1 errors found The Model 336 reports status based on test done at power up Wait to Continue Command KWAI term Causes the IEEE 488 interface to hold off until all pending operations have been com pleted This is the same function as the OPC command except that it does not set the Operation Complete event bit in the Event Status Register Input Alarm Parameter Command ALARM lt input gt lt off on gt lt high value gt lt low value gt lt deadband gt lt latch enable gt lt audible gt lt visible gt term a n tnnnnnn tnnnnnn nnnnnn n n n lt input gt Specifies which input to configure A D D1 D5 for 306
8. Control Tuning Status Query TUNEST term lt tuning status gt lt output gt lt error status gt lt stage status gt term n n n nn lt tuning status gt 0 no active tuning 1 active tuning lt output gt Heater output ofthe control loop being tuned iftuning 1 output 1 2 output 2 lt error status gt O no tuning error 1 tuning error lt stage status gt Specifies the current stage in the Autotune process Iftuning error occurred stage status represents stage that failed If initial conditions are not met when starting the autotune procedure causing the autotuning process to never actually begin then the error status will be setto 1 and the stage status will be stage 00 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 144 WARMUP Input Format Example Remarks WARMUP Input Format Returned Format WEBLOG Input Format Example Remarks WEBLOG Input Returned Format Remarks Model 336 Temperature Controller CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Warmup Supply Parameter Command WARMUP lt output gt lt control gt lt percentage gt term n n nnn nn lt output gt Specifies which unpowered analog output to configure 3 or 4 lt control gt Specifies the type of control used 0 Auto Off 1 Continuous lt percentage gt Specifies the percentage of full scale 10 V Monitor Out voltage to apply to turn on the external power supply WARMUP 3 1 50 term Output 3 will
9. I eme 44 4 2 1 1 Direct Operation Keys eee acc 44 4 2 1 2 Menu Number Pad Keys 2 0 ce cece cece e ence teen e 45 4 2 2 Anin nclators ia 45 4 2 3 General Keypad Operation n 46 4 3 Display Setup scies A rU DUE PORE PIU aad Obs eee REA 47 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 31 Display MOdes csi aa 47 4 3 1 1 Four LOOP Mod iii earlier 47 4 3 1 2 All Inputs Mod pi i ELA LI 48 4 3 1 3 Input Display Modes cece eect e 48 4 3 1 4 Custom Display Mode eeee eee eect ireas trinis 49 4 3 2 Display Contrast sissi aerei meager EP DH cerned 51 INPUTSELUP coria aria A era ila 51 4 4 1 Diode Sensor Input Setup iii 52 4 4 2 Positive Temperature Coefficient PTC Resistor Sensor Input Setup 52 4 4 3 Negative Temperature Coefficient NTC Resistor Sensor Input Setup 52 4 4 4 Range Selection cerca A 52 4 4 5 Thermal Electromotive Force EMF Compensation 53 4 4 6 Thermocouple Sensor Input Setup Model 3060 Only 54 4 4 6 1 Internal Room Temperature Compensation 54 4 4 6 2 Internal Room Temperature Compensation Calibration Procedure 54 4 4 7 Capacitance Sensor Input Setup Model 3061 Only 55 447 1 Range Selection sss hme svietert dees EREET aaa nas 55 4 4 7 2 Temperature Coefficient Selection cece cece eee eee ees 56 4 4 7 3 Control Chan
10. 2 4 8 Thermal Sensor leads can be a significant source of error if they are not properly anchored Anchoring Leads Heat will transfer down even small leads and alter the sensor reading The goal of thermal anchoring is to cool the leadsto a temperature as close to the sensor as possi ble This can be accomplished by putting a significant length of lead wire in thermal contact with every cooled surface between room temperature and the sensor You can adhere lead wires to cold surfaces with varnish overa thin electrical insulator like cigarette paper They can also be wound onto a bobbin that is firmly attached to the cold surface Some sensor packages include a thermal anchor bobbin and wrapped lead wires to simplify thermal anchoring 2 4 9 Thermal Thermal black body radiation is one ofthe ways heat is transferred Warm surfaces Radiation radiate heat to cold surfaces even through a vacuum The difference in temperature between the surfaces is one thing that determines how much heat is transferred Thermal radiation causes thermal gradients and reduces measurement accuracy Many cooling systems include a radiation shield The purpose ofthe shield is to sur round the sample stage sample and sensor with a surface that is at or near their tem perature to minimize radiation The shield is exposed to the room temperature Model 336 Temperature Controller 2 5 Heater Selection and Installation 2 5 1 Heater Resistance and Power 2 5 1 He
11. Once the data points are entered highlight Generate Softcal and press Enter Choose Yes atthe confirmation message to finalize the operation To cancel the operation either choose No to the confirmation message or press Escape When the Softcal curve has been generated the following message will appear on the display SoftCal curve has been generated The Generate Softcal operation will overwrite an existing user curve Please ensure the curve number you are writing to is correct before generating the calibrated curve You can checkthe new curve using the View Curve instructions in section 5 9 2 The curve is not automatically assigned to any input so you will need to assign itto an input Refer to section 4 4 11 for details on assigning a curve to a sensor input Menu Navigation Curve Entry gt Softcal gt DT 470 Platinum 100 Platinum 1000 gt Data Entry see note below gt Generate Softcal Yes Interface Command SCAL Data entry includes new curve serial number and calibration points Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 92 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller 6 1 General 93 Chapter 6 Computer Interface 6 1 General 6 2 IEEE 488 Interface Operation This chapter provides operational instructions for the computer interface for the Lake Shore Model 336 temperature controller Each ofthe three computer interfaces provided with the Model 336 permit rem
12. curve Valid entries 1 6 7 lt dest gt Specifies the user curve to store the SoftCal curve Valid entries 21 59 lt SN gt Specifies the curve serial number Limited to 10 characters lt T1 value gt Specifies first temperature point in kelvin lt U1 value gt Specifies first sensor units point lt T2 value gt Specifies second temperature point in kelvin lt U2 value gt Specifies second sensor units point lt T3 value gt Specifies third temperature point in kelvin lt U3 value gt Specifies third sensor units point Generates a SoftCal curve Refer to Paragraph 5 3 SCAL 1 21 1234567890 4 2 1 6260 77 32 1 0205 300 0 0 5189 term generates a three point SoftCal curve from standard curve 1 and saves it in user curve 21 Control Setpoint Command SETP lt output gt lt value gt term n tnnnnnn lt output gt Specifies which output s control loop to configure 1 4 lt value gt The value for the setpoint in the preferred units of the control loop sensor SETP 1 122 5 term Output 1 setpoint is now 122 5 based on its units For outputs 3 and 4 setpoint is only valid in Warmup mode Control settings that is P I D and Setpoint are assigned to outputs which results in the settings being applied to the control loop formed by the output and its control input Control Setpoint Query SETP lt output gt term n lt output gt lt value gt term nnnnnn referto command for description S
13. n lt output gt Specifies which unpowered analog output to query 3 or 4 output percentage term tnnn n Returns the output percentage of the unpowered analog output Autotune Command ATUNE lt output gt lt mode gt term n n output Specifies the output associated with the loop to be Autotuned 1 4 lt mode gt Specifies the Autotune mode Valid entries 0 P Only 1 P and 2 P l andD ATUNE 2 1 term initiates Autotuning of control loop associated with output 2 in P and mode If initial conditions required to Autotune the specified loop are not met an Autotune initialization error will occur and the Autotune process will not be performed The TUNEST query can be used to check if an Autotune error occurred Display Contrast Command BRIGT lt contrast value gt term nn lt contrast value gt 1 32 Sets the display contrast for the front panel LCD Display Contrast Query BRIGT term lt contrast value gt term nn refer to command for description Celsius Reading Query CRDG lt input gt term a input A D D1 D5 for 3062 option lt temp value gt term nnnnnn Also see the RDGST command Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 130 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation CRVDEL Input Format Example CRVHDR Input Format Remarks Example CRVHDR Input Format Returned Format CRVPT Input Format Remarks Example CRVPT Input Form
14. 0 Not ramping 1 Setpoint is ramping Heater Range Command RANGE lt output gt lt range gt term n n lt output gt Specifies which output to configure 1 4 lt range gt For outputs 1 and 2 0 Off 1 Low 2 Medium 3 High For outputs 3 and 4 0 Off 1 On The range setting has no effect if an output is in the Off mode and does not apply to an output in Monitor Out mode An output in Monitor Out mode is always on Heater Range Query RANGE output term n output range term n referto command for description Specifies which output to query 1 4 RDGST Input Format Returned Format Remarks RELAY Input Format Example RELAY Input Format Returned Format RELAYST Input Format Returned Format 6 6 1 InterfaceCommands 141 Input Reading Status Query RDGST lt input gt term a lt input gt Specifies which input to query A D D1 D5 for 3062 option lt status bit weighting gt term nnn The integer returned represents the sum of the bit weighting of the input status flag bits A 000 response indicates a valid reading is present Bit Bit Weighting Status Indicator 0 1 invalid reading 4 16 temp underrange 5 32 temp overrange 6 64 sensor units zero 7 128 sensor units overrange Relay Control Parameter Command RELAY lt relay number gt lt mode gt lt input alarm gt lt alarm type gt term n n a n lt relay number gt Specifies which relay t
15. 32 16 8 4 2 1 Decimal 0PST e n bor jsp nafs name EE AN pov oy Operation 7 J6 5 4 3 2 3 0 Bit eventregister 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 oecima ORSTRT com ea wt iss nen une vin juam OPSTR reads and clears the register To operation event summary Operation event 15 5 3 72 1 0 bit OSB of enable register 128 64 3216 8 41 2 1 Decimal Li FIGURE 6 3 Operation event register As shown in FIGURE 6 1 the Status Byte Register receives the summary bits from the two status register sets and the message available summary bit from the output buffer The status byte is used to generate a service request SRQ The selection of summary bits that generates an SRQ is controlled by Service Request Enable Register 6 2 6 1 Status Byte Register The summary messages from the event registers and output buffer set or clearthe summary bits of the Status Byte Register FIGURE 6 4 These summary bits are not latched Clearing an event register will clear the corresponding summary bit in the Status Byte Register Reading all messages in the output buffer including any pending queries will clear the message available bit The bits of the Status Byte Register are described as follows m Operation Summary OSB Bit 7 this bit is set when an enabled operation event has occurred m Request Service RQS Master Summary Status MSS Bit 6 this bit is set when a summary bit an
16. Lake Shore RMAs are valid for 60 days from issuance however we suggest that equipment needing repair be shipped to Lake Shore within 30 days after the RMA has been issued You will be contacted if we do not receive the equipment within 30 days after the RMA is issued The RMA will be cancelled if we do not receive the equipment after 60 days All shipments to Lake Shore are to be made prepaid by the customer Equipment serviced under warranty will be returned prepaid by Lake Shore Equipment serviced out of warranty will be returned FOB Lake Shore Lake Shore reserves the right to charge a restocking fee for items returned for exchange or reimbursement Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 166 CHAPTER 8 Service Model 336 Temperature Controller 167 Appendix A Temperature Scales A 1 Definition A 2 Comparison A 3 Conversions Temperature is a fundamental unit of measurement that describes the kinetic and potential energies of the atoms and molecules of bodies When the energies and velocities of the molecules in a body are increased the temperature is increased whether the body is a solid liquid or gas Thermometers are used to measure tem perature The temperature scale is based on the temperature at which ice liquid water and water vapor are all in equilibrium This temperature is called the triple point of water and is assigned the value O C 32 F and 273 15 K These 3 tempera ture scales are
17. OUTMODE 1 2 1 0 term Output 1 configured for Zone control mode using InputA for the control input sensor and will turn the output off when power is cycled Modes 4 and 5 are only valid for Analog Outputs 3 and 4 lt powerup enable gt Output Mode Query OUTMODE lt output gt term n lt output gt Specifies which output to query 1 4 lt mode gt lt input gt lt powerup enable gt term n n n refer to command for description Control Loop PID Values Command PID lt output gt lt P value gt lt I value gt lt D value gt term n nnnnn nnnnn nnnn lt output gt Specifies which output s control loop to configure 1 or 2 lt P value gt The value for output Proportional gain 0 1 to 1000 lt l value The value for output Integral reset 0 1 to 1000 D value The value for output Derivative rate O to 200 Control settings P I D and Setpoint are assigned to outputs which results in the settings being applied to any loop formed by the output and its control input PID 1 10 50 0 term Output 1 P is 10 I is 50 and D is 0 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 140 PID Input Format Returned Format RAMP Input Format Example Remarks RAMP Input Format Returned Format RAMPST Input Format Returned Format RANGE Input Format Remarks RANGE Input Format Returned Format Model 336 Temperature Controller CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface O
18. mental factors such as high vacuum magnetic field corrosive chemicals or even radiation can limit the use of some types of sensors Lake Shore has devoted much time to developing sensor packages that withstand the temperatures vacuum levels and bonding materials found in typical cryogenic cooling systems Experiments done in magnetic fields are very common Field dependence oftempera ture sensors is an important selection criteria for sensors used in these experiments This manual briefly qualifies the field dependence of most common sensors in the specifications section 1 3 Detailed field dependence tables are included in the Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog When available specific data on other environmental factors is also included in the catalog Temperature measurements have several sources of uncertainty that reduce accu racy Be sure to account for errors induced by both the sensor and the instrumenta tion when computing accuracy The instrument has measurement error in reading the sensor signal and errorin calculating a temperature using a temperature response curve Error results when the sensor is compared to a calibration standard and the temperature response of a sensor will shift with time and with repeated ther mal cycling from very cold temperatures to room temperature Instrument and sen sor manufacturers specify these errors but there are things you can do to maintain good accuracy For exampl
19. 26 3 38993 15 50 59 3 48524 3 35 92 4 24807 0 120 27 3 39165 14 95 60 3 48955 3 19 93 4 40832 0 088 28 3 39345 14 40 61 3 49421 3 03 94 4 57858 0 067 29 3 39516 13 90 62 3 49894 2 88 95 4 76196 0 055 30 3 39695 13 40 63 3 50406 2 73 96 4 79575 0 051 31 3 39882 12 90 64 3 50962 2 58 97 4 81870 0 050 32 3 40079 12 40 65 3 51528 2 44 33 3 40286 11 90 66 3 52145 2 30 TABLE C 7 Lake Shore RX 202A Rox curve Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 176 Appendices Break Break Break Break 3 15 48 6 10828 57 4 95 2 95792 192 142 714 5 1 6 45774 18 1482 2 6 45733 3 68 49 6 08343 59 4 96 2 82629 196 143 19 2959 741 5 3 6 45688 4 2 50 6 05645 61 5 97 2 6762 200 5 144 20 8082 777 4 6 45632 4 78 51 6 02997 63 5 98 2 52392 205 145 23 1752 832 5 5 6 45565 5 4 52 6 00271 65 5 99 2 36961 209 5 146 24 5166 864 6 6 45494 6 53 5 97469 67 5 100 2 21329 214 147 25 6001 839 5 7 6 4541 6 65 54 5 94591 69 5 101 2 05503 218 5 148 26 5536 912 8 6 4531 7 35 55 5 91637 71 5 102 1 87703 223 5 149 27 4199 932 5 9 6 45201 8 05 56 5 8861 73 5 103 1 69672 228 5 150 28 2413 952 10 6 45073 8 8 57 5 85508 75 5 104 1 51427 233 5 151 29 0181 970 5 11 6 44934 9 55 58 5 82334 77 5 105 1 32972 238 5 152 29 7714 938 5 12 6 44774 10 35 59 5 78268 80 106 1 12444 244 153
20. 5 9 830920 5 12 59 8 438800 87 50 113 2 161610 309 00 6 9 829330 5 72 60 8 366570 90 00 114 2 534960 315 00 7 9 827470 6 35 61 8 292900 92 50 115 2 943070 321 50 8 9 825370 7 00 62 8 217810 95 00 116 3 355100 328 00 9 9 822890 7 70 63 8 141330 97 50 117 3 770870 334 50 10 9 820010 8 45 64 8 047780 100 50 118 4 190420 341 00 11 9 816880 9 20 65 7 952190 103 50 119 4 613650 347 50 12 9 813290 10 00 66 7 854690 106 50 120 5 040520 354 00 13 9 809180 10 85 67 7 755260 109 50 121 5 470960 360 50 14 9 804510 11 75 68 7 653960 112 50 122 5 938380 367 50 15 9 799510 12 65 69 7 550790 115 50 123 6 409870 374 50 16 9 793900 13 60 70 7 445790 118 50 124 6 885210 381 50 17 9 787610 14 60 71 7 338970 121 50 125 7 364360 388 50 18 9 780590 15 65 72 7 230370 124 50 126 7 881760 396 00 19 9 773150 16 70 73 7 120010 127 50 127 8 403380 403 50 20 9 764910 17 80 74 6 989110 131 00 128 8 928940 411 00 21 9 755820 18 95 75 6 855790 134 50 129 9 493760 419 00 22 9 746230 20 10 76 6 720200 138 00 130 10 0629 427 00 23 9 735700 21 30 77 6 582330 141 50 131 10 6361 435 00 24 9 724650 22 50 78 6 442220 145 00 132 11 2494 443 50 25 9 713080 23 70 79 6 299900 148 50 133 11 867 452 00 26 9 699960 25 00 80 6 155400 152 00 134 12 5253 461 00 27 9 686220 26 30 81 6 008740 155 50 135 13 188 470 00 28 9 671890 27 60 82 5 859960 159 00 136 13 892 479 50 29 9 655790 29 00 83 5 687430 163 00 137 14 6005 489 00 30 9 638980 30 40 84 5 5
21. 6 33408 34 5 81 4 48056 140 5 128 8 75291 488 5 175 44 2394 1350 35 6 3235 35 9 82 4 38814 144 129 9 25576 501 176 44 7721 1364 36 6 3117 374 83 4 29393 147 5 130 9 74087 513 177 45 3024 1378 37 6 29939 38 9 84 4 19806 151 131 10 2285 525 178 45 8114 1391 5 38 6 2866 40 4 85 4 10051 154 5 132 10 7186 537 179 46 3182 1405 39 6 27241 42 86 4 00133 158 133 11 2317 549 5 180 46 8038 1418 40 6 25768 43 6 87 3 90053 161 5 134 11 7883 563 181 47 2873 1431 41 6 24239 45 2 88 3 79815 165 135 12 3888 577 5 182 47 7684 1444 42 6 22656 46 8 89 3 6942 168 5 136 13 054 593 5 183 48 2287 1456 5 43 6 21019 48 4 90 3 58873 172 137 13 7844 611 184 48 6868 1469 44 6 19115 50 2 91 3 46638 176 138 14 5592 629 5 185 49 1426 1481 5 45 6 17142 52 92 3 34204 180 139 15 3786 649 186 49 5779 1493 5 46 6 15103 53 8 93 3 21584 184 140 16 2428 669 5 187 50 0111 1505 5 47 6 12998 55 6 94 3 08778 188 141 17 1518 691 TABLEC 8 Type K Nickel Chromium us Nickel Aluminum thermocouple curve Model 336 Temperature Controller 177 3 15 55 77 5 109 1 9 834960 8 713010 50 0 701295 285 0 2 9 834220 3 59 56 8 646710 80 00 110 1 061410 291 00 3 9 833370 4 04 57 8 578890 82 50 111 1 424820 297 00 4 9 832260 4 56 58 8 509590 85 00 112 1 791560 303 00
22. B C D gt Audible gt Off On Default Visible gt 0n Audible gt 0n Interface Command ALARM 5 7 1 2 Alarm Latching m latching Alarms often used to detect faults in a system or experiment that requires operator intervention The alarm state remains visible to the operator for diagnostics even if the alarm condition is removed Relays often signal remote monitors or for added safety take critical equipment off line You can cleara latched alarm by pressing Alarm and selecting Yes to the Reset Alarm prompt Select No to the Reset Alarm prompt to enter the Alarm Setup menu m Non Latching Alarms often tied to relay operation to control part of a system or experiment The alarm state follows the reading value The dead band parameter can prevent relays from turning on and off repeatedly when the sensor input reading is near an alarm setpoint 5 7 1 Alarms 81 FIGURE 5 5 illustrates the interaction between alarm setpoint and dead bandin non latching operation With the high alarm setpoint at 100 K and the dead band at 5 K the high alarm triggers when sensor input temperature increases to 100 K and it will not deactivate until temperature drops to 95 K In addition the same 5 K dead band is applied to the low alarm setpoint as well High alarm activated EN High alarm setpoint High alarm deactivated 100K Temperature reading Alarm latching off Deadband 5K 55K Low alarm setpoint 50K Low alarm act
23. Choose Yes at the confirmation message to finalize the operation 5 Tocancel the operation either choose No to the confirmation message or press Escape ew Menu Navigation Curve Entry Copy Curve gt 1 59 gt 21 59 Interface Command No interface command directly corresponds to the copy curve operation You can use the CRVHDR and CRVPT commands to read curve information from one curve location and write that information to another curve location Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 88 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation 5 10 SoftCal 5 10 1 SoftCal With Silicon Diode Sensors Model 336 Temperature Controller The Model 336 allows you to perform inexpensive sensor calibrations with a set of algorithms called SoftCal The two SoftCal algorithms in the Model 336 work with DT 400 Series silicon diode sensors and platinum sensors They create a new tem perature response curve from the standard curve and known data points that you entered The new curve loads into one of the user curve locations 21 to 59 in the instrument The following sections describe the data points you need to supply and the expected accuracy of the resulting curves A feature similar to SoftCal is available for compensating thermocouples using the Curve Handler program Both DT 400 Series and platinum SoftCal algorithms require a standard curve that is already present in the Model 336 When you enter the type of sensor bei
24. Control parameters are changed based System response istoo slow orthe heater If not already using High 3 istoo underpowered for the system to range increase initial setpoint change onobservation Autotune heater range Waiting for temperature to settle z System response is too slow to Autotune Provides a baseline for sale 4 after returning setpoint to or the new control parameters are caus Use a smaller initial P value fs subsequent stages es i original value ing instability in the control Ensures that there is no temperature age zr System response is too slow to Autotune z E oscillation or excessive noise in the 5 Testing for temperature stability orthe new control parameters are Usea smaller initial P value temperature reading after control di Ene causing instability in the control parameter adjustment Observing system response to Control parameters are changed again System response is too slow to Autotune If not already using High 6 setpoint change using new control based on observation This is the final orthe heater is too underpowered forthe range increase initial parameters stage of P only Autotuning system to Autotune heater range Waiting for temperature to settle System response is too slow to Autotune 7 after returning setpoint to original Provides a baseline for subsequent stages or the new control parameters are caus Use a smaller initial P value value ing instability in t
25. D value gt lt mout value range input rate term n nn nnnnn nnnnn nnnnn nnnn nnnnn n n nnnn term lt output gt Specifies which heater output to configure 1 or 2 lt zone gt Specifies which zone in the table to configure Valid entries are 1 10 lt upper bound gt Specifies the upper Setpoint boundary of this zone in kelvin P value Specifies the P for this zone 0 1 to 1000 lt I value Specifies the I forthis zone 0 1 to 1000 D value Specifies the D for this zone O to 200 mout value Specifies the manual output for this zone O to 100 lt range gt Specifies the heater range for this zone Valid entries O Off 1 Low 2 Med 3 High lt input gt Specifies the sensor input to use for this zone 0 Default Use previously assigned sensor 1 Input A 2 Input B 3 Input C 4 Input D 5 Input D2 6 Input D3 7 Input D4 8 Input DS for 3062 option lt rate gt Specifies the ramp rate for this zone 0 1 100 K min Configures the output zone parameters Refer to Paragraph 2 9 ZONE 1 1 25 0 10 20 0 0 2 2 10 term Output 1 zone 1 is valid to 25 0 K with P 10 1 20 D 0 a heater range of medium sensor input B anda ramp rate of 10 K min Output Zone Table Parameter Query ZONE lt output gt lt zone gt term n nn lt output gt Specifies which heater output to query 1 or 2 zone Specifies which zone in the table to query Valid entries 1 10 upp
26. Description of Accessories Stycast Epoxy 2850 FT Catalyst 9 20 packets 2 g each Stycast is a common highly versa tile nonconductive epoxy resin system for cryogenic use The primary use for Stycast is for vacuum feedthroughs or permanent thermal anchors Stycast is an alternative to Apiezon N Grease when permanent sensor mountings are desired ID 10 XX Indium Solder Disks Quantity 10 Indium is a semi precious non ferrous metal softerthan lead and extremely malleable and ductile It stays soft and workable down to cryogenic tem peratures Indium can be used to create solder bumps for microelectronic chip attachments and also as gaskets for pressure and vacuum sealing purposes ID 10 31 Indium Disks are 7 92 mm diameter x 0 13 mm 0 312 in diameter x 0 005 in ID 10 56 Indium Disks are 14 27 mm diameter x 0 127 mm 0 562 diameter x 0 005 in Indium Foil Sheets Quantity 5 When used as a washer between DT 470 CU silicon diode or other temperature sensors and refrigerator cold stages indium foil increases the thermal con tact area and prevents the sensor from detaching due to vibration It also may be used as a sealing gasket for covers flanges and windows in cryogenic applications Each sheet is 0 13 mm x 50 8 mm x 50 8 mm 0 005 in x 2 in x 2 in GAH 25 Apiezon H Grease 25 g Tube It is designed for general purposes where operating tempera tures necessitate the use of a relatively high melting poin
27. Output D poe By reacting to a fast changing error signal the derivative can work to boost the output when the setpoint changes quickly reducing the time it takes for temperature to reach the setpoint It can also see the error decreasing rapidly when the temperature nears the setpoint and reduce the output for less overshoot The derivative term can be useful in fast changing systems but it is often turned off during steady state con trol because it reacts too strongly to small disturbances The derivative setting D is related to the dominant time constant of the load similar to the I setting and is there fore set relative to I setting when used The Model 336 has a control setting that is not a normal part of a PID control loop Manual Output can be used for open loop control meaning feedback is ignored and the heater output stays at the user s manual setting This is a good way to put con stant heating power into a load when needed The Manual Output term can also be added to the PID output Some users prefer to set a power near that necessary to con trol at a setpoint and let the closed loop make up the small difference Manual Output is set in percent of full scale current or power for a given heater range section 4 5 1 5 5 Manual Output should be set to 0 when not in use Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 26 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control o 3 pa o a E 7
28. The negative terminals are connected inter nally to the instrument chassis to provide a ground reference we OUTPUTS 30VDC 3A ANALOG RELAY1 RELAY 2 FIGURE 3 10 Output terminal block Inthe most basic configuration a two conductor cable connects directly from the output terminals to the power supply programming input Copper wire size 20 AWG to 26 AWG is recommended 3 8 5 4 Programming Voltages Under 10 V A voltage divider FIGURE 3 11 can be used to reduce the control output voltage if the programming input of the power supply has a range of less than O V to 10V to ensure full output resolution and protection against overloading the external supply pro gramming inputs The output voltage is proportional to the ratio of resistors R1 to R2 Vout 10V x R1 R1 R2 It is also important to keep the sum of R1 R2 1000 Q or the Model 336 output may not reach the output voltage setting due to internal overload protection For a programming input range of O V to 5 V recom mended values are R1 R2 2000 Q Fora programming input range of O V to 1 V recommended values are R1 500 Q R2 4500 Q Exact resistor value type and tol erance are generally not important for this application Model 350 Power supply Output 3 R2 Program input R1 Output 3 Program input FIGURE 3 11 Voltage divider circuit for Output 3 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 42 CHAPTER 3 Installation Model 336 Temperature
29. iii 84 5 91 Edit Curve aia 84 5 9 1 1 Edita Breakpoint Pair cece cece eect e etter e eens 85 5 9 1 2 Add a New Breakpoint Pair 86 5 9 1 3 Delete a Breakpoint Pair cece cece eect eee eee e ees 86 5 9 1 4 Thermocouple Curve Considerations 86 5 9 2 VIEW CURVE 87 5 93 EFASEGUIVE sir E Aa 87 5 94 COPY CUE neri lei Ri 87 5 10 SoftCal M cileni ei o 88 5 10 1 SoftCal With Silicon Diode Sensors e eee eee eens 88 5 10 2 SoftCal Accuracy With DT 400 Series Silicon Diode Sensors 89 5 10 3 SoftCal With Platinum Sensors 06 e ee e 90 5 10 4 SoftCal Accuracy With Platinum Sensors cence eee e eee 90 5 10 5 SoftCal CalibrationCurve Creation irinaren raskaan 91 6 Generali ETE 93 6 2 IEEE 488 Interface eee eee eee eee e e esses 93 6 2 1 Changing IEEE 488 Interface Parameters cee eeeee eee eeee eee e es 94 6 2 2 Remote Local Operation 0 cece cece cece e eee e ee 94 6 2 3 IEEE 488 2 Command Structure iii 94 6 2 3 1 Bus Control Commands cece cece cece teen eene 94 6 2 3 2 Common CommandS cece cette enn 95 6 2 3 3 Device Specific Commands e cece e eee e eee eee 95 6 2 3 4 Message Strings 2 cece e cece mme 95 6 2 4 Status System Overview ssssssssssssssssssssse e e sn 96 6 2 4 1 Condition Registers e
30. time delay fuse ratings as follows 100 120V 4AT250V 5x 20mm 220 240V 4AT250V 5x20mm Re assemble the line input assembly in reverse order Verify voltage indicator in the line input assembly window Connect the instrument power cord Turn the power switch On I It is sometimes necessary to reset instrument parameter values or clear the contents of curve memory Both are stored in nonvolatile memory called NOVRAM but they can be cleared individually Instrument calibration is not affected except for Room Temperature Calibration which should be recalibrated after parameters are set to default values or any time the thermocouple curve is changed Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 156 CHAPTER 8 Service 8 7 1 Default Values The factory defaults can be reset and the user curves cleared using the Factory Reset menu To access the Factory Reset menu press and hold the Escape key for 5 s Once the menu appears set either Reset to Defaults or Clear Curves or both to Yes then highlight Execute and press Enter Interface Setup General Default Sensor type Diode Enabled USB Filter Off Interface Setup IEEE Default Input name Input A B C D IEEE Address 12 Temperature limit OK Off Interface Setup Ethernet Default Input units Kelvin DHCP On Curve DT 670 Auto IP Off Input Setup Diode Static IP 192 168 0 12 Range 2 5 V Silicon Static Subnet
31. where from two to eight display locations for displaying sensor readings The placement of a given display location on the front panel LCD depends on the Number of Displays setting FIGURE 4 5 of Off FIGURE 4 5 lop to bottom Model 336 screen Images showing 2 4 and 8 display locations m Number of Custom display locations the Number of Displays parameter determines how many sensor readings are displayed as well as the character size of the dis played readings If 2 Large is selected then two large character readings are displayed along with sensor names If 4 Large is selected then four large character readings are displayed without sensor names If 8 Small is selected then eight small character readings are displayed without sensor names Menu Navigation Display Setup gt Numberof Locations gt 2 Large 4 Large 8 Small Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 50 CHAPTER 4 Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller Input and Units each available display location has an associated Input and Units setting The Input parameter determines which sensor will be used as the input of the displayed data The Input can be any of the four sensor inputs or None If None is selected then the display location will be blank The Units parameter determines which units to display the reading in Menu Navigation Display Setup Location 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Input gt None Input A Input B Input
32. which is avail able for 400 Series silicon diodes and platinum sensors Good Sensors using standard curves Silicon diodes follow standard curves Platinum resistors follow standard curves Ruthenium oxide Rox resistors follow standard curves Thermocouples follow standard curves GaAlAs diode carbon glass Cernox germanium and rhodium iron sensors can be purchased uncalibrated but must be calibrated to accurately read in temperature units TABLE 2 1 Sensor diode sensor calibrations 2 3 1 Precision Calibration 2 3 2 SoftCal 2 3 3 Sensors Using Standard Curves 2 3 4 Curve Handler 2 3 1 PrecisionCalibration 17 To calibrate Lake Shore compares a sensor with an unknown temperature response to an accepted standard Lake Shore temperature standards are traceable to the U S National Institute of Standards and Testing NIST orthe National Physical Labo ratory in Great Britain These standards allow Lake Shore to calibrate sensors from 20 mK to above room temperature Calibrated sensors are more expensive than uncalibrated sensors of the same type because of the labor cryogen use and capitol equipment used in the process Precision calibration provides the most accurate temperature sensors available from Lake Shore Uncertainty from sensor calibration is almost always smaller than the error contributed by the Model 336 The Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog has comp
33. 106 mK 10 6 mK E eec 232240 107850 K 8 5 uK 0 1mK 36mK 17 pK T CHER 0 5K 1248 20 2665 2 Q K 26 uK 0 2 mK 24 7 mk 152 pK Gi 42K 277 320 32 2090 K 1404K 3 8 mK 8 8 mK 280 pK 300K 30 3920 0 06540 K 23 mK 339 mK 414 mK 46 mK l ewdaeneepenie 14K 265660 48449 Q K 20UK s03mK 53mK 404K Camas EPI 42K 350720 1120 80 K 196pK 2 1mK 7 1mK 392 pK calibration 77K 205670 241160 K 19mK 38 mK 154 mK 3 8 mK 420K 45 030 0 08290 K 18 mK 338 mK 403 mK 36 mK m 035K 182250 1934530 K 4yK o A84K 42mK E8pK CERA DD 14K 4490 581 Q K 414K 481 pK 24 7 mk 82 UK EE 4 2K 940 26 6 O K 56pK 1 8 mK 16 8 mK 112 pK 100K 270 0 024 O K 6 3 mK 152 mK 175mK 12 6 mK ee 18K 152880 268680 K 28 uK 302 pK t45mK 456K im wha 42K 16890 862 Q K 914K 900 uK 5 1mK 182 pK calibration 10K 2530 62 0 O K 73 UK 1 8 mK 6 8mK 146 UK 100 K 2 80 0 021 0 K 7 1mK 1177 mK 200 mK 14 2 mK f vo Te 1039000 5200000 K 13 uK 0 1mK 41mK 26pK ITA ca 4 2K 584 60 42230 K 63 pK 0 8 mK 24 8 mK 126 pK ino 77K 14330 0 0980 K 4 6 mK 108 mK 133 mK 9 2 mK 300 K 8 550 0 00940 K 16 mK 760 mK 865 mK 32 mK un 0 5K 370010 54780 K 41pK 0 5 mK 5 mK 82 uK Rox Wa 1 4K 2005 Q 667 Q K 1284K 1 4 mK 16 4 mk 256 uK Leni 4 2K 13700 80 3 O K 902 uK 8 mK 24 mK 1 8 mK 40K 10490 1 06 O K 62 mK 500 mK 537K 124 mK 4 2 6 0 nF 27 pF K 74 mK Calibration not 14 8 mK Capacitance CS 501 77 9 1nF 52 pF K 39 mK N
34. 180 30 33 0 93 272 22 297 67 183 15 90 130 90 183 15 32 0 273 15 TABLEA 1 Temperature conversions Model 336 Temperature Controller 169 gAppendix B Handling Liquid Helium and Nitrogen B 1 General Use of liquid helium LHe and liquid nitrogen LN is often associated with the Model 336 temperature controller Although not explosive there are a number of safety considerations to keep in mind in the handling of LHe and LN B 2 Properties LHe and LN are colorless odorless and tasteless gases Gaseous nitrogen makes up about 78 percent of the Earth s atmosphere while helium comprises only about 5 ppm Most helium is recovered from natural gas deposits Once collected and iso lated the gases will liquefy when properly cooled A quick comparison between LHe and LN is provided in Table C 1 Boiling Point at 1 atm 4 2K 77K Thermal Conductivity Gas w cm K 0 083 0 013 Latent Heat of Vaporization Btu L 2 4 152 Liquid Density Ib L 0 275 0 78 TABLE B 1 Comparison of liquid helium and liquid nitrogen B 3 Handling Cryogenic containers Dewars must be operated in accordance with the manufac Cryogenic Storage turer instructions Safety instructions will also be posted on the side of each Dewar Dewars Cryogenic Dewars must be kept in a well ventilated place where they are protected from the weather and away from any sources of heat A typical cryogenic Dewar is s
35. 2 gt Heater Out Display Current or Power Default Current Interface Command HTRSET 4 5 1 4 Output Modes The heater outputs can be configured in one of four output modes Off Closed Loop PID Zone or Open Loop The Off mode prevents current from being sourced to the given output Closed Loop PID isthe mode most often used for controlling tempera ture Zone mode builds on the Closed Loop mode by providing automatic changing of control parameters at up to ten different temperature zones Open Loop mode pro vides a means of applying a constant current to the output Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1 or 2 gt 0utput Mode Off Closed Loop PID Zone Open Loop Default Off Interface Command OUTMODE 4 5 1 4 1 Closed Loop PID Mode The Closed Loop PID mode is the most commonly used closed loop control mode for tightly controlling temperature using the heater outputs of the Model 336 In this mode the controller attempts to keep the load at exactly the user entered setpoint temperature To do this it uses feedback from the control input sensorto calculate and actively adjustthe control output setting The Model 336 uses a control algo rithm called PID that refers to the three terms used to tune the control Refer to sec tion 4 4 11 for details on assigning a Control Input for the closed loop feedback Refer to section 2 7 and section 2 8 for a detailed discussion of PID control and manual tuning Lake Shore www lak
36. 2 7 nW 300 nA 100 kQ 1nw 100 nA TABLE 4 8 Range and sensor power To keep power low and avoid sensor self heating the sensor excitation is kept low There are two major problems that occur when measuring the resulting small DC voltages The first is external noise entering the measurement through the sensor leads which is discussed with sensor setup The second is the presence of thermal EMF voltages or thermocouple voltages in the lead wiring Thermal EMF voltages appear when there is a temperature gradient across a piece of voltage lead Thermal EMF voltages must exist because the sensor is almost never the same temperature as the instrument To minimize them use careful wiring make sure the voltage leads are symmetrical in the type of metal used and how they are joined and keep unnecessary heat sources away from the leads Even in a well designed system thermal EMF volt ages can be an appreciable part of a low voltage sensor measurement The Model 336 can help with a thermal compensation algorithm The instrument will automatically reverse the polarity of the current source every other reading The average of the positive and negative sensor readings will cancel the thermal EMF voltage that is present in the same polarity regardless of current direction This cor rection algorithm is enabled by default for RTD sensor types but can be turned off using the Current Reversal parameter The Current Reversal parameter defaults t
37. 222 22 387 67 233 15 40 220 140 133 15 58 50 223 15 382 230 43 15 219 67 139 82 133 33 50 45 56 227 59 380 228 89 44 26 210 134 44 138 71 49 67 45 37 227 78 379 67 228 71 44 44 209 67 134 26 138 89 45 67 43 15 230 370 223 33 49 82 207 67 133 15 140 40 40 233 15 369 67 223 15 50 202 130 143 15 39 67 39 82 233 33 364 220 53 15 200 128 89 144 26 30 34 44 238 71 360 217 78 55 37 199 67 128 71 144 44 29 67 34 26 238 89 359 67 217 59 55 56 190 123 33 149 82 27 67 33 15 240 351 67 213 15 60 189 67 123 15 150 22 30 243 15 350 212 22 60 93 184 120 153 15 20 28 89 244 26 349 67 212 04 61 11 180 117 78 155 37 19 67 28 71 244 44 346 210 63 15 179 67 117 59 155 56 10 23 33 249 82 340 206 67 66 48 171 67 113 15 160 9 67 23 15 250 339 67 206 48 66 67 170 112 22 160 93 4 20 253 15 333 67 203 15 70 169 67 112 04 161 11 0 17 78 255 37 330 201 11 72 04 166 110 163 15 0 33 17 59 255 56 329 67 200 93 72 22 160 106 67 166 48 8 33 13 15 260 328 200 73 15 159 67 106 48 166 67 10 12 22 260 93 320 195 56 77 59 153 67 103 15 170 10 33 12 04 261 11 319 67 195 37 77 78 150 101 11 172 04 14 10 263 15 315 67 193 15 80 149 67 100 93 172 22 20 6 67 266 48 310 190 83 15 148 100 173 15 20 33 6 48 266 67 309 67 189 82 83 33 140 95 96 177 59 26 33 3 15 270 300 184 44 88 71 139 67 95 37 177 78 30 111 272 04 299 67 184 26 88 89 135 67 93 15
38. 244 50 157 16 8224 606 50 48 5 741100 64 00 103 0 909257 249 00 158 17 3594 615 50 49 5 704560 66 50 104 0 744065 253 50 159 17 9297 625 00 50 5 667130 69 00 105 0 576893 258 00 160 18 5037 634 50 51 5 628800 71 50 106 0 407776 262 50 161 19 1116 644 50 52 5 589590 74 00 107 0 217705 267 50 162 19 7538 655 00 53 5 549510 76 50 108 0 025325 272 50 163 20 4611 666 50 54 5 508560 79 00 109 0 188573 278 00 164 20 8627 673 00 55 5 466760 81 50 110 0 404639 283 50 TABLE C 10 Type T Copper us Copper Nickel thermocouple curve Model 336 Temperature Controller 179 1 32 160 4 6667 2 24537 2 4 62838 6 35 33 2 06041 170 3 4 60347 8 15 34 1 86182 180 5 4 4 58043 9 75 35 1 66004 191 5 4 53965 12 5 36 1 47556 200 5 6 4 47226 16 95 37 1 0904 220 7 4 43743 19 3 38 0 73397 237 5 8 4 39529 22 2 39 0 68333 240 9 4 34147 26 40 0 3517 256 10 4 29859 29 1 41 0 2385 261 5 11 4 26887 31 3 42 0 078749 277 12 4 22608 34 5 43 0 139668 280 13 4 2018 36 3 44 0 426646 294 5 14 4 02151 49 8 45 0 546628 300 5 15 3 94549 55 4 46 0 858608 316 16 3 87498 60 5 47 0 938667 320 17 3 80464 65 5 48 1 3456 340 18 3 73301 70 5 49 1 7279 358 5 19 3 65274 76 50 1 76905 360 5 20 3 5937 80 51 2 20705 381 5 21 3 51113 85 5 52 2 51124 396 22 3 45023 89 5 53 2 69878 405 23 3 43451 90 5 54 2 94808 417 24 3 37842 94 55 3 13562
39. 3 Installing the USB Driver cece e e eee 104 6 3 3 1 Installing the Driver From Windows Update in Windows 7 and Vista cece cece cece eee ence ees 104 6 3 3 2 Installing the Driver From Windows Update in Windows XP 105 6 3 3 3 Installing the Driver From the Web eee eeee eee es 105 6 3 3 3 1 Download the driver 0 cece cece eee e eee eee ees 105 6 3 3 3 2 Extract the driver our 105 6 3 3 3 3 Manually install the driver cece eee eee eee 106 6 3 3 4 Installing the USB Driver from the Included CD 107 6 3 4 COMMUNICATION esi RR emis ta i LL 107 6 3 4 1 Character Format 108 6 3 4 2 Message STINGS Licia 108 6 3 5 Message Flow Control eee eee 108 Ethernet Interfd6e ii cesser eror eno 109 6 4 1 Ethernet Configura Mrs area RE AR MER ada 109 6 4 1 1 Network Address Parameters issues 109 6 4 1 2 Network Addresss Configuration Methods 110 6 4 1 3 DNS Parameters cies E e HERR RES EU RR DCDEE wees 111 6 4 2 Viewing Ethernet Configuration cceeee cence ee eee teen eee ee eed 113 6 4 2 1 LAN Status spera ace sees 113 6 4 2 2 MAC Address cis i 114 6 4 2 3 Viewing Network Configuration Parameters and DNS Para meters sicario loan 114 6 4 3 TCP Socket Communication cece eee cece eee 114 6 4 4 Embedded WeblInterface ccc ono rra 115 6 4 4 1 Connecting to the Web Interface 00 cece c
40. 30 5011 1006 13 6 44601 11 15 60 5 74084 82 5 107 0 91675 249 5 154 31 2074 1023 14 6 44403 12 61 5 69792 85 108 0 70686 255 155 31 8905 1039 5 15 6 44189 12 85 62 5 6539 87 5 109 0 47553 261 156 32 571 1056 16 6 43947 13 75 63 5 60879 90 110 0 22228 267 5 157 33 2489 1072 5 17 6 43672 14 7 64 5 5626 92 5 111 0 053112 274 5 158 33 9038 1088 5 18 6 43378 15 65 65 5 51535 95 112 0 350783 282 159 34 5561 1104 5 19 6 43065 16 6 66 5 46705 97 5 113 0 651006 289 5 160 35 2059 1120 5 20 6 42714 17 6 67 5 4177 100 114 0 973714 297 5 161 35 8532 1136 5 21 6 42321 18 65 68 5 36731 102 5 115 1 31919 306 162 36 4979 1152 5 22 6 41905 19 7 69 5 3159 105 116 1 70801 315 5 163 37 14 1168 5 23 6 41442 20 8 70 5 26348 107 5 117 2 14052 326 164 37 7596 1184 24 6 40952 21 9 71 5 19928 110 5 118 2 69954 339 5 165 38 3767 1199 5 25 6 40435 23 72 5 13359 113 5 119 3 75883 365 166 38 9915 1215 26 6 39841 24 2 73 5 06651 116 5 120 4 29687 378 167 39 6038 1230 5 27 6 39214 25 4 74 4 99801 119 5 121 4 74986 389 168 40 2136 1246 28 6 38554 26 6 75 4 92813 122 5 122 5 17977 399 5 169 40 821 1261 5 29 6 37863 27 8 76 4 85687 125 5 123 5 60705 410 170 41 4063 1276 5 30 6 37077 29 1 77 4 78426 128 5 124 6 03172 420 5 171 41 9893 1291 5 31 6 36253 30 4 78 4 71031 131 5 125 6 49428 432 172 42 5699 1306 5 32 6 35391 31 7 79 4 63503 134 5 126 7 09465 447 173 43 1288 1321 33 6 34422 33 1 80 4 55845 137 5 127 8 15226 473 5 174 43 6853 1335 5 34
41. 69 3 16593 3 26 104 4 79803 0 050 35 3 05058 13 90 70 3 17191 3 11 TABLE C 6 Lake Shore RX 102A Rox curve Model 336 Temperature Controller 175 1 3 35085 40 0 34 3 40482 11 45 67 3 52772 2 17 2 3 35222 38 5 35 3 40688 11 00 68 3 53459 2 04 3 3 35346 37 2 36 3 40905 10 55 69 3 54157 1 92 4 3 35476 35 9 37 3 41134 10 10 70 3 54923 1 80 5 3 35612 34 6 38 3 41377 9 65 71 3 55775 1 68 6 3 35755 33 3 39 3 41606 9 25 72 3 56646 1 57 7 3 35894 32 1 40 3 41848 8 85 73 3 57616 1 46 8 3 36039 30 9 41 3 42105 8 45 74 3 58708 1 35 9 3 36192 29 7 42 3 42380 8 05 75 3 59830 1 25 10 3 36340 28 6 43 3 42637 7 70 76 3 61092 1 150 11 3 36495 27 5 44 3 42910 7 35 77 3 62451 1 055 12 3 36659 26 4 45 3 43202 7 00 78 3 63912 0 965 13 3 36831 25 3 46 3 43515 6 65 79 3 65489 0 880 14 3 37014 24 2 47 3 43853 6 30 80 3 67206 0 800 15 3 37191 23 2 48 3 44230 5 94 81 3 69095 0 725 16 3 37377 22 2 49 3 44593 5 62 82 3 71460 0 645 17 3 37575 21 2 50 3 44984 5 30 83 3 73889 0 575 18 3 37785 20 2 51 3 45355 5 02 84 3 76599 0 510 19 3 37942 19 50 52 3 45734 4 76 85 3 79703 0 448 20 3 38081 18 90 53 3 46180 4 48 86 3 83269 0 390 21 3 38226 18 30 54 3 46632 4 22 87 3 87369 0 336 22 3 38377 17 70 55 3 47012 4 02 88 3 92642 0 281 23 3 38522 17 15 56 3 47357 3 85 89 3 98609 0 233 24 3 38672 16 60 57 3 47726 3 68 90 4 05672 0 190 25 3 38829 16 05 58 3 48122 3 51 91 4 14042 0 153
42. 96 5 2 4 2 EVENT REBISTOIS iu prin eventa Rast M AUR UR HE LEA 96 6 2 4 3 Enable Registers vii 96 6 2 4 4 Status Byte Register cece eee e seen e eee eee e ees 98 6 2 4 5 Service Request Enable Register ce eeeee eee senna ee ees 98 6 2 4 6 Reading Registers bpa EEAS AEren eee mee 98 6 2 4 7 Programming Registers csse 98 6 2 4 8 Clearing Registers sss 99 6 2 5 Status System Detail Status Register Sets eee eee e eee eee 99 6 2 5 1 Standard Event Status Register Set ee eeeeeee eee eee 99 6 2 5 2 Operation Event Register Set eee eee eee eens 100 6 2 6 Status System Detail Status Byte Register and Service Request 101 6 2 6 1 Status Byte Register e eee eee eee e ened 101 Chapter 7 Options and Accessories 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 6 2 6 2 Service Request Enable Register eee eeeee eee eens 102 6 2 6 3 Using Service Request SRQ and Serial Poll 102 6 2 6 4 Using Status Byte Query STB 0 0 cece cece cece cette eee eee eees 103 6 2 6 5 Using the Message Available MAV Bit cece eee ees 103 6 2 6 6 Using Operation Complete OPC and Operation Complete Query FOPC cee cece cece eens 103 USB MECO picnic ni 104 6 3 1 PhysicaliCOnmnectioni roms rr pra 104 6 3 2 Hardware S ppOTE i c sr aa aa 104 6 3
43. A Input B Input C and Input D in the Display Mode parameter list Each of these modes provides detailed information relevant to the respective sensor input The top half of the display provides information related to the sensor input The input letter is displayed followed by the user assignable input name The sensor reading is displayed in large character format using the units assigned to the respective input s Input Units parameter The top half of the display also shows the maximum and the minimum sensor reading since the last Max Min reset The bottom half of the display contains information related to the control loop that is using the sensor input provided in the top half of the display as its Control Input parameter Only the items applicable to the control loop will be displayed Specifi cally the number of the control loop output followed by the Output Mode setting is displayed The P I D Manual Output Setpoint and Heater Output information of the control loop are also displayed If no control loop uses the sensor input then no infor mation is applicable The input display modes are unique in that they can be set temporarily by pressing the A B C or D front panel keys After the key is pressed the respective input display mode becomes active for approximately 10 s before returning to the configured dis play mode This provides quick access to each input and each associated control loop for gathering information
44. Computer Interface Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller 6 2 4 4 Status Byte Register The Status Byte register typically referred to as the Status Byte is a non latching read only register that contains all of the summary bits from the register sets The status of the summary bits are controlled from the register sets as explained in sec tion 6 2 4 1 to section 6 2 4 3 The Status Byte also contains the Request for Service RQS Master Summary Status MSS bit This bit is used to control the Service Request hardware line on the bus and to report if any of the summary bits are set via the STB command The status of the RQS MSS bit is controlled by the summary bits and the Service Request Enable Register 6 2 4 5 Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register determines which summary bits in the Status Byte will set the RQS MSS bit of the Status Byte You may write to or read from the Ser vice Request Enable Register Each Status Byte summary bit is logically ANDed to the corresponding enable bit of the Service Request Enable Register When you set a Ser vice Request Enable Register bit and the corresponding summary bit is set in the Sta tus Byte the RQS MSS bit of the Status Byte will be set which in turn sets the Service Request hardware line on the bus 6 2 4 6 Reading Registers You can read any register in the status system using the appropriate query command Some registers clear when read others d
45. Controller E Chapter 4 Operation 4 1 General This chapter provides instructions for the general operating features of the Model 336 temperature controller Advanced operation is in Chapter 5 Computer interface instructions are in Chapter 6 Direct Menu LED operation number pad annunciators InputSetup CurveEntry Remote Local Exit Menu ooo an 1 Ethernet OutputSetup ZoneSettings Interface peo a Um GOO Max Min Reset Alarm 0 na ENTER LED annunciators FIGURE 4 1 Model 336 front panel 4 1 1 Understanding Each feature that is discussed in this chapter will include a menu navigation section Menu Navigation This section is intended to be a quick guide through the necessary key presses to arrive at and set the desired features See FIGURE 4 2 and TABLE 4 1 for an explana tion of the conventions used in the menu navigation A B C D E MEME Input Setup Input A B C or D Enter gt Room Compensation Off or On FIGURE 4 2 Menu navigation example Item Convention Explanation A Bold Typically the first word in the menu navigation is in bold type which indicates the first key you will need to press The arrow indicates that the screen is advancing to the next screen In the menu navi B gt gation the item that follows the arrow is the next item you would see on the screen or the next action that you will need to perform Often the words that follow the arrow are in italic type The
46. Grounding and Shielding Sensor Leads 3 5 4 Sensor Polarity Model 336 Temperature Controller The sensor lead cable used outside the cooling system can be much different from what is used inside Between the instrument and vacuum shroud heat leak is not a concern In this case choose cabling to minimize error and noise pick up Larger con ductor 22 AWG to 28 AWG stranded copper wire is recommended because it has low resistance yet remains flexible when several wires are bundled in a cable The arrangement of wires in a cable is also important For best results voltage leads V and V should be twisted together and current leads I and I should be twisted together The twisted pairs of voltage and current leads should then be covered with a braided or foil shield that is connected to the shield pin of the instrument This type of cable is available through local electronics suppliers Instrument specifications are given assuming 3 m 10 ft of sensor cable Longer cables 30 m 100 ft or more can be used but environmental conditions may degrade accuracy and noise specifica tions Refer to section 2 4 6 for information about wiring inside the cryostat The sensor inputs are isolated from earth ground to reduce the amount of earth ground referenced noise that is present on the measurement leads Connecting sen sor leads to earth ground on the chassis of the instrument or in the cooling system will defeat that isolation Grounding leads on m
47. Inc rep resentative for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained Cleaning Do not submerge instrument Clean only with a damp cloth and mild detergent Exte rior only O Otr 2A ei Direct current power line ol Alternating current power line Alternating or direct current power line A Three phase alternating current power line Earth ground terminal AN Protective conductor terminal Frame or chassis terminal On supply Off supply FIGURE 1 4 Safety symbols 1 4 SafetySummaryand Symbols 13 Equipment protected throughout by double insulation or reinforces insulation equivalent to Class Il of IEC 536 see Annex H CAUTION High voltages danger of electric shock background color yellow symbol and outline black CAUTION or WARNING See instrument documentation background color yellow symbol and outline black Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 14 CHAPTER 1 Introduction Model 336 Temperature Controller 2 2 1 TemperatureRange 15 Chapter 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 1 General 2 2 Temperature Sensor Selection 2 2 1 Temperature Range 2 2 2 Sensor Sensitivity Selecting the proper cryostat or cooling source is probably the most important deci sion in designing a temperature control system The cooling source defines minimum temperature cool down time and cooling power Information on choosing a cooling source is beyond the
48. Mask 255 255 255 0 Diode current 10 pA Static Gateway 192 168 0 1 Madii e Pes Static Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Autorange On Static Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Current reversal On Preferred hostname LSCI 336 Input Setup Thermocouple Web username user Room comp On Web password Output Setup Output mode Closed loop PID off for Output 3 and 4 Control input Input A for Output 1 Input B for Output 2 Alarm Relay Relay o 3 Default o T none for output 3 and 4 Heater resistance 250 Keypad Locking Default Power up enable off Mode Unlocked Heater out display Current Lock code 123 Setpoint ramping off A Re ace Gow Default MHP Output Display mode Custom Integral I 20 0 Number of locations 2 large Derivative D 0 0 Location 1 source Input A Manual Output 0 000 Location 2 source Input B Heater range off Location 3 source Input C Setpoint value 0 000 K Location 4 source Input D Remote Local Local Location 5 source InputA Upper boundary 0 000 K Location 5 units Sensor Proportional P 50 0 Location 6 source Input B Integral I 20 0 Location 6 units Sensor Derivative D 0 00 Location 7 source Input C Manual output 0 000 Location 7 units Sensor Range off Location 8 source Input D Ramp rate 0 100 K min Location 8 units Sensor Control input Default Contrast 28 Model 336 Temperature Control er TABLE 8 1 Default
49. Monitor Out settings Scale Data source Settings Type Update rate Range Resolution Accuracy Noise Minimum load resistance Connector Display Number of reading displays Display units Reading source Display update rate Temperature display resolution Sensor units display resolution Other displays Setpoint setting resolution Heater output display Heater output resolution Display annunciators LED annunciators Keypad Front panel features Closed loop PID PID zones warm up heater mode manual output or Monitor Out Autotune one loop at a time PID PID zones Sensor dependedn see Input Specifications table Oto 1000 with 0 1 setting resolution 1 to 1000 1000 s with 0 1 setting resolution 1 to 200 with 1 resolution Oto 100 with 0 01 setting resolution 10 temperature zones with P I D manual heater out heater range control channel ramp rate 0 1 K min to 100 K min Oto 100 with 1 resolution Continuous control or auto off User selected Temperature or sensor units Input source top of scale bottom of scale or manual Variable DC voltage source 10 s 10V 16 bit 0 3 mV 2 5 mV 0 3 mV RMS 1kQ short circuit protected Detachable terminal block 8 line by 40 character 240 x 64 pixel graphic LCD display module with LED backlight 1to8 K C V mV Q Temperature sensor units max and min 2 rdg s 0 0001 from 0 to 99 999995 0 001 from 100 to 999 9999 0 01 above 100
50. Output 1 2 Output 2 3 Output 3 4 Output 4 DISPLAY 4 0 1 term set display mode to Custom with 2 large display fields and set custom output display source to Output 1 The lt num fields gt and lt displayed output gt commands are ignored in all display modes except for Custom lt displayed output gt Display Setup Query DISPLAY term lt mode gt lt num fields gt lt output source gt term n n n refer to command for description Input Filter Parameter Command FILTER lt input gt lt off on gt lt points gt lt window gt term a n nn nn lt input gt Specifies input to configure A D D1 D5 for 3062 option lt off on gt Specifies whether the filter function is O Off or 1 On lt points gt Specifies how many data points the filtering function uses Valid range 2 to 64 lt window gt Specifies what percent of full scale reading limits the filtering function Reading changes greater than this percentage reset the filter Valid range 1to 10 FILTER B 1 10 2 term filter input B data through 10 readings with 2 of full scale window Input Filter Parameter Query FILTER input term a input Specifies input to query A D D1 D5 for 3062 option off on gt lt points gt lt window gt term n nn nn refer to command for description Heater Output Query HTR output term n output Heater output to query 1 Output 1 2 Output 2 heater value term nnn n lt
51. This section provides a listing of the interface commands A summary of all the com mands is provided in TABLE 6 6 All the commands are detailed in section 6 6 1 and are presented in alphabetical order Brief description of command Input Curve Number Command INCRV lt input gt lt curve number gt term a nn lt input gt Specify input A D lt curve number gt Specify input curve 0 none 1 20 std curves 21 59 user curves FIGURE 6 12 Sample command format Query name Form of the query input Syntax of user parameter input see key below Definition of returned parameter Syntax of returned parameter INCRV Input Format Format Brief description of query Input Curve Number Query INCRV input term a input Specify input A D Returned curve number gt term nn FIGURE 6 13 Sample query format Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 124 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation CLS Clear Interface Cmd INNAME Sensor Input Name Query XESE Event Status Enable Register Cmd 125 INTSEL Interface Select Cmd 134 KESE Event Status Enable Register Query 125 INTSEL Interface Select Query 134 XESR Standard Event Status Register Query 125 INTYPE Input Type Parameter Cmd 135 kIDN Identification Query 126 INT
52. amp V services are performed by Lake Shore maintenance repair or cali bration b fuses software power surges lightning and non rechargeable batteries c software interfacing parts or other sup plies not furnished by Lake Shore d unauthorized modification or misuse e operation outside of the published specifications f improper site preparation or site maintenance g natural disasters such as flood fire wind or earthquake or h damage during ship ment other than original shipment to you if shipped through a Lake Shore carrier 6 This limited warranty does not cover a regularly scheduled or ordi nary and expected recalibrations of the Product b accessories to the Product such as probe tips and cables holders wire grease varnish feed throughs etc c consumables used in conjunction with the Product such as probe tips and cables probe holders sample tails rods and holders ceramic putty for mounting samples Hall sample cards Hall sample enclosures etc or d non Lake Shore branded Products that are integrated with the Product 7 To the extent allowed by applicable law this limited warranty is the only warranty applicable to the Product and replaces all other war ranties or conditions express or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Specifically except as provided herein Model 336 Temperature C
53. built in SoftCal algorithm can be used to gener ate curves for silicon diodes and platinum RTDs that can be stored as user curves Temperature sensor calibration data can be easily uploaded and manipulated using the Lake Shore curve handler software Providing a total of 150 W of heater power the Model 336 is the most powerful tem perature controller available Delivering very clean heater power it precisely controls temperature throughout the full scale temperature range for excellent measurement reliability efficiency and throughput Two independent PID control outputs supply ing 100 W and 50 W of heater power can be associated with any of the four standard sensor inputs Precise control output is calculated based on your temperature set point and feedback from the control sensor Wide tuning parameters accommodate most cryogenic cooling systems and many high temperature ovens commonly used in laboratories PID values can be manually set for fine control or the improved 1 1 3 Interface amp akeShore Model 3060 Thermocouple Input Option Sensor input connectors Terminal block 1 1 3 Interface 3 autotuning feature can automate the tuning process Autotune collects PID parame ters and provides information to help build zone tables The setpoint ramp feature provides smooth continuous setpoint changes and predictable setpoint approaches without the worry of overshoot or excessive settling times When combined with the
54. configure A D D1 D5 for 3062 option lt curve number gt Specifies which curve the input uses If specified curve type does not match the configured input type the curve number defaults to O Valid entries O none 1 20 standard curves 21 59 user curves Specifies the curve an input uses for temperature conversion INCRV A 23 term Input A uses User Curve 23 for temperature conversion Input Curve Number Query INCRV input term a lt input gt Specifies which input to query A D D1 D5 for 3062 option lt curve number gt term nn refer to command for description Sensor Input Name Command INNAME lt input gt lt name gt term a s 15 lt input gt Specifies input to configure A D D1 D5 for 3062 option lt name gt Specifies the name to associate with the sensor input INNAME A Sample Space term the string Sample Space will appear on the front panel display when possible to identify the sensor information being displayed Be sure to use quotes when sending strings otherwise characters such as spaces and other non alpha numeric characters will be interpreted as a delimiter and the full string will not be accepted It is not recommended to use commas or semi colons in sensor input names as these characters are used as delimiters for query responses Sensor Input Name Query INNAME lt input gt term a lt input gt lt name gt term s 15 refer to command for description Sp
55. connection on the terminal block Twisting the thermocouple wires helps reject noise If shielding is necessary extend the shield from the oven or cryostat to cover the thermocouple wire but do not attach the shield to the instrument 3 8 Heater Output The following section covers the heater wiring from the vacuum shroud to the instru Setup ment for both heater outputs Specifications are detailed in section 1 3 For help on choosing and installing an appropriate resistive heater refer to section 2 5 3 8 1 Heater Output Both powered heater outputs Outputs 1 and 2 are traditional control outputs fora Description cryogenic temperature controller Both are variable DC current sources with software settable ranges and limits Both are configurable for optimization using eithera25 O ora 50 Q heater resistance At the 50 Q setting both outputs are limited to a maxi mum output current of 1A At the 25 O setting the maximum heater output current is 2 A for Output 1 and 1 41 A for Output 2 The compliance voltage of each output is 50 V minimum but can reach as high as 58 V if the heater resistance is higher than the nominal setting Heater power is applied in one of three ranges high med or low Each range is one decade lower in power Refer to TABLE 4 14 for maximum current and power ratings into different heater resistance Model 336 Temperature Controller 3 8 2 Heater Output Connectors 3 8 3 Heater Output Wiring 3 8 4 Heater Out
56. consist of a contiguous group of ones fol lowed by a contiguous group of zeros The ones represent which bits in the IP address refer to the subnet and the zeros represent which bits refer to the device address For example the default Static IP Address of the Model 336 is 192 168 0 12 and the default Static Subnet Mask is 255 255 255 0 Converting this subnet mask to binary shows that the first 24 bits are ones and the last 8 bits Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 110 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller are zeros Thismeans that the first 24 bits ofthe Static IP Address 192 168 0 represent the subnet and the last 8 bits 12 represent the device m Gateway Address a gateway is a network traffic routing device that is used to route communication between networks If a gateway is not used then devices ona network can only communicate with other devices on that same network A Gateway Address is the IP address of the gateway on a network Contact the net work administrator for the gateway address for your network 6 4 1 2 Network Addresss Configuration Methods The network address parameters of the Model 336 can be configured using one of three methods DHCP Auto IP or Static IP DHCP and Auto IP are automatic configu ration methods and Static IP requires manual configuration If supported by the server DHCP can also be used to automatically configure DNS server addresses as
57. defined as follows m Celsius abbreviation C A temperature scale that registers the freezing point of water as O C and the boiling point as 100 C under normal atmospheric pres sure Formerly known as Centigrade Originally devised by Anders Celsius 1701 1744 a Swedish astronomer m Fahrenheit abbreviation F A temperature scale that registers the freezing point of water as 32 F and the boiling point as 212 F under normal atmospheric pressure Originally devised by Gabriel Fahrenheit 1686 1736 a German phys icist residing in Holland developed use of mercury in thermometry m Kelvin abbreviation K An absolute scale of temperature the zero point of which is approximately 273 15 C Scale units are equal in magnitude to Celsius degrees Originally devised by Lord Kelvin William Thompson 1824 1907 a British physicist mathematician and inventor The 3 temperature scales are graphically compared in FIGURE A 1 Boiling point of water 373 15 K 100 C 212 F Freezing point of water 273 15 K 0 C 32 F Absolute zero OK 273 15 C 459 67 F kelvin Celsius Fahrenheit FIGURE A 1 Comparison of kelvin Celsius and Fahrenheit temperature scales To convert Fahrenheit to Celsius subtract 32 from F then divide by 1 8 or ec F 32 1 8 To convert Celsius to Fahrenheit multiply C by 1 8 then add 32 or F 1 8 x C 32 To convert Fahrenheit to kelvin first convert F to C then add
58. effect It is also recom mended to run heater leads in a separate cable from the measurement leads to fur ther reduce interaction There is a chassis ground point atthe rear panel ofthe instrument for shielding the heater cable if necessary The cable shield can be tied to this point using a 3 18 mm 4 spade terminal or ring connector The shield should not be connected at the opposite end ofthe cable and should never be tied to the heater output leads For best noise performance do not connect the resistive heater or its leads to ground Also avoid connecting heater leads to sensor leads or any other instrument inputs or outputs The heater output circuitry in the Model 336 is capable of sourcing 100 W of power This type of circuitry can generate some electrical noise The Model 336 was designed to generate as little noise as possible but even noise that is a small percentage of the output voltage or current can be too much when sensitive measurements are being made near by Outputs 3 and 4 cannot power heaters directly when used in warm up control mode These unpowered outputs must be used to program an external power supply which in turn powers the heater This section describes choosing and installing an external supply Section 5 5 describes operation of warm up control mode Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 40 CHAPTER 3 Installation Model 336 Temperature Controller 3 8 5 1 Choosing a Power Supply Voltage
59. expected check to be sure that the thermocouple is making good thermal contact If possi ble add a thermal massto the end ofthe thermocouple 6 PressInput Setup and selectthe corresponding sensor input Scroll down to the Room Calibration parameter and press Enter 7 Thecurrenttemperature reading is displayed in kelvin Press Enter to enter Num ber Entry mode Enterthe true temperature that the thermocouple should read If input is shorted then enter the actual room temperature measured by the thermometer Press Enter to save the value 8 Toverify calibration check that the temperature reading for the calibrated input matches the room temperature calibration setting value Any previous calibration can be cleared using the Clear Calibration submenu Menu Navigation Input Setup gt Room Calibration Clear Calibration Default Room calibration cleared When a Model 3061 capacitance option is installed in the Model 336 a setting of Capacitance becomes available under the Sensor Type parameter in the Input Setup menu The standard sensor inputs can still be used when the capacitance option is installed butthe capacitance and standard inputs cannot be used simultaneously Referto section 7 6 1 to install the Model 3061 Capacitive sensors in the Model 336 do not support temperature conversion there fore temperature response curves cannot be selected Any feature ofthe Model 336 that requires temperature to operate is not supported w
60. has not been changed In Microsoft Windows the com port number can be checked using Device Manager under Ports COM amp LPT Check that the USB driver is installed properly and that the device is functioning In Microsoft Windows the device status can be checked using Device Manager by right clicking Lake Shore Model 336 Temperature Controller under Ports COM amp LPT or Other Devices and then clicking Properties Check cable connections and length Increase the delay between all commands to 100 ms to make sure the instru ment is not being overloaded Ensure that the USB cable is not unplugged and that the Model 336 is not pow ered down while the com port is open The USB driver creates a com port when the USB connection is detected and removes the com port when the USB connec tion is no longer detected Removing the com port while in use by software can cause the software to lock up or crash Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 154 CHAPTER 8 Service 8 3 IEEE Interface Troubleshooting 8 3 1 New Installation 8 3 2 Existing Installation No Longer Working 8 3 3 Intermittent Lockups 8 4 Fuse Drawer 8 5 Line Voltage Selection INTI le Model 336 Temperature Controller This section provides IEEE interface troubleshooting for issues that arise with new installations old installations and intermittent lockups 1 Checkthe instrument address 2 Alwayssend a message terminator 3 Send the en
61. heater value gt Heater output in percent HTR is for the Heater Outputs 1 and 2 only Use AOUT for Outputs 3 and 4 HTRSET Input Format Example Remarks HTRSET Input Format Returned Format HTRST Input Format Returned Format Remarks IEEE Input Format Example IEEE Input Returned Format 6 6 1 InterfaceCommands 133 Heater Setup Command HTRSET lt output gt lt heater resistance gt lt max current gt lt max user current gt lt current power gt term n n n n nnn n lt output gt Specifies which heater output to configure 1 or 2 lt htr resistance gt Heater Resistance Setting 1 25 0 2 500 max current Specifies the maximum heater output current O User Specified 12 0 707 A 2 1 A 3 1 141 A 4 2 2A lt max user current gt Specifies the maximum heater output current if max current is set to User Specified lt current power gt Specifies whether the heater output displays in current or power Valid entries 1 current 2 power HTRSET 1 1 2 0 1 term Heater output 1 will use the 25 Q heater setting has a maximum current of 1 A the maximum user current is set to 0 A because it is not going to be used since a discrete value has been chosen and the heater output will be displayed in units of current Max current will be limited to 1 414 A on output 2 if the heater resistance is set to 25 Q and will be limited to 1 A on both outputs 1 and 2 if the heater resist
62. iia adage die 169 B 3 Handling Cryogenic Storage DEWAars i 169 B 4 Liquid Helium and Nitrogen Safety Precautions cee eee eeee eee eens 169 B 5 Recommended First Aid 170 Gl Generali iii a bae 171 1 1 Product Description 1 Chapter 1 Introduction o Cs 4 8 b C Ethernet ce ASS m cQ Remote LakeShore D CONS ME Relays D 2 336 Temperature Controller A E 2 3 4 A BERE Ck Co FIGURE 1 1 Model 336 front view 1 1 Product Features Description m Operates down to 300 mK with appropriate NTC RTD sensors Four sensor inputs and four independent control outputs Two PID control loops 100 W and 50 W into a 50 Q or 25 Q load Autotuning automatically collects PID parameters Automatically switch sensor inputs using zones to allow continuous measure ment and control from 300 mK to 1505 K Custom display setup allows you to label each sensor input Ethernet USB and IEEE 488 interfaces Supports diode RTD and thermocouple temperature sensors Sensor excitation current reversal eliminates thermal EMF errors for resistance sensors m 10V analog voltage outputs alarms and relays The first of a new generation of innovative temperature measurement and control solutions by Lake Shore the Model 336 temperature controller comes standard equipped with many advanced features promised to deliver the functionality and reliable service you ve come to expe
63. italic type indicates that Itali e i cop there is a setting that needs to be selected D Parentheses The items that follow the italicized word and which are in parentheses are the avail able selections to which you can set the desired feature E Enter Press Enter on the keypad TABLE 4 1 Menu navigation key Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 44 CHAPTER 4 Operation 4 2 Front Panel Description 4 2 1 Keypad Definitions Key A B C andD Press these keys for quick access to the display screens forthe associated sensor input or Input Display mode Press once for a temporary display that will time out in 10 s at which point the dis play returns to the assigned Display Mode setting Press the same key again or press Escapebe fore the timeout period to return the display to the previous Display Mode setting Pressing and holding one of these keys for 3 s causes the associated Input Display to become the new perma nent Display Mode setting indicated by an audible beep When the Model 3062 4 channel scanner option is installed pressing the D button cycles the dis play through the display screens foreach ofthe 5 input D channels This section provides a description of the front panel controls and indicators forthe Model 336 The keypad is dividedinto two sections The Direct Operation section includes all keys to the left ofthe number pad and the Menu Number Pad section includes the standard 12 n
64. method for installing the driver as it will ensure that you always have the latest version of the driver installed If you are unable to install the driver from Windows Update refer to section 6 3 3 3 to install the driver from the web or from the disc provided with the Model 336 These procedures assume that you are logged into a user account that has adminis trator privileges 6 3 3 1 Installing the Driver From Windows Update in Windows 7 and Vista 1 Connect the USB cable from the Model 336 to the computer 2 Turnonthe Model 336 3 When the Found New Hardware wizard appears select Locate and install driver software recommended 4 IfUserAccount Control UAC is enabled a UAC dialog box may appear asking if you want to continue Click Continue 5 The Found New Hardware wizard should automatically connect to Windows Update and install the drivers 6 3 3 Installingthe USB Driver 105 If the Found New Hardware wizard is unable to connect to Windows Update or find the drivers a message to Insert the disc that came with your Lake Shore Model 336 will be displayed Click Cancel and refer to section 6 3 3 3 to install the driver from the web 6 When the Found New Hardware wizard finishes installing the driver a confirma tion message stating the software for this device has been successfully installed will appear Click Close to complete the installation 6 3 3 2 Installing the Driver From Windows Update i
65. of non infringement with respect to the Product and Lake Shore shall have no duty to defend indemnify or hold harmless you from and against any or all damages or costs incurred by you arising from the infringement of patents or trademarks or violation or copyrights by the Product 10 THIS WARRANTY IS NOT TRANSFERRABLE This warranty is not transferrable 11 Except to the extent prohibited by applicable law neither Lake Shore nor any of its subsidiaries affiliates or suppliers will be held lia ble for direct special incidental consequential or other damages including lost profit lost data or downtime costs arising out of the use inability to use or result of use of the product whether based in warranty contract tort or other legal theory regardless whether or not Lake Shore has been advised of the possibility of such damages Purchaser s use of the Product is entirely at Purchaser s risk Some countries states and provinces do not allow the exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation may not apply to you 12This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary within or between jurisdictions where the product is purchased and or used Some jurisdictions do not allow limitation in certain warranties and so the above limitations or exclu sions of some warranties stated above may not apply to you 13 Except to the extent allowed by applica
66. of a control loop then the control Setpoint and Heater Output parameters are displayed under the sensor reading If the output is in Open Loop mode then the Setpoint parameter is not shown Menu Navigation Display Setup Display Mode gt Four Loop Mode Interface Command DISPLAY Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 48 CHAPTER 4 Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller 4 3 1 2 All Inputs Mode All Inputs mode provides a limited amount of information about each of the sensor inputs Similar to the Four Loop mode each quadrant of the display is dedicated to one sensor input with the input letter being displayed followed by the user assign able input name The sensor reading is displayed in large character format using the units assigned to the respective input s Input Units parameter When a Model 3062 option is installed all eight sensor inputs and channels are displayed and the display mode can be configured as large or small When it is configured as large the input name is not shown and the sensor reading is displayed in large character format When it is configured as small the input name is shown and the sensor reading is dis played in the normal smaller character format Menu Navigation Display Setup Display Mode All Inputs Mode Interface Command DISPLAY 4 3 1 3 Input Display Modes An Input Display mode exists for each of the four sensor inputs on the Model 336 These modes are referenced as Input
67. refers to operating the Model 336 from the front panel Remote refers to oper ating the controller via the IEEE 488 Interface The keypad is disabled during remote operation except for the Remote Local key and the All Off key When in remote mode the Remote front panel LED will be illuminated When in local mode the Remote LED will not be illuminated Menu Navigation Remote Local LED On Remote mode LED Off Local mode The keypad lock feature prevents accidental changes to parameter values When the keypad is locked some parameter values may be viewed but most cannot be changed from the front panel All Off is the only keypad function that remains active when the keypad is locked Athree digit keypad lock code locks and unlocks the keypad The factory default code is 123 The code can be changed only through the computer interface If instrument parameters are reset to default values the lock code resets also The instrument can not reset from the front panel with the keypad locked To lock the keypad press and hold Enter for 5 s Use the numeric keypad to enter the three digit lock code If the lock code is accepted Keypad Locked will be dis played for 3 s and the display will return to normal Changes attempted to any parameters result in a brief display of the Keypad Locked message To unlock the keypad press and hold Enter for 5 s Use the numeric keypad to enter the three digit lock code If the lock code
68. scale current and power are determined by the heater resistance Max Cur rent setting and Heater Range Specifications of the heater outputs are provided in section 1 3 Heater theory of operation is provided in section 2 5 Various heater installation considerations are provided in section 3 8 To set Heater Range first configure the front panel display to show the desired control loop information then use the Heater Range key on the front panel A quick way to access the setting if the control loop information is not already being displayed is to press A B C or D on the front panel to temporarily display the control loop informa tion while the new setting is entered Refer to section 4 2 for details on configuring the front panel display Menu Navigation Heater Range Off On Low Med High Default Off Interface Command RANGE Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 70 CHAPTER 4 Operation 4 5 2 Unpowered Analog Outputs 4 6 Interface 4 6 1 USB Model 336 Temperature Controller 4 5 1 5 9 ALL OFF The ALL OFF key is provided as a means of shutting down all control outputs with one key It is equivalent to setting the Heater Range parameter of all outputs to Off This function is always active even if the keypad is locked or when it is in remote mode The unpowered analog outputs 3 and 4 are variable DC voltage sources that can have a range from 10 V to 10 V The voltage is generated by a 16 bit
69. scope of this manual This chapter provides information on how to get the best temperature measurement and control from cooling sources with proper setup including sensor and heater installation This section attempts to answer some of the basic questions concerning temperature sensor selection Additional useful information on temperature sensor selection is available in the Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog The cat alog has a large reference section that includes sensor characteristics and sensor selection criteria You must consider several important sensor parameters when choosing a sensor The first is experimental temperature range Some sensors can be damaged by tempera tures that are either too high or too low Manufacturer recommendations should always be followed Sensor sensitivity changes with temperature and can limit the useful range of a sen sor It is important not to specify a range larger than necessary If you perform an experiment at liquid helium temperature a very high sensitivity is needed for good measurement resolution at that temperature That same resolution may not be required to monitor warm up to room temperature Two different sensors may be required to tightly cover the range from base temperature to room temperature but lowering the resolution requirement on warm up may allow a less expensive 1 sensor solution Another thing to consider when choosing a temperature sensor is that instrum
70. separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 AB Unlike IP addresses MAC addresses are tied to the device hard ware and cannot be changed Menu Navigation Read Only Interface gt View IP Config gt MAC Address 6 4 2 3 Viewing Network Configuration Parameters and DNS Parameters The currently configured network parameters are displayed individually in the View IP Config submenu These parameters could have been configured using either DHCP Auto IP or Static IP The LAN Status parameter shows which method was used for the current configuration When in an error state or in the intermediate Acquiring Address state the network configuration parameters will all be displayed as 0 0 0 0 Refer to section 6 4 1 1 through section 6 4 1 3 for details on network configuration parameters and DNS parameters Menu Navigation Read Only Interface View IP Config P Interface View IP Config Subnet Mask Interface gt View IP Config gt Gateway IP Interface gt View IP Config gt Primary DNS IP Interface View IP Config Secondary DNS IP Interface gt View IP Config gt Actual Hostname Interface View IP Config gt TCP Socket Port A TCP socket connection interface is provided as the communication medium for the Ethernet interface of the Model 336 A TCP socket connection or simply socket con nection is a common connection protocol used by Ethernet devices The Transmis sion Control Protocol TCP is commonly used for creating a comm
71. shorted 3 7 2 Thermocouple Thermocouples are commonly used in high temperature applications Cryogenic use Installation of thermocouples offers some unique challenges A general installation guideline is provided in section 2 4 Considerthe following when using thermocouples at low temperatures W Thermocouple wire is generally more thermally conductive than other sensor lead wire Smaller gauge wire and more thermal anchoring may be needed to prevent leads from heating the sample NW Attaching lead wires and passing them through vacuum tight connectors is often necessary in cryogenic systems Remember the thermocouple wire is the sensor anytime it joins or contacts other metal there is potential for error M Temperature verification and calibration of room temperature compensation is difficult after the sensor is installed When possible keep a piece of scrap wire from each installation for future use B Thermocouples can be spot welded to the cryostat for good thermal anchoring as long as the cryostat has a potential close to earth ground 3 7 3 Grounding and Care must be taken to minimize the amount of noise contributed by ground loops Shielding when grounding thermocouple inputs For lowest measurement noise do not ground thermocouple sensors The instrument operates with slightly more noise if one of the thermocouples is grounded Be sure to minimize loop area when grounding both thermocouples The instrument does not offer a shield
72. status of Ethernet connection 0 Connected Using Static IP 1 Connected Using DHCP 2 Connected Using Auto IP 3 Address Not Acquired Error 4 Duplicate Initial IP Address Error 5 Duplicate Ongoing IP Address Error 6 Cable Unplugged 7 Module Error 8 Acquiring Address 9 Ethernet Disabled Refer to section 6 4 2 1 for details on lan status lt IP gt Configured IP address lt sub mask gt Configured subnet mask lt gateway gt Configured gateway address lt pri DNS gt Configured primary DNS address lt sec DNS gt Configured secondary DNS address lt actual hostname gt Assigned hostname lt actual domain gt Assigned domain lt mac addr gt Module MAC address This query returns the configured Ethernet parameters If the Ethernet interface is not configured then IP subnet mask gateway primary DNS and secondary DNS parameters will be 0 0 0 0 Operational Status Query OPST term lt bit weighting gt term nnn The integer returned represents the sum of the bit weighting of the operational sta tus bits Refer to section 6 2 5 2 fora list of operational status bits Operational Status Enable Command OPSTE lt bit weighting gt term nnn Each bit has a bit weighting and represents the enable disable mask of the corre sponding operational status bit in the Operational Status Register This determines which status bits can set the corresponding summary bit in the Status Byte Register To enable a st
73. stored on the card so you can install it in the field and use it with multiple Model 336 temperature controllers without recalibration Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 150 CHAPTER 7 Options and Accessories 7 6 1 Input Option Card Installation NINA C CAUTION Model 336 Temperature Controller The Model 336 input option cards are field installable You will need a small Phillips head screwdriver and the 5 64 in hex driver Follow this procedure to install an input option card To avoid potentially lethal shocks turn off controller and disconnect it from AC power before performing these procedures The components on this board are electrostatic discharge sensitive ESDS devices Follow ESD procedures in section 8 11 to avoid inducing an electrostatic discharge ESD into the device If you are installing the Model 3061 use the instructions for the full rack only The Model 3060 can be installed in either a full or half rack 1 Turn the Model 336 power switch Off Unplug the power cord from the wall out let then from the instrument 2 Halfrack only Remove the two screws used to attach the ceramic block to the full rack adapter plate set aside the screws and discard the full rack adapter plate 3 Standtheuniton its face Use the hex driverto remove the 4 screws on both sides ofthe top cover Loosen the 2 rear bottom screws FIGURE 7 3 Remove Remove rear rear plastic bottom bezel cover sc
74. temperature control systems in a fully integrated package The power ranges for each output provide decade steps in power 4 5 1 1 Max Current and Heater Resistance The Model 335 heater outputs are designed to work optimally into a 25 Oor500 heater The Heater Resistance and Max Current parameters worktogetherto limitthe maximum available power into the heater This is useful for preventing heater dam age or limiting the maximum heater power into the system When using a 25 O or 50 O heater set the Heater Resistance parameter accordingly The Max Current set ting will then provide multiple discrete current limit values that correspond to com mon heater power ratings The available current limits keep the output operating within the voltage compliance limit to ensure the best possible resolution These parameters work with the Heater Range parameter section 4 5 1 5 8 to provide safety and flexibility If you are not using a standard heater resistance set the Heater Resistance setting to 25 Oforanyresistance less than 50 O orto 50 O for any higher heater resistance The user max current setting is useful when using a non standard heater resistance value Refer to section 4 5 1 1 1 for more information on User Max Current TABLE 4 14 pro vides examples of different heater resistances and max current settings and the resulting maximum heater power The maximum heater powers in bold representthe discrete current limits available under the Max Cu
75. that uses the same Status Byte summary bit will not cause another SRQ unlessthe event register that caused the first SRQ has been cleared typically by a query ofthe event register The serial poll does not clear MSS The MSS bit stays set until all enabled Status Byte summary bits are cleared typically by a query ofthe associated event register section 6 2 6 4 The programming example in TABLE 6 4 initiates an SRQ when a command error is detected by the instrument 6 2 6 Status System Detail Status Byte Register and Service Request 103 Command or Operation Description ESR Read and clear the Standard Event Status Register ESE 32 Enable the Command Error CME bit in the Standard Event Status Register SRE 32 Enable the Event Summary Bit ESB to set the RQS ABC Send improper command to instrument to generate a command error Monitor bus Monitor the bus until the Service Request interrupt SRQ is sent Initiate serial poll Serial pollthe bus to determine which instrument sent the interrupt and clear the RQS bit in the Status Byte ESR Read and clear the Standard Event Status Register allowing an SRQ to be generated on another command error TABLE 6 4 Programming example to generate an SRQ 6 2 6 4 Using Status Byte Query STB The Status Byte Query STB command is similar to a serial poll except it is pro cessed like any other instrument command The STB command returns the same result as a ser
76. the OPC bitto generate an SRQ and include the OPC command when programming the instrument The bus controller could then be instructed to look for an SRQ allowing additional communication with the instru ment while the initial process executes The OPC query has no interaction with bit O OPC ofthe Standard Event Status Reg ister If the OPC query is sent at the end of a command sequence the bus will be held until the instrument completes the operation that was initiated by the com mand sequence Additional commands except RST should not be sent until the operation is complete as erratic operation will occur Once the sequence is complete a1will be placed in the output buffer This function is typically used to signal a com pleted operation without monitoring the SRQ It is also used when itis important to prevent any additional communication on the bus during a pending operation Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 104 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation 6 3 USB Interface 6 3 1 Physical Connection 6 3 2 Hardware Support 6 3 3 Installing the USB Driver Model 336 Temperature Controller The Model 336 USB interface provides a convenient way to connect to most modern computers as a USB interface is provided on nearly all new PCs as of the writing of this manual The USB interface is implemented as a virtual serial com port connec tion This implementation provides a simple migration path for modifying ex
77. the application window The instrument configuration backup utility provides the means to export the current configuration of the Model 336 to a file or to import a saved configuration from a file to the Model 336 The utility is useful in situations where the instrument is shared with users who require different configurations or when the instrument is often moved between systems requiring different configurations All instrument configura tion settings are exported or imported by the utility except for the setpoint and heater range network settings and web login settings These settings are ignored to prevent the outputs from unintentionally turning on and to prevent interrupting communication with the instrument To export the current configuration of the Model 336 to a file 1 Onthe Utilities page in the Model 336 embedded website click Export config FIGURE 6 8 2 Inthe Save File dialog box select the location and file name to which you want to export the current instrument configuration Click Save The utility will export the current configuration from the Model 336 and save it to the specified file To import a saved configuration from a file to the Model 336 1 Onthe Utilities page in the Model 336 embedded website click Import config FIGURE 6 8 2 Inthe Save File dialog box select the file name from which you want to import the saved instrument configuration settings Click Open 3 Click Yes import settings in
78. the confirmation box that appears The utility will read the configuration from the specified file and import it to the Model 336 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 120 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation 6 5 4 Embedded Chart The embedded chart recorder utility is provided to allow users to easily acquire and Recorder chart data from the Model 336 The chart recorder utility can simultaneously chart and log any combination of sensor readings control setpoints and heater output data from the Model 336 A basic user interface is also provided for changing control parameters on the fly while acquiring data allowing many basic experiments to be performed without ever having to write any custom software Log files are stored in the Microsoft Excel xls format for easy data manipulation Free utilities are avail able online for converting xls files to comma separated plain text files csv if Micro soft Excel is not available 4 Datapoint 731 of 65000 Log File C Users SoftwareQaAdmin log xis Y Model 336 Temperature Controller SN 336A06Z NESARA 14 270 0 Number of Data Points to Log 55000 62 5 SES Chart 265 0 55 0 SE np Celsus 2625 50 0 input Senso D 475 InutC Cels 260 0 450 InputD Celsi z os TENE etpont 1 2575 Se 4 E 400 UE e o 37 5 E 255 0 35 0 32 5 252 5 4 30 0 275 250 0 25 0 22 5 247 5 4 20 0 i SO ee 175 15
79. the curve effectively The parameters must be set correctly before a curve can be used for temperature conversion or temperature control m Curve Number 1 to 59 m Name defaults to the name User Curve for front panel entry A curve name of up to fifteen characters can be entered from either the front panel or from the com puter interface Refer to section 4 2 3 for Alpha Numeric entry m Serial Number a sensor serial number of up to ten characters letters or numbers can be entered from either the front panel or from the computer interface Refer to section 4 2 3 for Alpha Numeric entry The default is blank m Format the format parameter tells the instrument what breakpoint data format to expect Different sensor types require different formats Formats for Lake Shore sensors are described in TABLE 5 3 Descriptlon Sensor Units Sensor Units P Full Scale Range Maximum Resolution VIK Volts vs kelvin 10V 0 00001 V alk Resistance vs kelvin for 10KO 0 0010 platinum RTD sensors Log resistance vs kelvin for Log Of NTC resistive sensors 4 log Q 0 00001 log Q mV K Millivolts vs kelvin for 100 mV 0 0001 mV thermocouple sensors TABLE 5 3 Curve header parameter m Setpoint Limit limits the control setpoint to values less than or equal to this set ting Asetpoint limit can be included with every curve Default is 375 K Entera setting of 9999 K if no limit is needed m Temperature Coefficient the temperatu
80. the heater wire should be in good thermal contact with the load to allow for thermal transfer Ther mal anchoring also protects the wire from over heating and burning out Resistive heater wire is also wound into cartridge heaters Cartridge heaters are more convenient but are bulky and more difficult to place on small loads A typical car tridge is 6 35 mm 0 25 in in diameter and 25 4 mm 1 in long The cartridge should be snugly held ina hole in the load or clamped to a flat surface Thermal anchoring for good thermal contact is again important Foil heaters are thin layers of resistive material adhered to or screened onto electri cally insulating sheets There are a variety of shapes and sizes The proper size heater can evenly heat a flat surface or around a round load The entire active area should be in good thermal contact with the load not only for maximum heating effect but to keep spots in the heater from over heating and burning out When wiring inside a vacuum shroud we recommend using 30 AWG copper wire for heater leads Too much heat can transfer in when larger wire is used Thermal anchor ing similar to that used for the sensor leads should be included so that any heat transfer does not warm the load when the heater is not running The lead wires should be twisted to minimize noise coupling between the heater and other leads in the system When wiring outside the vacuum shroud you can use larger gage copper and twistin
81. the instrument chassis In these cases the operators safety should remain the highest priority and low imped ance from the instrument chassis to safety ground should always be maintained The power switch is partofthe line input assembly on the rear panel ofthe Model 336 and turns line powerto the instrument on and off When the circle is depressed power is off When the line is depressed power is on This section details how to connect diode and resistor sensors to the Model 336 stan dard inputs and the Model 3062 4 channel scanner option card input channels Refer to section 4 4 to configure the inputs Referto section 3 6 for a description ofthe optional capacitance input and section 3 7 for a description of the thermocouple input The input connectors are 6 pin DIN 45322 sockets The sensor connector pins are defined in FIGURE 3 3 and TABLE 3 2 Four mating connectors 6 pin DIN plugs are included in the connector kit shipped with the instrument These are common con nectors so additional mating connectors can be purchased from local electronics suppliers They can also be ordered from Lake Shore as G 106 233 FIGURE 3 3 Sensor input connector 1 I Current 2 vV Voltage 3 None Shield 4 V Voltage 5 I Current 6 None Shield TABLE 3 2 Diode resistor input connector details Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 34 CHAPTER 3 Installation 3 5 2 Sensor Lead Cable 3 5 3
82. the load becomes unstable reduce the setting by half If the load is stable make a series of small two to five degree changes in the setpoint and watch the load react Continue to increase the integral setting until the desired response is achieved 2 8 4 Tuning Derivative 2 9 Autotuning 2 8 4 TuningDerivative 29 Ifan experiment requires frequent changes in setpoint derivative should be consid ered See FIGURE 2 2 e A derivative setting of O off is recommended when the con trol system is seldom changed and data is taken when the load is at steady state The derivative setting is entered into the Model 336 as a percentage of the integral time constant The setting range is 0 200 where 100 14 seconds Start with a setting of 50 to 100 Again do not be afraid to make some small setpoint changes halving or doubling this setting to watch the affect Expect positive setpoint changes to react differently from negative setpoint changes Choosing appropriate PID control settings can be tedious Systems can take several minutes to complete a setpoint change making it difficult to watch the display for oscillation periods and signs of instability With the Autotune feature the Model 336 automates the tuning process by measuring system characteristics and along with some assumptions about typical cryogenic systems computes setting values for P and D Autotune works only with one control loop at a time and does not set the ma
83. use of additional sensors for supplemental monitoring Silicon diodes are the best choice for general cryogenic use from 1 4 K to above room temperature Diodes are economical to use because they follow a standard curve and are interchangeable in many applications They are not suitable for use in ionizing radiation or magnetic fields Cernox thin film RTDs offer high sensitivity and low magnetic field induced errors over the 0 3 K to 420 K temperature range Cernox sensors require calibration Platinum RTDs offer high uniform sensitivity from 30 K to over 800 K With excellent reproducibility they are useful as thermometry standards They follow a standard curveabove 70 K and are interchangeable in many applications 1 2 SensorSelection Model Useful Range Magnetic Field Use Diodes Silicon Diode DT 670 SD 1 4 K to 500 K T260K amp BS3T 3062 Silicon Diode DT 670E BR 30K to 500K T260K amp BS3T Silicon Diode DT 414 1 4K to 375K T260K amp BS3T Silicon Diode DT 421 1 4K to 325K T260K amp BS3T Silicon Diode DT 470 SD 1 4K to 500 K T260K amp BS3T Silicon Diode DT 471 SD 10 K to 500 K T260K amp BS3T GaAlAs Diode TG 120 P 1 4K to 325K To4 2K amp BS5T GaAlAs Diode TG 120 PL 1 4K to 325K To4 2K amp BS5T GaAlAs Diode TG 120 SD 1 4 K to 500 K To4 2K amp BS5T 100 O Platinum PT 102 3 14 K to 873 K T gt 40K8B lt 2 5T Positive Temperature 1000 Platinum PT 111 14 K
84. 0 Sensor dependent to 6 digits Input name setpoint heater range heater output and PID Same as display resolution actual resolution is sensor dependent Numeric display in percent of full scale for power or current 0 0126 Control input alarm tuning Remote Ethernet status alarm control outputs 27 key silicone elastomer keypad Front panel curve entry display contrast control and keypad lock out 1 3 6 Interface 1 3 7 General IEEE 488 2 Capabilities Reading rate Software support USB Function Baud Rate Connector Reading rate Software support Ethernet Function Connector Reading rate Software support Alarms Number Data source Settings Actuators Relays Number Contacts Contact rating Operation Connector Ambient temperature Power requirement Size Weight Approval 1 3 6 Interface 11 SH1 AH1 T5 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DTO CO El To 10 rdg s on each input LabVIEW driver contact Lake Shore for availability Emulates a standard RS 232 serial port 57 600 B type USB connector To 10 rdg s on each input LabVIEW driver contact Lake Shore for availability TCP IP web interface curve handler configuration backup chart recorder RJ 45 To 10 rdg s on each input LabVIEW driver contact Lake Shore for availability 4 high and low for each input Temperature or sensor units Source high setpoint low setpoint deadband latching or non latching audible on off
85. 0 10 39 30 10 40 00 10 40 30 10 41 00 10 41 30 10 42 00 10 42 30 10 43 00 10 43 30 10 44 00 10 44 30 10 45 00 Time 8 7 9 C Autoscale 10 20 30 40 50 60 Reset Zoom Pan y 9 Command Line Notes Control Loopi P 20 0 Manual Output 0 0 Send loop 30 setront 265 0 c RESO 11 boop 3p 0 0 Range High w Loop 4 FIGURE 6 11 Embedded chart recorder interface 6 5 4 1 Configuration Panel The configuration panel is located to the right of the chart and consists of items 12 through 17 in the screenshot above It is used to configure the charting and logging functionality for the next data acquisition task When Start is pressed the parame ters in the configuration panel are used to determine m Sample period 13 the rate at which to acquire readings from the instrument in milli seconds Number of data points to log 14 the number of data points to log if logging to a file Log file 15 the path of the file to use for logging data if logging to a file Chart only 16 if selected acquired data is only charted and is not logged to a file Readings 17 the readings and units where applicable to take during data acquisition The configuration panel can be collapsed to increase the size of the chart To collapse the configuration panel simply click on Collapse configuration panel 12 When col lapsed the same button becomes an Expand Configuration Panel button that can be used to restore the configuration pane
86. 0 77 4 093440 146 50 132 6 099160 411 00 23 6 191780 21 30 78 4 004430 150 00 133 6 421500 417 50 24 6 184530 22 50 79 3 913940 153 50 134 6 746540 424 00 25 6 176930 23 70 80 3 821970 157 00 135 7 099510 431 00 26 6 168310 25 00 81 3 728520 160 50 136 7 455590 438 00 27 6 159280 26 30 82 3 633620 164 00 137 7 814630 445 00 28 6 149830 27 60 83 3 537260 167 50 138 8 176630 452 00 29 6 139220 29 00 84 3 439460 171 00 139 8 541540 459 00 30 6 128130 30 40 85 3 340240 174 50 140 8 909320 466 00 31 6 116580 31 80 86 3 239610 178 00 141 9 306450 473 50 32 6 103700 33 30 87 3 122930 182 00 142 9 706830 481 00 33 6 090300 34 80 88 3 004370 186 00 143 10 1103 488 50 34 6 075460 36 40 89 2 884040 190 00 144 10 5169 496 00 35 6 060040 38 00 90 2 761910 194 00 145 10 9264 503 50 36 6 044070 39 60 91 2 638010 198 00 146 11 3664 511 50 37 6 025470 41 40 92 2 512340 202 00 147 11 8098 519 50 38 6 006200 43 20 93 2 384920 206 00 148 12 2564 527 50 39 5 986280 45 00 94 2 255770 210 00 149 12 7342 536 00 40 5 965730 46 80 95 2 124900 214 00 150 13 2155 544 50 41 5 942210 48 80 96 1 992320 218 00 151 13 7 553 00 42 5 917930 50 80 97 1 858060 222 00 152 14 1879 561 50 43 5 892970 52 80 98 1 705090 226 50 153 14 7079 570 50 44 5 864730 55 00 99 1 549970 231 00 154 15 2314 579 50 45 5 835680 57 20 100 1 392820 235 50 155 15 7583 588 50 46 5 805860 59 40 101 1 233640 240 00 156 16 2887 597 50 47 5 776670 61 50 102 1 072450
87. 0 W for output 2 but doing so can cause the Model 336 to work improp erly In this situation the max user current setting should be used to limit the power Refer to section 4 5 1 1 1 for details on using the max user current setting The resistor chosen as a heater must be able to withstand the power being dissipated in it Pre packaged resistors have a power specification that is usually given forthe resistor in free air This power may need to be derated if used in a vacuum where con vection cooling cannot take place and it is not adequately anchored to a cooled sur face The Model 336 has a current limit feature which allows you to specify the maximum output current for each heater output section 4 5 1 1 which when set appropriately will help protect the heater from being over heated For best temperature measurement accuracy position the heater so that tempera ture gradients across the sample is minimized For best control the heater should be in close thermal contact with the cooling power Geometry of the load can make one or both of these difficult to achieve That is why there are several heater shapes and sizes Resistive wire like nichrome is the most flexible type of heater available The wire can be purchased with electrical insulation and has a predictable resistance per given length This type of heater wire can be wrapped around a load to give balanced even heating of the area Similar to sensor lead wire the entire length of
88. 0 ms rdg 2 5 rdg s 200 ms rdg 3 33 rdg s 300 ms rdg 4 2 1 2 rdg s 400 ms rdg 5 2 rdg s 500 ms rdg TABLE 4 10 Model 3062 4 channel scanner option reading update rate System control performance may be affected by a decreased update rate Filtering is affected by a decreased update rate Refer to section 4 4 10 for more information The Model 336 supports a variety of temperature sensors manufactured by Lake Shore and other manufacturers After the appropriate sensor type is selected section 2 2 an appropriate curve may be selected The Model 336 can use curves from several sources Standard curves are preloaded with every instrument and num bered 1 to 20 User curves numbered 21 to 59 can be used when a Sensor does not match a standard curve SoftCal calibrations are stored as user curves or you can enter your own curves from the front panel section 5 8 or computer interface sec tion 6 4 The complete list of sensor curves preloaded in the Model 336 is provided in TABLE 4 11 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 58 CHAPTER 4 Operation During normal operation only the curves that share the input type you have selected are displayed If the curve you wish to select does not appear in the selection sequence make sure the curve format matches the recommended format for the input type selected Refer to TABLE 4 7 The sensor reading of the instrument can always be displayed in
89. 05618 12 30 74 3 20027 2 53 5 3 02294 35 5 40 3 05780 11 90 75 3 20875 2 39 6 3 02353 34 4 41 3 05952 11 50 76 3 21736 2 26 7 3 02411 33 4 42 3 06135 11 10 77 3 22675 2 13 8 3 02472 32 4 43 3 06330 10 70 78 3 23707 2 00 9 3 02537 31 4 44 3 06537 10 30 79 3 24842 1 87 10 3 02605 30 4 45 3 06760 9 90 80 3 26000 1 75 11 3 02679 29 4 46 3 06968 9 55 81 3 27169 1 64 12 3 02749 28 5 47 3 07190 9 20 82 3 28462 1 53 13 3 02823 27 6 48 3 07428 8 85 83 3 29779 1 43 14 3 02903 26 7 49 3 07685 8 50 84 3 31256 1 33 15 3 02988 25 8 50 3 07922 8 20 85 3 32938 1 23 16 3 03078 24 9 51 3 08175 7 90 86 3 34846 1 130 17 3 03176 24 0 52 3 08447 7 60 87 3 37196 1 020 18 3 03280 23 1 53 3 08786 7 25 88 3 39220 0 935 19 3 03393 22 2 54 3 09150 6 90 89 3 41621 0 850 20 3 03500 21 4 55 3 09485 6 60 90 3 44351 0 765 21 3 03615 20 6 56 3 09791 6 35 91 3 47148 0 690 22 3 03716 19 95 57 3 10191 6 05 92 3 50420 0 615 23 3 03797 19 45 58 3 10638 5 74 OS 3 54057 0 545 24 3 03882 18 95 59 3 11078 5 46 94 3 58493 0 474 25 3 03971 18 45 60 3 11558 5 18 95 3 63222 0 412 26 3 04065 17 95 61 3 12085 4 90 96 3 68615 0 354 27 3 04164 17 45 62 3 12622 4 64 97 3 75456 0 295 28 3 04258 17 00 63 3 13211 4 38 98 3 82865 0 245 29 3 04357 16 55 64 3 13861 4 12 99 3 91348 0 201 30 3 04460 16 10 65 3 14411 3 92 100 4 01514 0 162 31 3 04569 15 65 66 3 14913 3 75 101 4 14432 0 127 32 3 04685 15 20 67 3 15454 3 58 102 4 34126 0 091 33 3 04807 14 75 68 3 16002 3 42 103 4 54568 0 066 34 3 04936 14 30
90. 118 0 47 1 13494 23 3 72 1 63516 1 98 23 0 970134 109 0 48 1 14495 22 8 73 1 63943 1 74 24 0 986073 100 5 49 1 16297 22 0 74 1 64261 1 53 25 0 998925 93 5 50 1 17651 21 3 75 1 64430 1 40 TABLE C 3 Standard DT 670 diode curve DT 500 D Curve 1 365 0 0 19083 330 0 0 28930 2 345 0 0 24739 305 0 0 36220 3 305 0 0 36397 285 0 0 41860 4 285 0 0 42019 265 0 0 47220 5 265 0 0 47403 240 0 0 53770 6 240 0 0 53960 220 0 0 59260 7 220 0 0 59455 170 0 0 73440 8 170 0 0 73582 130 0 0 84490 9 130 0 0 84606 100 0 0 92570 10 090 0 0 95327 075 0 0 99110 11 070 0 1 00460 060 0 1 02840 12 055 0 1 04070 040 0 1 07460 13 040 0 1 07460 036 0 1 08480 14 034 0 1 09020 034 0 1 09090 15 032 0 1 09700 032 0 1 09810 16 030 0 1 10580 030 0 1 10800 17 029 0 1 11160 029 0 1 11500 18 028 0 1 11900 028 0 1 12390 19 027 0 1 13080 027 0 1 13650 20 026 0 1 14860 026 0 1 15590 21 025 0 1 17200 025 0 1 18770 22 023 0 1 25070 024 0 1 23570 TABLE C 4 Lake Shore DT 500 series silicon diode curves no longer in production Model 336 Temperature Controller 173 DT 500 D Curve DT 500 E1 Curve Breakpoint mp K Volts Temp K Volts 23 021 0 1 35050 022 0 1 32570 24 017 0 1 63590 013 0 1 65270 25 015 0 1 76100 013 0 1 96320 26 013 0 1 90660 009 0 2 17840 27 009 0 2 11720 004 0 2 53640 28 003 0 2 53660 003 0 2 59940 29 001 4 2 59840 001 4 2 65910
91. 12090 167 00 138 15 3507 499 00 31 9 621500 31 80 85 5 334130 171 00 139 16 1432 509 50 32 9 602020 33 30 86 5 153520 175 00 140 16 9403 520 00 33 9 581740 34 80 87 4 970330 179 00 141 17 7798 531 00 34 9 560710 36 30 88 4 784590 183 00 142 18 6624 542 50 35 9 537440 37 90 89 4 596330 187 00 143 19 5881 554 50 36 9 513290 39 50 90 4 405600 191 00 144 20 5573 567 00 37 9 486720 41 20 91 4 212440 195 00 145 21 5702 580 00 38 9 457560 43 00 92 3 992330 199 50 146 22 627 593 50 39 9 427340 44 80 93 3 769140 204 00 147 23 7279 607 50 40 9 396080 46 60 94 3 543070 208 50 148 24 873 622 00 41 9 363810 48 40 95 3 314120 213 00 149 26 0623 637 00 42 9 330540 50 20 96 3 082340 217 50 150 27 3356 653 00 43 9 296270 52 00 97 2 847790 222 00 151 28 6935 670 00 44 9 257090 54 00 98 2 610520 226 50 152 30 1761 688 50 45 9 216690 56 00 99 2 343820 231 50 153 31 8242 709 00 46 9 175140 58 00 100 2 073770 236 50 154 33 7187 732 50 47 9 132450 60 00 101 1 800570 241 50 155 36 1028 762 00 48 9 088620 62 00 102 1 524210 246 50 156 41 8502 833 00 49 9 043710 64 00 103 1 244740 251 50 157 44 2747 863 00 50 8 997710 66 00 104 0 962207 256 50 158 46 2907 888 00 51 8 950650 68 00 105 0 676647 261 50 159 48 1007 910 50 52 8 902530 70 00 106 0 359204 267 00 160 49 8256 932 00 53 8 840980 72 50 107 0 009079 273 00 161 51 5056 953 00 54 8 777760 75 00 108 0 344505 279 00 TABLE C 9 Type E Nickel Chromium us Copper Nickel Thermo
92. 14 891 2243 option 6 Instrument Service Fax 614 818 1600 Sales 614 818 1609 Instrument Service Web service request http www lakeshore com sup serf html Instrument Service TABLE 8 10 Contact information The temperature controller is packaged to protect it during shipment The user should retain any shipping carton s in which equipment is originally received in the event that any equipment needs to be returned If the original packaging is not available a minimum of 76 2 mm 3 in of shock adsorbent packing material should be placed snugly on all sides of the instrumentina sturdy corrugated cardboard box Please use reasonable care when removing the temperature controller from its protective packaging and inspect it carefully for damage If it shows any sign of damage please file a claim with the carrier immediately Do not destroy the shipping container it will be required by the carrier as evidence to support claims Call Lake Shore for return and repair instructions All equipment returns must be approved by a member of the Lake Shore Service Department The service engineer will use the information provided in the service request form and will issue an RMA This number is necessary for all returned equipment It must be clearly indicated on both the shipping carton s and any correspondence relating to the shipment Once the RMA has been approved you will receive appropriate documents and instructions for shipping the equipment to
93. 2 option lt off on gt Determines whether the instrument checks the alarm for this input where 0 off and 1 on lt high setpoint gt Sets the value the source is checked against to activate the high alarm lt low setpoint gt Sets the value the source is checked against to activate low alarm lt deadband gt Sets the value that the source must change outside of an alarm condition to deactivate an unlatched alarm latch enable Specifies a latched alarm remains active after alarm condition correction where O off no latch and 12 on lt audible gt Specifies if the internal speaker will beep when an alarm condition occurs Valid entries O off 1 on lt visible gt Specifies if the Alarm LED on the instrument front panel will blink when an alarm condition occurs Valid entries O off 1 2 on Configures the alarm parameters for an input ALARM A O term turns off alarm checking for Input A ALARM B 1 270 0 0 0 1 1 1 term turns on alarm checking for input B activates high alarm if kelvin reading is over 270 and latches the alarm when kelvin reading falls below 270 Alarm condition will cause instrument to beep and the front panel Alarm LED to blink Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 128 ALARM Input Format Returned Format ALARMST Input Format Returned Format ALMRST Input Remarks ANALOG Input Format Example Remarks Model 336 Temperature Controller CHAPTER 6 Co
94. 20 0 0 70909 55 036 0 1 09489 84 002 1 1 68585 27 205 0 0 74400 56 034 0 1 09864 85 001 7 1 69367 28 190 0 0 77857 57 033 0 1 10060 86 001 4 1 69818 29 180 0 0 80139 58 032 0 1 10263 TABLEC 2 Lake Shore DT 470 Silicon Diode Curve 01 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 172 Appendices 1 26 87 0 51 0 090570 500 00 1 01064 1 19475 20 2 2 0 110239 491 0 27 1 02125 81 0 52 1 24208 17 10 3 0 136555 479 5 28 1 03167 75 0 53 1 26122 15 90 4 0 179181 461 5 29 1 04189 69 0 54 1 27811 14 90 5 0 265393 425 5 30 1 05192 63 0 55 1 29430 14 00 6 0 349522 390 0 31 1 06277 56 4 56 1 31070 13 15 7 0 452797 346 0 32 1 07472 49 0 57 1 32727 12 35 8 0 513393 320 0 33 1 09110 38 7 58 1 34506 11 55 9 0 563128 298 5 34 1 09602 35 7 59 1 36423 10 75 10 0 607845 279 0 35 1 10014 33 3 60 1 38361 10 0 11 0 648723 261 0 36 1 10393 312 61 1 40454 9 25 12 0 686936 244 0 37 1 10702 29 6 62 1 42732 8 50 13 0 722511 228 0 38 1 10974 28 3 63 1 45206 7 75 14 0 755487 213 0 39 1 11204 27 3 64 1 48578 6 80 15 0 786992 198 5 40 1 11414 26 5 65 1 53523 5 46 16 0 817025 184 5 41 1 11628 25 8 66 1 56684 4 56 17 0 844538 171 5 42 1 11853 25 2 67 1 58358 4 04 18 0 869583 159 5 43 1 12090 24 7 68 1 59690 3 58 19 0 893230 148 0 44 1 12340 24 3 69 1 60756 3 18 20 0 914469 137 5 45 1 12589 24 0 70 1 62125 2 62 21 0 934356 127 5 46 1 12913 23 7 71 1 62945 2 26 22 0 952903
95. 273 15 To convert Celsius to kelvin add 273 15 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 168 Appendices 459 67 273 15 292 180 129 67 89 82 183 33 454 270 3 15 290 178 89 94 26 120 84 44 188 71 450 267 78 5 37 289 67 178 71 94 44 119 67 84 44 188 89 449 67 267 59 5 56 280 173 33 99 82 117 67 83 15 190 441 67 263 15 10 279 67 173 15 100 112 80 193 15 440 262 22 10 93 274 170 103 15 110 78 89 194 26 439 67 262 04 11 11 270 167 78 105 57 109 67 78 71 194 44 436 260 13 15 269 67 167 59 105 56 100 73 33 199 82 430 256 67 16 48 261 67 163 15 110 99 67 73 15 200 429 67 256 48 16 67 260 162 22 110 93 94 70 203 15 423 67 253 15 20 259 67 162 04 111 11 90 67 78 205 37 420 251 11 22 04 256 160 113 15 89 67 67 59 205 56 419 67 250 93 22 22 250 156 67 116 48 81 67 63 15 210 418 00 250 23 15 249 67 156 48 116 67 80 62 22 210 93 410 245 56 27 59 243 67 153 15 120 79 67 62 04 211 11 409 67 245 37 27 78 240 151 11 122 04 76 60 213 15 405 67 243 15 30 239 67 150 93 122 22 70 56 67 216 48 400 240 33 15 238 150 123 15 69 67 56 48 216 67 399 67 239 82 33 33 230 145 56 127 59 63 67 53 15 220 390 234 44 38 71 229 67 145 37 127 78 60 51 11 222 04 389 67 234 26 38 89 225 67 143 15 130 59 67 50 93
96. 426 25 3 35469 95 5 56 3 43707 440 5 26 3 28237 100 57 3 85513 460 5 27 3 11919 110 58 4 17136 475 5 28 2 95269 120 59 4 28662 481 29 2 78168 130 60 4 64037 498 30 2 60639 140 61 4 68168 500 31 2 42737 150 TABLE C 11 Chromel AuFe 0 03 thermocouple curve Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 180 Appendices COS e NS UCM 1 5 279520 3 340820 115 00 1 313400 2 5 272030 3 78 36 3 253410 119 50 70 1 511140 341 50 3 5 263500 4 46 37 3 165360 124 00 71 1 709250 350 50 4 5 253730 5 20 38 3 076690 128 50 72 1 928940 360 50 5 5 242690 6 00 39 2 977480 133 50 73 2 127070 369 50 6 5 229730 6 90 40 2 877550 138 50 74 2 324710 378 50 7 5 214770 7 90 41 2 776950 143 50 75 2 523070 387 50 8 5 196980 9 05 42 2 675700 148 50 76 2 643480 393 00 9 5 176250 10 35 43 2 563610 154 00 77 2 708890 396 00 10 5 150910 11 90 44 2 450770 159 50 78 2 764030 398 50 11 5 116700 13 95 45 2 337230 165 00 79 2 797580 400 00 12 5 049770 17 90 46 2 223010 170 50 80 2 950200 406 50 13 5 002120 20 70 47 2 097700 176 50 81 3 008310 409 00 14 4 938000 24 50 48 1 971630 182 50 82 3 031200 410 00 15 4 876180 28 20 49 1 844890 188 50 83 3 218040 418 00 16 4 801670 32 70 50 1 706840 195 00 84 3 300110 421 50 17 4 648620 42 00 51 1 568040 201 50 85 4 000810 451 50 18 4 569170 46 80 52 1 428520 208 00 86 4 246390 462 00 1
97. 5 K Temperatures out side the range of 200 K to 350 K are not allowed 5 10 2 SoftCal Accuracy With DT 400 Series Silicon Diode Sensors 5 10 2 SoftCal Accuracy With DT 400 Series Silicon Diode Sensors 89 SoftCal Point One SoftCal Point Two SoftCal Point Three Liquid helium Liquid nitrogen Room temperature boiling point boiling point point 4 2K 77 35K 305K y y AH A 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 2 10K 50 100 K 200 325 K FIGURE 5 8 Acceptable temperature range for DT 400 series silicon diode SoftCal sensors A SoftCal calibration is only as good as the accuracy of the calibration points The accuracies listed for SoftCal assume 0 01 K for 4 2 K liquid helium 0 05 K for 77 35 K liquid nitrogen and 305 K room temperature points Users performing the SoftCal with Lake Shore instruments should note that the boiling point of liquid cryogen though accurate is affected by atmospheric pressure Use calibrated stan dard sensors if possible One point SoftCal calibrations for applications under 30 K are performed at liquid helium 4 2 K temperature Accuracy for the DT 470 SD 13 diode is 0 5 K from 2 K to 30 K with no accuracy change above 30 K Two point SoftCal calibrations for applications above 30 K are performed at liquid nitrogen 77 35 K and room temperature 305 K Accuracy for the DT 470 SD 13 diode sensor is as follows 1 0K 2 K to lt 30 K
98. 50 Q 30 W heater is connected to Output 1 Power Limit Voltage Compliance Limit Squrt P R 1 50V R Squrt 30 W 500 1250V 500 1 0 77A I 1A User Max Current should be set to the smaller of the two or 0 77 A In this example the desired 30 W of power is available to the heater Example 2 A 75 Q 50 W heater is connected to Output 1 Power Limit Voltage Compliance Limit Squrt P R 1 50V R Squrt 50 W 75Q 1 50V 750 1 0 81A 1 0 66A User Max Current should be set to the smaller of the two or 0 66 A In this example only 33 W of the desired 50 W of power is available to the heater To enter a User Max Current first set the Heater Resistance setting to 25 Q for any resistance less than 500 orto 50 O for any higher heater resistance Set the Max Cur rent setting to User The User Max Current setting now becomes available in the Out put Setup menu Enter the calculated current limit value in the User Max Current parameter Heater Resistance 1 667 A User 28W 1414A 20W 1 25 A User 15W 39W 46W 1A 10W 25W 30W 0 707 A Sw 12 5W 15W 0 5 A User 2 5W 6W 7 5W Shaded black Max current too high for these resistances due to voltage compliance limit Lightly shaded Maximum current power only available on heater output 1 Bold Discrete options available for 25 Q and 500 heaters under the Max Current setting Model 336 Temperature Controller TABLE 4 14 User Max Current Me
99. 6 should consider the following Shield measurement and computer interface cables Leave no unused or unterminated cables attached to the instrument Make cable runs as short and direct as possible Higher radiated emissions are possible with long cables Do not tightly bundle cables that carry different types of signals Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS Model 336 Temperature Controller Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Cooling System De sign and Temperature Control 1 1 1 2 1 3 14 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 Table of Contents Product Description cece cece e ee eee eee eee eene 1 PP ERA GRE CK EP SK RR UE Y TER NER rg 2 1 1 2 Temperature Control eee eee 2 1 13 Interfaces ter ie eth e her ia 3 1 1 4 Configurable Display mn 4 1 1 5 Three Option CardS eee e e een 4 Sensor Selection ces dasa tee sian e aids da i RENE Paden a a 4 Model 336 Specifications eee eee 7 1 3 1 Input SpecificatioNS e e e eene nene 7 1 3 2 Sensor Input Configuration e n 8 1 3 3 The nromie Py ioco iere dg te e re ERR RR ERU ER RERCUC Ai 8 134 Control 9 1 3 4 1 Heater Outputs Outputs 1 and 2 reren 9 1 3 4 2 Unpowered Analog Outputs Outputs 3 and 4 10 1 3 5 EronEPahello conan lare Brea ia 10 1 3 6 Inte iiec t i Aa 11 137 GENERA va aa 11 Safety Summary and Symbols cece cece e cece c
100. 9 4 499080 51 00 53 1 277520 215 00 87 4 701810 481 50 20 4 435090 54 80 54 1 114900 222 50 88 4 947390 492 00 21 4 370520 58 60 55 0 940599 230 50 89 5 636410 521 50 22 4 303610 62 50 56 0 754604 239 00 90 5 870300 531 50 23 4 234290 66 50 57 0 556906 248 00 91 6 547630 560 50 24 4 164270 70 50 58 0 358437 257 00 92 6 711600 567 50 25 4 093560 74 50 59 0 170179 265 50 93 6 781410 570 50 26 4 022170 78 50 60 0 041150 275 00 94 6 931500 577 00 27 3 950100 82 50 61 0 152699 280 00 95 7 001360 580 00 28 3 877360 86 50 62 0 163149 280 50 96 7 166710 587 00 29 3 803960 90 50 63 0 374937 290 00 97 7 260420 591 00 30 3 729910 94 50 64 0 542973 297 50 98 7 412010 597 50 31 3 655230 98 50 65 0 598604 300 00 99 7 529070 602 50 32 3 579930 102 50 66 0 774384 308 00 100 7 657460 608 00 33 3 504020 106 50 67 0 840638 311 00 101 7 704410 610 00 34 3 427530 110 50 68 1 126350 324 00 TABLE C 12 Chromel AuFe 0 07 thermocouple curve Model 336 Temperature Controller
101. A OK 50K 100 K Bipolar HA 10V OV 10V FIGURE 5 3 Analog output with polarity set to bipolar If we set the Polarity parameter to Unipolar the output would be as shown in FIGURE 5 4 In this case if the actual reading was 50 K the analog output would be 5 V middle of the scale OK 50K 100 K Unipolar t OV 5V 10V FIGURE 5 4 Output with polarity parameter set to unipolar Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 3 or 4 gt Polarity gt Unipolar or Bipolar Output Setup gt Output 3 or 4 gt Monitor Out 10 V gt See note below Output Setup gt Output 3 or 4 gt Monitor Out O V gt See note below Output Setup Output 3 or 4 gt Monitor Out 10 V gt See note below Monitor Out 10 V 0 V and 10 V settings depend on the Monitor Units selected and are limited to the acceptable values ofthe selected units Default Polarity gt Unipolar Monitor Out 10 V gt 0 0000 K Monitor Out 0 V gt 0 0000 K Monitor Out 10 V gt 1000 K Interface Command ANALOG Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 80 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation 5 7 Alarms and Relays 5 7 1 Alarms Model 336 Temperature Controller Each input of the Model 336 has high and low alarm capability Input reading data from any source can be compared to the alarm setpoint values A reading higher than the high alarm setpoint triggers the high alarm for that input A reading lower than the low alarm setpoint triggers the low alarm for that input
102. A available from 7 7mK 200 19 2 nF 174 pF K 12 mK Lake Shore 23 mK 75K 5862 9V 15 6 pV K 26 mK 0 25 K7 ca 52 mK AU ia 300K 10753yV 40 6 pV K 10 mK 0 038 K7 ea eae 20 mK i 600 K 13325 V 417pV K 10 mk 0 184 K7 pra 20 mK 1505K 49998 30V 36 006 pV K 11mK 10 73 K7 22 mK 4 Typical sensor sensitivities were taken from representative calibrations for the sensor listed 5 Control stability of the electronics only in an ideal thermal system 6 Non HT version maximum temperature 325 K 7 Accuracy specification does not include errors from room temperature compensation TABLE 1 2 Typical sensor performance Model 336 Temperature Controller 1 3 Model 336Specifications 7 1 3 Model 336 Specifications 1 3 1 Input Specifications Standard Sensor Input Range Excitation Display Measurement Electronic Measurement Temperature Electronic inputsand Tempera Current Resolution Resolution Accuracy Coefficient Control Stabilitys scanneroption ture Coeffi at 25 C Model 3062 cient Diode Negative OVto2 5V 10 pA 0 05 9 10 100 pV 10 pV 80 pV 0 005 10 pV 0 0005 of rdg C 20 pV of rdg Negative OVto10V 10 pA 0 059 9 10 100 pV 20 pv 320 uV 0 01 20 pV 0 0005 of rdg C 40 pV of rdg PTC RTD Positive 00to100 l1mAu 0 1mQ 0 2 mQ 0 002 Q 0 01 mO 0 001 of rdg C 0 4 mQ 0 01 of rdg 00t0300 1mAu 0 1mQ 02mQ 00020 0 03mQ 0 001 ofrdg SC 04
103. A query string is issued by the computer and instructs the instrument which response to send Queries are issued similar to commands with the computer acting as talker and the instrument as listener The query format is lt query mnemonic gt lt gt lt space gt lt parameter data gt lt terminator gt Query mnemonics are often the same as commands with the addition of a question mark Parameter data is often unnecessary when sending queries Query mnemonics and parameter data if necessary is described in section 6 6 1 A terminator must be sent with every message string Issuing a query does not initiate a response from the instrument Aresponse string is sent by the instrument only when it is addressed as a talker and the computer becomes the listener The instrument will respond only to the last query it receives The response can be a reading value status report or the present value of a parameter Response data formats are listed along with the associated queries in section 6 6 1 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 96 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation 6 2 4 Status System Overview Model 336 Temperature Controller The Model 336 implements a status system compliant with the IEEE 488 2 standard The status system provides a method of recording and reporting instrument informa tion and is typically used to control the Service Request SRQ interrupt line A dia gram of the status system is shown in FIGURE 6 1 Th
104. All other display modes have predefined readings in predefined locations and will use the Preferred Units parameter to determine which units to display for each sensor input Refer to section 4 3 for details on display setup Custom Mode Display Field Query DISPFLD lt field gt term n lt field gt Specifies field display location to query 1 8 lt input gt lt units gt term n n refer to command for description Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 132 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation DISPLAY Input Format Example Remarks DISPLAY Input Returned Format FILTER Input Format Example FILTER Input Format Returned Format HTR Input Format Returned Format Remarks Model 336 Temperature Controller Display Setup Command DISPLAY lt mode gt lt num fields gt lt output source term n n n lt mode gt Specifies display mode O Input A 1 Input B 2 Input C 3 Input D 4 Custom 5 Four Loop 6 All Inputs 7 Input D2 8 Input D3 9 Input D4 10 Input DS for 3062 option lt num fields gt When mode is set to Custom specifies number of fields display locations to display O 2 large 1 4 large 2 8 small When mode is set to All Inputs specifies size of readings O small with input names 1 large without input names Specifies which output and associated loop information to display in the bottom half of the custom display screen 1
105. C m Power supply voltage fluctuations not to exceed 10 of the nominal voltage m Overvoltage category Il m Pollution degree 2 Ground the Instrument To minimize shock hazard the instrument is equipped with a 3 conductor AC power cable Plug the power cable into an approved 3 contact electrical outlet or usea 3 contact adapter with the grounding wire green firmly connected to an electrical ground safety ground at the power outlet The power jack and mating plug of the power cable meet Underwriters Laboratories UL and International Electrotechnical Commission IEC safety standards Ventilation The instrument has ventilation holes in its side covers Do not block these holes when the instrument is operating Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes Opera tion of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard Keep Away from Live Circuits Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Refer component replace ment and internal adjustments to qualified maintenance personnel Do not replace components with power cable connected To avoid injuries always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them Do Not Substitute Parts or Modify Instrument Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the instrument Return the instrument to an authorized Lake Shore Cryotronics
106. C Input D Display Setup Location 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Units gt Kelvin Celsius Sensor Min Max Sensor Name Interface Command DISPFLD ECON IS 1 InputA 2 Input B 5 input C Kelvin 4 Input D 5 Input A 6 Input B 7 input C Sensor 8 Input D TABLE 4 6 Defaults m Displayed Output in the Custom Display mode the bottom half of the display is dedicated for output and control loop information for one of the four outputs The source of this information depends on the output selected for the Displayed Output parameter If the selected output is configured as a control loop output then all associated control loop parameters will be displayed When viewing the Custom Display screen the configured Displayed Output is signified by L1 L2 L3 or L4 followed by the control loop input if applicable The L character stands for Loop but will be displayed even for outputs that are not con figured as control loop outputs Menu Navigation Display Setup Displayed Output Output 1 2 3 4 m Default Output 1 Interface Command DISPLAY 4 3 2 Display Contrast 4 4 Input Setup 4 3 2 DisplayContrast 51 The front panel LCD display contrast can be adjusted for optimal viewing The default value should work well in most standard room temperature environments but devia tions from room temperature and extreme viewing angles can cause the display con trast to require adjustment for optimal viewing Men
107. D 9 Curve 15 Chromel AuFe 0 03 Thermocouple Table D 10 Curve 16 Chromel AuFe 0 07 Thermocouple Table D 11 TABLE C 1 1 475 0 0 09062 170 0 0 82405 031 0 1 10476 2 470 0 0 1 191 31 160 0 0 84651 60 030 0 1 10702 3 465 0 0 11356 32 150 0 0 86874 61 029 0 1 10945 4 460 0 0 12547 33 145 0 0 87976 62 028 0 1 11212 5 455 0 0 13759 34 140 0 0 89072 63 027 0 1 11517 6 450 0 0 14985 35 135 0 0 90161 64 026 0 1 11896 7 445 0 0 16221 36 130 0 0 91243 65 025 0 1 12463 8 440 0 0 17464 37 125 0 0 92317 66 024 0 1 13598 9 435 0 0 18710 38 120 0 0 93383 67 023 0 1 15558 10 430 0 0 19961 39 115 0 0 94440 68 022 0 1 17705 11 420 0 0 22463 40 110 0 0 95487 69 021 0 1 19645 12 410 0 0 24964 41 105 0 0 96524 70 019 5 1 22321 13 400 0 0 27456 42 100 0 0 97550 71 017 0 1 26685 14 395 0 0 28701 43 095 0 0 98564 72 015 0 1 30404 15 380 0 0 32417 44 090 0 0 99565 73 013 5 1 33438 16 365 0 0 36111 45 085 0 1 00552 74 012 5 1 35642 17 345 0 0 41005 46 080 0 1 01525 75 011 5 1 38012 18 330 0 0 44647 47 075 0 1 02482 76 010 5 1 40605 19 325 0 0 45860 48 070 0 1 03425 77 009 5 1 43474 20 305 0 0 50691 49 065 0 1 04353 78 008 5 1 46684 21 300 0 0 51892 50 058 0 1 05630 79 007 5 1 50258 22 285 0 0 55494 51 052 0 1 06702 80 005 2 1 59075 23 265 0 0 60275 52 046 0 1 07750 81 004 2 1 62622 24 250 0 0 63842 53 040 0 1 08781 82 003 4 1 65156 25 235 0 0 67389 54 039 0 1 08953 83 002 6 1 67398 26 2
108. D A converter with resolution of 0 3 mV or 0 003 of full scale These outputs can be configured to Open Loop Warm Up Supply or Monitor Out modes The Open Loop mode can be used to set the output to a specific constant value Refer to section 4 5 1 4 3 for details on the Open Loop Mode The Warm Up Supply mode uses the output to drive the pro gramming input for an external power supply for the purpose of rapidly warming a system to a user specified temperature The Monitor Out mode uses the output to provide a voltage proportional to an input sensor reading to be used by an external device such as a data logger The unpowered analog outputs are not designed to provide heater power and although they are short protected should not be used to drive a resistance lower than 1 kO 4 5 2 1 Warm Up Supply Warm Up Supply mode is designed for controlling an external power supply used for rapidly increasing the temperature in the controlled system for example to bring a system to room temperature in order to change samples Refer to section 5 5 for more information on warm up supply operation Refer to section 3 8 5 for the procedure to install an external power supply for warm up supply mode 4 5 2 2 Monitor Out Refer to section 5 6 for more information on Monitor Out mode The Model 336 has three computer interfaces IEEE 488 USB and Ethernet Only one of these interfaces can be actived at one time Use the Interface menu to configure which int
109. FIGURE 3 7 Capacitance Input shield and gard The 3 496 kHz excitation of the option card can interfere with the sensitive DC measure ments of the standard inputs Tightly twist the lead wires of each sensor and separate them from the leads from the other sensor Test any system for sensor interference before it is permanently sealed The information in this section is for a Model 336 configured with thermocouple sen sor inputs Thermocouple inputs are not installed on the standard Model 336 but can be added by purchasing the Model 3060 dual thermocouple input option Refer to section 7 6 for installation of the Model 3060 Do not leave thermocouple inputs unconnected Short inputs when not in use Attach sensor leads to the screws on the off white ceramic terminal blocks Sensor connection is important when using thermocouples because the measured signal is small Many measurement errors can be avoided with proper sensor installation The block has two thermocouple inputs and each input has two screw terminals one pos itive one negative See FIGURE 3 8 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 38 CHAPTER 3 Installation Remove all insulation then tighten the screws on the thermocouple wires Keep the ceramic terminal blocks away from heat sources including sunlight and shield them from fans or room drafts INPUT C INPUT D A FIGURE 3 8 Thermocouple input definition and common connector polarities inputs shown
110. IOCUR lt input gt lt excitation gt term a n lt input gt Specifies which input to configure A D excitation gt Specifies the Diode excitation current 0 10 pA 1 1 mA The 10 pA excitation current is the only calibrated excitation current and is used in almost all applications Therefore the Model 336 will default the 10 pA current set ting any time the input sensor type is changed in order to prevent an accidental change If using a current that is not 10 pA the input sensor type must first be config ured to Diode INTYPE command If the sensor type is not set to Diode when the DIOCUR command is sent the command will be ignored Diode Excitation Current Parameter Query DIOCUR lt input gt term a lt input gt A D lt excitation gt term n refer to command for description Custom Mode Display Field Command DISPFLD field input units term n n n lt field gt Specifies field display location to configure 1 8 lt input gt Specifies item to display in the field O None 1 Input A 2 Input B 3 Input C 4 Input D 5 Input D2 6 Input D3 7 Input D4 8 Input DS for 3062 option lt units gt Valid entries 1 kelvin 2 Celsius 3 sensor units 4 minimum data and 5 maximum data DISPFLD 2 1 1 term displays kelvin reading for Input A in display field 2 when dis play mode is set to Custom This command only applies to the readings displayed in the Custom display mode
111. IP Address Static Subnet Mask Static Gateway Static Primary DNS and Static Secondary DNS parameters to attempt to configure the Ethernet interface connection Referto section 6 4 1 3 for details on DNS parameters Contact your network administrator for the appropriate Static IP parameters for your network Menu Navigation Interface Modify IP Config gt Static IP gt Valid IP Address Interface Modify IP Config Static Subnet Mask Valid Subnet Mask Interface Modify IP Config gt Static Gateway Valid IP Address Interface Modify IP Config Static Pri DNS Valid IP Address Interface Modify IP Config Static Sec DNS Valid IP Address 6 4 1 3 DNS Parameters The parameters discussed in this section exist to facilitate the use of the Domain Name System DNS to connectto the Model 336 using assignable names ratherthan cryptic IP addresses This functionality is provided for convenience only and is not critical to the connectivity ofthe Ethernet interface DNS Address A Domain Name System DNS is a service that translates names into IP addresses This service allows for using human readable names for devices on a net work As an example when a web browser attempts to retrieve the web page at www lakeshore com the browser first performs a forward lookup on the assigned DNS server to attempt to retrieve the IP address that is represented by the name www lakeshore com If successful the web browserthen usesthe retriev
112. Local Lockout prevents the use of instrument front panel controls m DCL Device Clear clears Model 336 interface activity and puts it into a bus idle state Finally addressed bus control commands are multiline commands that must include the Model 336 listen address before the instrument responds Only the addressed device responds to these commands The Model 336 recognizes three ofthe addressed bus control commands m SDC Selective Device Clear the SDC command performs essentially the same function as the DCL command except that only the addressed device responds m GTL Go To Local the GTL command is used to remove instruments from the remote mode With some instruments GTL also unlocks front panel controls if they were previously locked out with the LLO command 6 2 3 IEEE 488 2 Command Structure 95 m SPE Serial Poll Enable and SPD Serial Poll Disable serial polling accesses the Service Request Status Byte Register This status register contains important operational information from the unit requesting service The SPD command ends the polling sequence 6 2 3 2 Common Commands Common commands are addressed commands that create commonality between instruments on the bus All instruments that comply with the IEEE 488 standard share these commands and their format Common commands all begin with an aster isk They generally relate to bus and instrument status and identification Common query commands end with a question mark
113. MF voltages Refer to section 4 4 5 for details on the Thermal EMF Compensation Current Reversal fea ture Menu Navigation Input Setup gt nput A B C or D Sensor Type NTC RTD Cernox Interface Command INTYPE The Model 336 is equipped with an autoranging feature that will automatically select the appropriate resistance range for the connected resistive temperature device In some cases it may be desirable to manually select the resistance range To manually select a resistance range set the Autorange parameter to Off then use the Range parameterto select the desired range Autorange will be On by default when ever the Sensor Type parameter is setto PTC RTD or NTC RTD Autorange is not avail able for the Diode sensor type 4 4 5 Thermal Electromotive Force EMF Compensation 4 4 5 ThermalElectromotive Force EMF Compensation 53 Menu Navigation Input Setup gt nput A B C or D gt Autorange gt Off or On Input Setup gt nput A B C or D gt Range See table below Default On Interface Command INTYPE DIOE 2 5 V Silicon 25 pW at 10 pA exictation 10 pA 1mA 10 V GaAIAs 100 pW at 10 pA excitation 10 pA 1 mA 100 10 pW 300 30 pW 100 Q 100 pW PTC RTD Platinum 300 Q 300 pW Lo 1k0 1mW 3kQ 3mW 10kQ 10mW 100 10 pW 1mA 300 2 7 pW 300 pA 1000 1uW 100 pA 3000 270nW 30 pA NTC RTD Cernox 1kQ 100 nW 10 pA 3 kQ 27 nW 3 pA 10 kQ 10 nW 1 pA 30 kQ
114. Menu Navigation Alarm Input A B C D Alarm Off On Alarm lnput A B C D gt Low Setpoint see note below Alarm lnput A B C D High Setpoint see note below Low and High Setpoint limits are determined by the Preferred Units ofthe associated sen sor input Defaults Alarm Off Low Setpoint gt 0 0000 K High Setpoint gt 1000 K Interface Command ALARM 5 7 1 1 Alarm Annunciators The Alarm LED annunciator steadily displays when any alarm that is enabled also has the Visible parameter enabled The annunciator flashes when any alarm that has the Visible parameter enabled activates An input need not be displayed for the system Alarm annunciator to indicate input alarm status but if the input is displayed on the front panel then the reading will alternate between the alarm status message and the actual reading Ifthe Audible parameter is set to On for an enabled alarm then the beeper inside the instrument will sound when the alarm activates The two relays on the Model 336 can also be tied to alarm functions as described in section 5 7 2 You may want to set the Visible parameter to Off if there is no need for showing the alarm state on the front panel for instance if you are using the alarm function to trig ger a relay The Audible parameter can be set to Off as well to keep the audible alarm from sounding when an alarm is triggered Menu Navigation Alarm Input A B C D Visible Off On Alarm Input A
115. N class A or class B tolerance TABLE 5 8 Three point SoftCal calibration accuracy for DT 470 SD 13 diode sensors Three point SoftCal calibrations are performed at liquid nitrogen 77 35 K room temperature 305 K and high temperature 480 K Accuracy for the PT 102 PT 103 or PT 111 platinum sensor is 250 mK from 70 K to 325 K and 250 mK from 325 Kto 480K 5 10 5 SoftCal CalibrationCurve Creation 5 10 5 SoftCal CalibrationCurveCreation 91 Once the calibration data points have been obtained you may create a SoftCal cali bration Press Curve Entry then scroll to Softcal and press Enter A list of sensortypes is displayed containing DT 470 PT 100 and PT 1000 Scroll to the desired sensortype and press Enter A list of SoftCal parameters is displayed Use the Store Location parameter to choose the user curve location in which to store the newly generated curve If desired use the Serial Number parameterto enter a serial numberforthe newly generated curve Use the Point X Temp and Point X Sensor parameters to enter calibration data point X where X can be point 1 2 or3 If only 1 or 2 data points were acquired only enter those data points and leave the others at their default values Note the acceptable temperature ranges for each calibration data point in FIGURE 5 8 and FIGURE 5 9 If a temperature value outside of the acceptable range is entered the value will be limited to the closest acceptable value
116. P Config submenu of the Interface Setup menu When using naming systems other than DNS the Model 336 cannot assign the Preferred Domain Name or retrieve the Actual Domain Name Menu Navigation The Preferred Domain name can only be entered using a computer interface NET command and viewed using the NET query Refer to section 6 6 1 for details on the NET command and query When the Ethernet interface is enabled two submenus become available Modify IP Config and View IP Config All configurable settings are available under the Modify IP Config submenu and the current state of the Ethernet configuration is detailed in the View IP Config submenu This is designed to eliminate confusion as to which are the configurable Static IP settings and which are the currently configured settings that could have been configured using any of the three configuration methods DHCP Auto IP or Static IP The method used for the currently established connection is shown in the LAN Status parameter of the View IP Confi submenu section 6 4 2 1 6 4 2 1 LAN Status The LAN Status parameter indicates the current status of the Ethernet configuration This read only parameter can be accessed using the View IP Config menu The possible LAN Status states are m Connected Static the IP address parameters have been successfully configured using the Static IP method m Connected DHCP the IP address parameters have been successfully configured using the DHC
117. P method m Connected AutolP the IP address parameters have been successfully configured using the AutolP method m Addr Not Acquired the IP address parameters were not successfully configured m Duplicate Init IP when initially attempting to connect to the network the Static IP address was found to be in use by another device already configured on the network The Model 336 interface will remain unconfigured until an available Static IP address is entered m Duplicate Ong IP an ongoing conflict occurred after being successfully con nected to the network because another device on the network was configured using the same IP address The Model 336 will automatically unconfigure and remain unconfigured until an available IP address is entered m Cable Unplugged the Ethernet cable is either unplugged at one end or has been damaged Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 114 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation 6 4 3 TCP Socket Communication Model 336 Temperature Controller m Module Error the Model 336 has lost contact with the Ethernet module this may indicate a damaged Ethernet module m Acquiring Address the Model 336 is attempting to configure the IP address parameters using the enabled methods 6 4 2 2 MAC Address The Media Access Controller MAC Address is a physical hardware address assigned to all Ethernet devices MAC addresses are 48 bits and are generally written as six groups of two hexidecimal digits
118. Programmable the power supply must be voltage programmable so that Outputs 3 or 4 control output can control it Ideally the supply s programming input should have a range of O to 10 V that corresponds to O to 10 V range of the control output This guarantees that O to 100 of the control output scales to 0 to 100 power out of the supply Supplies with different programming input ranges can be used as described in section 3 8 5 4 DC Output Capable the power supply must be capable of continuous DC output Most commercial audio amplifiers are not suitable because they are AC coupled and cannot provide a DC output Output Type most available voltage programmable power supplies are configured for voltage output This is different than Outputs 1 and 2 on the 336 which are configured for current output The differences between the two are not signifi cant when used in warm up mode Output Voltage Lake Shore recommends supplies with a working output voltage between 10 V and 50 V Voltage higher than 50V poses a shock hazard and should only be used if operator safety can be assured by the installer Voltage lower than 10 V becomes impractical because the current necessary provide any meaningful power is too high for most cryogenic wiring Output Power there is no limit to the maximum power of the supply Typical warm up applications normally range between 25 W and 200 W 3 8 5 2 Power Supply Setup Follow all operation and safety instruction i
119. Ramp Parameter Query 140 CRVHDR Curve Header Cmd 130 RAMPST Control Setpoint Ramp Status Query 140 CRVHDR Curve Header Query 130 RANGE Heater Range Cmd 140 CRVPT Curve Data Point Cmd 130 RANGE Heater Range Query 140 CRVPT Curve Data Point Query 130 RDGST Input Reading Status Query 141 DFLT Factory Defaults Cmd 131 RELAY Relay Control Parameter Cmd 141 DIOCUR Diode Excitation Current Parameter Cmd 131 RELAY Relay Control Parameter Query 141 DIOCUR Diode Excitation Current Parameter Query 131 RELAYST Relay Status Query 141 DISPFLD Custom ModeDisplay Field Cmd 131 SCAL Generate SoftCal Curve Cmd 142 DISPFLD Custom Mode Display Field Query 131 SETP Control Setpoint Cmd 142 DISPLAY Display Setup Cmd 132 SETP Control Setpoint Query 142 DISPLAY Display Setup Query 132 SRDG Sensor Units Input Reading Query 142 FILTER Input Filter Parameter Cmd 132 TEMP Thermocouple Junction Temperature Query 143 FILTER Input Filter Parameter Query 132 TLIMIT Temperature Limit Cmd 143 HTR Heater Output Query 132 TLIMIT Temperature Limit Query 143 HTRSET Heater Setup Cmd 133 TUNEST Control Tuning Status Query 143 HTRSET Heater Setup Query 133 WARMUP Warmup Supply Parameter Cmd 144 HTRST Heater Status Query 133 WARMUP Warmup Supply Parameter Query 144 IEEE IEEE 488 Parameter Cmd 133 WEBLOG Website Login Parameters 144 IEEE IEEE 488 Interface Parameter Query 133 WEBLOG Website Login Parameter Query 144 INCRV Input Curve Number Cmd 134
120. Type Variable DC current source D Aresolution 16 bit Max power 100W 50W Max current 2A 1A Compliance voltage 50V 50V Heater load for max power 250 500 Heater load range 10 Q to 1000 Ranges 3 decade steps in power Heater noise 0 12 pA RMS dominated by line frequency and its harmonics Grounding Output referenced to chassis ground Heater connector Dual banana Safety limits Curve temperature power up heater off short circuit protection TABLE 1 7 Output 1 Type Variable DC current source D Aresolution 16 bit Max power 50 W 50W Max current 1 41A 1A Compliance voltage 35 4 V 50V Heater load for max power 250 500 Heater load range 10 Q to 1000 Ranges 3 decade steps in power Heater noise 0 12 pA RMS dominated by line frequency and its harmonics Grounding Output referenced to chassis ground Heater connector Dual banana Safety limits Curve temperature power up heater off short circuit protection TABLE 1 8 Output2 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 10 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1 3 5 Front Panel Model 336 Temperature Controller 1 3 4 2 Unpowered Analog Outputs Outputs 3 and 4 Control type Tuning Control stability PID control settings Proportional gain Integral reset Derivative rate Manual output Zone control Setpoint ramping Warm up heater mode settings Warm up percentage Warm up mode
121. User s Manual Model 336 Temperature Controller 6103 m 328 a 9008 k g Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc sales lakeshore com 575 McCorkle Blvd service lakeshore com Fax 614 891 1392 Westerville Ohio 43082 8888 USA www lakeshore com Telephone 614 891 2243 Methods and apparatus disclosed and described herein have been developed solely on company funds of Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc No government or other contractual support or relationship whatsoever has existed which in any way affects or mitigates proprietary rights of Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc in these developments Methods and apparatus disclosed herein may be subject to U S Patents existing or applied for Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc reserves the right to add improve modify or withdraw functions design modifications or products at any time without notice Lake Shore shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with furnishing performance or use of this material Rev 1 8 P N 119 048 03 January 2014 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT WARRANTY PERIOD THREE 3 YEARS 1 Lake Shore warrants that products manufactured by Lake Shore the Product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for three years from the date of Purchaser s physical receipt of the Prod uct the Warranty Period If Lake Shore receives notice of any such defects during th
122. V to 10 V Refer to section 2 11 for information on thermoelectric devices Refer to section 3 8 5 4 for information on scaling the output for voltages less than 10 V Menu Navigation Output Setup gt Output 3 or 4 gt Polarity Bipolar Interface Command ANALOG Warm Up Supply mode is designed for controlling an external power supply used for rapidly increasing the temperature in the controlled system for example to bring a system to room temperature in order to change samples Refer to section 3 8 5 for information on using an external power supply for warm up supply mode The Control Input parameter determines which sensor is used for feedback in the Warm Up Supply mode Refer to section 4 5 1 5 for details on the Control Input parameter Once Warm Up Supply Mode is configured press Setpoint and set the desired tem perature then press Heater Range and set the range to On to activate the output The front panel display must be configured to show the Warm Up control loop forthe Set point and Heater Range keys to be used Refer to section 4 2 and section 4 3 for details on front panel keypad operation and display setup The Power Up Enable feature determines if the output will remain on after power is cycled Refer to section 4 5 1 2 for details on the Power Up Enable feature Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 3 or 4 gt 0utput Mode gt Warm Up Supply Interface Command OUTMODE The Warm Up Percentage parameter is used to det
123. YPE Input Type Parameter Query 135 OPC Operation Complete Cmd 126 KRDG Kelvin Reading Query 136 OPC Operation Complete Query 126 LEDS Front Panel LEDS Cmd 136 gt RST Reset Instrument Cmd 126 LEDS Front Panel LEDS Query 136 SRE Service Request Enable Register Cmd 126 LOCK Front Panel Keyboard Lock Cmd 136 SRE Service Request Enable Register Query 126 LOCK Front Panel Keyboard Lock Query 136 STB Status Byte Query 127 MDAT Minimum Maximum Data Query 136 TST Self Test Query 127 MNMXRST Minimum and Maximum Function Reset Cmd 136 WAI Wait to Continue Cmd 127 MODE Remote Interface Mode Cmd 137 ALARM Input Alarm Parameter Cmd 127 MODE Remote Interface Mode Query 137 ALARM Input Alarm Parameter Query 128 MOUT Manual Output Cmd 137 ALARMST Input Alarm Status Query 128 MOUT Output Manual Heater Power MHP Output Query 137 ALMRST Reset Alarm Status Cmd 128 NET Network Settings Cmd 137 ANALOG Monitor Out Parameter Cmd 128 NET Network Settings Query 137 ANALOG Monitor Out Parameter Query 129 NETID Network Configuration Query 138 AOUT Analog Output Data Query 129 OUTMODE Output Mode Command 139 ATUNE Autotune Cmd 129 OUTMODE Output Mode Query 139 BRIGT Display Contrast Cmd 129 PID Control Loop PID Values Cmd 139 BRIGT Display Contrast Query 129 PID Control Loop PID Values Query 140 CRDG Celsius Reading Query 129 RAMP Control Setpoint Ramp Parameter Cmd 140 CRVDEL Curve Delete Cmd 130 RAMP Control Setpoint
124. ZONE Control Loop Zone Table Parameter Cmd 145 INCRV Input Curve Number Query 134 ZONE Output Zone Table Parameter Query 145 INNAME Sensor Input Name Cmd 134 Model 336 Temperature Controller TABLE 6 6 Command summary 6 6 1 Interface Commands CLS Input Remarks ESE Input Format Remarks Example ESE Input Returned Format ESR Input Returned Format Remarks 6 6 1 Interface Commands 125 This section lists the interface commands in alphabetical order Begins common interface command Required to identify queries String of alphanumeric characters with length n Send these strings using surrounding quotes Quotes enable characters such as commas and spaces to be used without the instrument interpreting them as delimiters s n nn String of number characters that may include a decimal point Dotted decimal format common with IP addresses Always contains 4 yd dot separated 3 digit decimal numbers such as 192 168 000 012 term Terminator characters Indicated a parameter field many are command specific state Parameter field with only On Off or Enable Disable states Floating point values have varying resolution depending on the type of value command or query issued TABLE 6 7 Interface commands key Clear Interface Command CLS term Clears the bits in the Status Byte Register Standard Event Status Register a
125. able assembly 10 ft P N G 112 325 20 ft P N G 112 326 rear view The Model 336 can be installed into a 482 6 mm 19 in rack mount cabinet using the optional Lake Shore Model RM 1 Rack Mount Kit The kit contains mounting ears handles and screws that adapt the front ofthe instrument to fit into a 88 9 mm 3 5 in tall full rack space Additional support may be required in the rear ofthe instrument and to relieve strain on heavy cables The mounting ears are painted and do not guarantee good electrical contact between the instrument and cabinet They should not be used for ground strapping unless paint is removed from under all screws Ensure that there is a 25 mm 1in clearance on both sides ofthe instrument after rack mounting Description PN Qty O Rack mount ear 107 440 2 Screw 6 32x3 8 PH FLHD MS SS 0 033 4 Rack mount handles 3 in black 107 433 2 Screw 8 32x3 8 PH FLHD MS SS 0 081 4 Remove and discard 4 screws from case replace with 4 screws from kit FIGURE 7 2 Model RM 1 rack mount kit The field installable Model 3060 adds thermocouple functionality to inputs C and D the Model 3061 adds capacitance functionality to input D and the Model 3062 adds 4 scanners to input D While the options can be easily removed this is not necessary as the standard inputs remain fully functional when they are not being used to mea sure thermocouple or capacitance temperature sensors Calibration for the options are
126. after six time constants TABLE 4 12 shows a sampling of filter settings and the resulting time constant settle time and equivalent noise bandwidth Filter points Time constant Settle time Equivalent noise 6 time constants bandwidth 1 4 TC 2 0 14 5 0 9s 1 733 Hz 4 0 355 21s 0 719 Hz 8 0 755 4 55 0 334 Hz 16 1 555 9 35 0 161 Hz 32 3 155 18 95 0 079 Hz 64 6 355 38 15 0 039 Hz TABLE 4 12 Filter settle time and bandwidth The filter window is a limit for restarting the filter If a single reading is different from the filter value by more than the limit the instrument will assume the change was intentional and restart the filter Filter window is set in percent of full scale range When the Model 3062 4 channel scanner option card is installed the time it takes to get a new reading is increased if more than one scanner channel is enabled ora channel is configured for a range that requires a reduced update rate This reduction in update rate modifies the time constant of the filter The time constant of the filter can be derived using the formula TC T In N N 1 where TC is one time constant T is the update rate of the channel in seconds per reading and N is the number of filter points Refer to section 4 4 8 2 for information on update rates of the Model 3062 TABLE 4 13 shows a sampling of enabled scanner channels with the number of filter points s
127. airs scroll to the end of the list and edit the 0 value pair by following the procedure for editing a breakpoint pair in section 5 9 1 1 If the curve still contains less than 200 pairs a new 0 value breakpoint will be added to the end ofthe list for entering another new breakpoint pair Menu Navigation Curve Entry Edit Curve gt 21 59 gt Curve Points 1 200 Interface Command CRVPT 5 9 1 3 Delete a Breakpoint Pair To delete a breakpoint pair scroll to the desired breakpoint number then enter a O value for both the sensor and temperature values by following the procedure for edit ing a breakpoint pair in section 5 9 1 1 If you are not entering O for both sensor and temperature values then entering new val ues over an existing breakpoint pair will replace that pair with the new value when you press Enter After editing adding or deleting all desired breakpoint pairs press Escape Exit Menu while the highlight is on a breakpoint number All breakpoint pair changes additions and deletions will be saved when exiting the menu When curve entry is complete you must assign the new curve to an input The Model 336 does not automatically assign the new curve to any input Referto section 4 4 11 for details on assigning a curve to a sensor input Menu Navigation Curve Entry gt Edit Curve 21 59 Curve Points gt 1 200 Interface Command CRVPT 5 9 1 4 Thermocouple Curve Considerations The following are things to
128. al Output and Range parameters This guarantees constant current to the load but it does not actively control temperature Any change in the characteristics ofthe load will cause a change in temperature You can configure any output to Open Loop mode When an output is configured in this mode the Manual Output and Heater Range parameters become available in the Output Setup menu for setting the output For convenience the Control Input param eter can be used to assign a sensor input which then allows the output to be dis played on the front panel when using that sensor input s display mode When displayed on the front panel the Manual Output and Heater Range direct operation keys can be used for one touch access to these settings Refer to section 4 3 1 for details on configuring display modes Since there is no sensor feedback in open loop mode there is nothing to prevent the sys tem from being overheated We recommend using the Temperature Limit feature to help protect the system from overheating Refer to section 4 4 12 for temperature limits Menu Navigation Output Setup gt Output 1 2 3 or 4 gt 0utput Mode Open Loop 4 5 1 5 Control Parameters Once the output mode is chosen the control parameters can be used to begin con trolling temperature Control Input is used to create a control loop The P I and D parameters provide fine tuning ofthe control algorithm Manual Output provides a baseline output power about which to co
129. al conductor but should not be a good thermal con ductor or heat will transfer down the leads and change the temperature reading of the sensor Small 30 AWG to 40 AWG wire made of an alloy like phosphor bronze is much better than copper wire Thin wire insulation is preferred and twisted wire should be used to reduce the effect of RF noise if it is present The wire used on the room temperature side of the vacuum boundary is not critical so copper cable is normally used Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 20 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control i To room temperature Vacuum shroud Ta Refrigerator first stage Vacuum space Radiation shield Dental floss tie down Or Thermal anchor bobbin Cryogenic tape Thermal anchor bobbin Cryogenic wire small diameter large AWG Sensor Second stage and sample holder Heater wiring not shown for clarity Drawing not to scale E Optical window if required FIGURE 2 1 Typical sensor installation in a mechanical refrigerator 2 4 7 Lead Soldering When you solder additional wire to short sensor leads be careful not to overheat the sensor Athermal anchor such as a metal wire clamp or alligator clip will anchorthe leads and protect the sensor Leads should be tinned before bonding to reduce the time that heat is applied to the sensor lead Clean the solder flux after soldering to prevent corrosion or outgassing in vacuum
130. ally ANDed with the corresponding summary bits FIGURE 6 4 Whenever a summary bit is set by an event register and its correspond ing enable bit is set by the user bit 6 will set to generate a service request The Service Request Enable command SRE programs the Service Request Enable Register and the query command SRE reads it From operation event register From standard event status register E From operation event register Not Not Not Not sci Name Status byte register STB RQS Generate service request reset by serial poll Read by STB MSS sonicereauest C e 5 e e e 2 o er enable register 228 64 sz us 8 2 1 name a FIGURE 6 4 Status byte register and service request enable register 6 2 6 3 Using Service Request SRQ and Serial Poll When a Status Byte summary bit or MAV bit is enabled by the Service Request Enable Register and goes from O to 1 bit 6 RQS MSS of the status byte will be set This will send a service request SRQ interrupt message to the bus controller The user program may then direct the bus controller to serial poll the instruments on the bus to identify which one requested service the one with bit 6 set in its status byte Serial polling will automatically clear RQS ofthe Status Byte Register This allows sub sequent serial polls to monitor bit 6 for an SRQ occurrence generated by other event types After a serial poll the same event or any event
131. an Autotune mode There are three Autotune modes available They result in slightly different system characteristics Autotune PI is recommended for most applications m Autotune P sets only the P parameter value and D are set to 0 no matter what the initial values are This mode is recommended for systems that have very long lag times or nonlinearity that prevents stable PI control Expect some overshoot or undershoot of the setpoint and stable temperature control below the setpoint value m Autotune PI sets values for both P and parameters D is set to 0 This mode is recommended for stable control at a constant temperature It may take slightly longer to stabilize after setpoint change than Auto PID Expect some overshoot or undershoot of the setpoint and stable temperature control at the setpoint value m Autotune PID sets values for P I and D parameters Dis always set to 100 This mode is recommended when setpoint changes are frequent but temperature is allowed to stabilize between changes Stability at setpoint may be worse than Autotune PI in noisy systems Expect slightly less overshoot or undershoot than the other modes and control at the setpoint value When the Autotune process is initiated the P I D and Manual Output parameters are removed from the display and the Autotuning message appears in the lower right corner Below the Autotuning message the current status of the process is displayed The status message bli
132. an RS 232 serial port at a fixed 57 600 baud rate but with the physical plug ins of a USB It also allows you to download firmware upgrades ensuring the most current firmware version is loaded into your instrument without having to physically change anything Each sensor input has a high and low alarm that offer latching and non latching oper ation The 2 relays can be used in conjunction with the alarms to alert you of a fault condition and perform simple on off control Relays can be assigned to any alarm or operated manually The 10 V analog voltage outputs on outputs 3 and 4 can be configured to send a volt age proportional to temperature to a strip chart recorder or data acquisition system You may select the scale and data sent to the output including temperature or sensor units bin iss GND our HEATER WARNING FElINPUTCHPSSES INP TD INPUTD NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO RSONNEL 100 W MAX de eo 9 oo o0 eaen LL to RELAY R RELAY 2 IEEE 488 Ne cow no ne cow No OEthernetinterface O IEEE 488 interface O Output 2 heater O USB interface O Line input assembly Output 1 heater O Thermocouple option inputs FIGURE 1 2 Model 336 rear panel Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 4 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1 1 4 Configurable Display E Rad Shield 7 8645 The Model 336 offers a bright graphic liquid crystal display with an LED backlight that simultaneously displays
133. an be used Ifyou are using one point the algorithm shifts the entire curve up or down to meet the single point Ifyou are using two points the algorithm has enough information to tiltthe curve achieving good accuracy between the data points The third point extends the improved accuracy to span all three points m Point 1 calibration data point at or near the boiling point of nitrogen 77 35 K Acceptable temperature entries are 50 Kto 100 K m Point 2 calibration data point near room temperature 305 K Acceptable tem perature entries are 200 Kto 300 K m Point 3 calibration data point at a higher temperature 480 K Acceptable tem perature entries are 400 K to 600 K A SoftCal calibration is only as good as the accuracy of the calibration points The accuracies listed for SoftCal assume 0 05 K for 77 35 K liquid nitrogen and 305 K room temperature points If you are performing the SoftCal with Lake Shore instruments note that the boiling point of liquid cryogen though accurate is affected by atmospheric pressure Use calibrated standard sensors if possible One point SoftCal calibrations with platinum sensors have no specified accuracy Two point SoftCal calibrations for applications above 70 K are performed at liquid nitrogen 77 35 K and room temperature 305 K Accuracy for the PT 102 PT 103 or PT 111 platinum sensor is as follows 250 mK 70 K to 325 K 500 mK 325K to 1400 mK at 480 K DI
134. ance is set to 500 Heater Setup Query HTRSET lt output gt term n lt output gt Specifies which heater output to query 1 or 2 lt htr resistance gt lt max current gt lt max user current gt lt current power gt term n n n nnn n Heater Status Query HTRST lt output gt term n lt output gt Specifies which heater output to query 1 or 2 lt error code gt term n lt error code gt Heater error code 0 no error 1 heater open load 2 heater short Error condition is cleared upon querying the heater status which will also clear the front panel error message IEEE 488 Interface Parameter Command IEEE lt address gt term nn lt address gt Specifies the IEEE address 1 30 Address 0 and 31 are reserved IEEE 4 term after receipt of the current terminator the instrument responds to address 4 IEEE 488 Interface Parameter Query IEEE term lt address gt term nn refer to command for description Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 134 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation INCRV Input Format Remarks Example INCRV Input Format Returned Format INNAME Input Format Example Remarks INNAME Input Format Returned Format INTSEL Input Format Remarks INTSEL Input Returned Format Model 336 Temperature Controller Input Curve Number Command INCRV lt input gt lt curve number gt term a nn lt input gt Specifies which input to
135. and visible on off Display annunciator beeper and relays 2 Normally open NO normally closed NC and common C 30VDCat3A Activate relays on high low or both alarms for any input or manual mode Detachable terminal block 15 Cto 35 C at rated accuracy 5 C to 40 C at reduced accuracy 100 120 220 240 VAC 10 50 or 60 Hz 250 VA 435 mm W x 89 mm H x 368 mm D 17 in x 3 5 in x 14 5 in full rack 7 6 kg 16 8 Ib CE mark Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 12 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1 4 Safety Summary and Symbols Model 336 Temperature Controller Observe these general safety precautions during all phases ofinstrument operation service and repair Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warn ings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended instrument use Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc assumes no liability for Cus tomer failure to comply with these requirements The Model 336 protects the operator and surrounding area from electric shock or burn mechanical hazards excessive temperature and spread of fire from the instru ment Environmental conditions outside of the conditions below may pose a hazard to the operator and surrounding area m Indooruse m Altitude to 2000 m m Temperature for safe operation 5 C to 40 C m Maximum relative humidity 80 for temperature up to 31 C decreasing linearly to 50 at 40
136. ansition m Command Error CME Bit 5 this bit is set ifa command error has been detected since the last reading This means that the instrument could not interpret the command due to a syntax error an unrecognized header unrecognized termina tors or an unsupported command m Execution Error EXE Bit 4 this bit is set ifan execution error has been detected This occurs when the instrument is instructed to do something not within its capabilities m Query Error QYE Bit 2 this bit indicates a query error It occurs rarely and involves loss of data because the output queue is full m Operation Complete OPC Bit 0 when OPC is sent this bit will be set when the instrument has completed all pending operations The operation of this bit is not related to the OPC command which is a separate interface feature section 6 2 6 6 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 100 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller Standard event Status register ESR ESR reads and clears the register To event summary Standardevent 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit bit ESB of status Ss ette lus er sre e 4 212 ecimal MUTE row sea cme exe ica ove usea Pc FIGURE 6 2 Standard event status register Name 6 2 5 2 Operation Event Register Set The Operation Event Register reports the interface related instrument events listed below Any or all of these e
137. antage Here are some further suggestions Use four lead measurement whenever possible Do not connect sensor leads to chassis or earth ground Use twisted shielded cable outside the cooling system Attach the shield pin on the sensor connector to the cable shield Do not attach more than one cable shield at the other end of the cable Run different inputs and outputs in their own shielded cable Use twisted wire inside the cooling system Use similar technique for heater leads Use a grounded receptacle for the instrument power cord Consider ground strapping the instrument chassis to other instruments or computers This section provides information for a Model 336 configured with the capacitance sensor input option card Capacitance inputs are not installed on the standard Model 336 but it can be added by purchasing the Model 3061 capacitance input option Refer to section 7 6 for installation of the Model 3061 The Model 3061 adds a capacitance input to the Model 336 appearing on the display as input D The card has separate voltage feedback and current excitation for the sen sor The Model 3061 is intended to control temperature in strong magnetic fields using a Lake Shore Model CS 501 capacitance temperature sensor The standard inputs remain in the instrument and are fully functional Upon changing control to the capacitive sensor the PID values will need to be optimized The Model 336 does not support temperature conversion for the capac
138. ar both sides onthe tracks FIGURE 8 10 Cover removal 3 Use a small Phillips screwdriver to remove the two top cover screws and one rear bottom screw FIGURE 8 10 4 Remove the rear plastic bezel The cover is tracked Slide the top cover to the rear on the track to remove it 8 12 EnclosureTop Remove andReplace Procedure 163 Follow this procedure to install the top enclosure 5 6 7 8 9 Slide the top panel forward in the track provided on each side ofthe unit Use a small Phillips screwdriver to replace the two top cover screws and 1 rear bottom screw Use the hex driver to replace the two screws on the side of the top covers Replace the rear plastic bezel by sliding it straight into the unit Tighten the two rear bottom screws 10 Replace the power cord in the rear of the unit and set the power switch to On wu J12 option Lee connector JMP1 FIGURE 8 11 Location of internal components Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 164 CHAPTER 8 Service 8 13 Firmware Updates 8 13 1 Updating the Firmware 8 13 2 Record of Updates Made to the Firmware 8 14 Technical Inquiries 8 14 1 Contacting Lake Shore Model 336 Temperature Controller This section provides instructions on updating your firmware It also provides a table of the updates that have been made thus far Periodically Lake Shore provides updates to instrument firmwa
139. arameters Menus that apply to multiple entities for example Input Setup could apply to Input A B C or D have a first level selection to determine which entity to configure for instance Input C Once the first level selection is made the list of menu parameters is dis played The parameter labels are displayed on the left and the current value of each parameter is displayed on the right In this screen use the A and W keys to move the highlight up or down respectively Press Enter to enter the setting mode for the highlighted parameter The type of setting mode depends on the type of parameter highlighted The possible setting modes are Number Entry Alpha Numeric Entry and Setting Selection Refer to the respective entry mode descriptions below During menu navigation press Escape Exit Menu to per form the Exit Menu function this will not cancel any setting changes Number Entry allows you to enter number data using the number pad keys Num ber pad keys include the numbers 0 9 and the decimal point The propor tional control parameter is an example of a parameter that requires number entry During a number entry sequence use the number entry keys to enter the number value press Enter to accept the new data Press Escape once to clear the entry and twice to return to the Menu Navigation mode Alpha Numeric Entry allows you to enter character data using the number pad keys and the A and W keys The input sensor name is an
140. ard appears select No not at this time and click Next Select Install the software automatically recommended and click Next 6 The Found New Hardware wizard should automatically search the CD and install the drivers 7 When the Found New Hardware Wizard finishes installing the drivers a message stating the wizard has finished installing the software for Lake Shore Model 336 Temperature Controller should appear Click Finish to complete the installation un Communicating via the USB interface is done using message strings The message strings should be carefully formulated by the user program according to some simple rules to establish effective message flow control Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 108 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation 6 3 5 Message Flow Control Model 336 Temperature Controller 6 3 4 1 Character Format A character is the smallest piece of information that can be transmitted by the inter face Each character is ten bits long and contains data bits bits for character timing and an error detection bit The instrument uses seven bits for data in the American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII format One start bit and one stop bit are necessary to synchronize consecutive characters Parity is a method of error detection One parity bit configured for odd parity is included in each character ASCII letter and number characters are used most often as character data Punc
141. ary Ramp Rate 0 1 100 K min Control Input fault De Upper boundary Ramp Rate 0 1 100 K min Control Input fault De Upper boundary Ramp Rate 0 1 100 K min Control Input fault De A B C ID OK 5 4 Bipolar Control 5 5 Warm Up Supply 5 5 1 Warm Up Percentage 5 4 BipolarControl 77 The most common type of temperature control output device is a resistive heater which requires only unipolar output since they will add heat regardless of the polar ity of the excitation voltage There are however temperature control devices that are bipolar These devices such as thermoelectric devices can work in both polarities moving heat from one side of the device to the other when a current is applied There fore a surface can be heated or cooled using a bipolar temperature control device For these types of bipolar devices the Model 336 features a bipolar control mode In this mode the Model 336 is configured to drive these devices to control temperature using Output 3 and 4 Refer to section 2 11 for more information about thermoelec tric devices To use Output 3 and 4 for bipolar control first set the Heater Output Type parameter to Voltage then set the polarity to Bipolar The Closed Loop PID control mode can then be used to control a thermoelectric device providing a control output of 10
142. as successfully updated your driver software should appear Click Close to com plete the installation D For Windows XP 1 Connect the USB cable from the Model 336 to the computer 2 Turn on the Model 336 3 The Found New Hardware wizard should appear If the Found New Hardware wizard does not appear the following procedure can be used to open the Hard ware Update wizard which can be used instead a Open Device Manager Use this procedure to open the Device Manager m Right clickon My Computer and then click Properties This will open the System Properties dialog m Clickthe Hardware tab and then click Device Manager b ClickView and ensure the Devices by Type check box is selected 6 3 4 Communication 6 3 4 Communication 107 c Inthe main window of Device Manager locate the Ports COM amp LPT device type In many instances this will be between the Network adapt ers and Processors items If the Ports COM amp LPT item is not already expanded click the icon Lake Shore Model 336 should appear indented underneath Ports COM amp LPT If itis not displayed as Lake Shore Model 336 it might be displayed as USB Device If neither are displayed click Action and then select Scan for hardware changes which may open the Found New Hardware wizard automatically If the Found New Hardware wizard opens continue to step 4 d Right click on Lake Shore Model 336 and click Update Driver 4 Select No not at this tim
143. at Returned Format Remarks Model 336 Temperature Controller Curve Delete Command CRVDEL lt curve gt term nn lt curve gt Specifies a user curve to delete Valid entries 21 59 CRVDEL 21 term deletes User Curve 21 Curve Header Command CRVHDR lt curve gt lt name gt lt SN gt lt format gt lt limit value gt lt coeffi cient gt term nn s 15 s 10 n nnn nnn n lt curve gt Specifies which curve to configure Valid entries 21 59 lt name gt Specifies curve name Limited to 15 characters lt SN gt Specifies the curve serial number Limited to 10 characters format Specifies the curve data format Valid entries 1 mV K 2 V K 3 O K 4 log Q K lt limit value gt Specifies the curve temperature limit in kelvin lt coefficient gt Specifies the curves temperature coefficient Valid entries 1 negative 2 positive Configures the user curve header The coefficient parameter will be calculated auto matically based on the first 2 curve datapoints Itis included as a parameter for com patability with the CRVHDR query CRVHDR 21 DT 470 00011134 2 325 0 1 term configures User Curve 21 with a name of DT 470 serial number of 00011134 data format of volts versus kelvin upper temperature limit of 325 K and negative coefficient Curve Header Query CRVHDR curve term nn curve Valid entries 1 59 lt name gt lt SN gt lt format gt lt limit value gt lt coefficient gt term
144. at will contact the unit Con tact with the operator s hands provides a sufficient ground for tools that are oth erwise electrically isolated m Place ESD sensitive devices and assemblies removed from a unit on a conductive work surface or in a conductive container An operator inserting or removing a device or assembly from a container must maintain contact with a conductive portion of the container Use only plastic bags approved for storage of ESD material m Donothandle ESD sensitive devices unnecessarily or remove them from the packages until they are actually used or tested Follow this procedure to remove the top enclosure To avoid potentially lethal shocks turn off the controller and disconnect it from AC power before performing these procedures The components on this board are electrostatic discharge sensitive ESDS devices Follow ESD procedures in section 8 11 to avoid inducing an electrostatic discharge ESD into the device 1 Turn the Model 336 power switch Off Unplug the power cord from the wall out let then from the instrument 2 Stand the unit on its face Use a 5 64 in hex driver to remove the four screws on both sides of the top cover Loosen the two rear bottom screws FIGURE 8 10 Remove g 59 Remove rear rear plastic 1 bottom bezel cover screw Loosen unshown bottom rear side cover Remove top screws cover screws both sides To remove Remove top top cover oid slide it to the re
145. aterResistanceandPower 21 surface ofthe vacuum shroud on its outer surface so some cooling power must be directed to the shield to keep it nearthe load temperature Ifthe cooling system does not include an integrated radiation shield orone cannot be easily made one alternative is to wrap several layers of super insulation aluminized mylar loosely between the vacuum shroud and load This reduces radiation transfer to the sample space There is a variety of resistive heaters that can be used as the controlled heating source fortemperature control The mostly metal alloys like nichrome are usually wire or foil Shapes and sizes vary to permit installation into different systems Cryogenic cooling systems have a wide range of cooling power The resistive heater must be able to provide sufficient heating power to warm the system The Model 336 can provide up to 100 W of power from Output 1 and up to 50W of power from Output 2 TABLE 2 2 provides the current and voltage limits as well as the resulting maximum power for each output for the 25 Q and 50 Q settings using nominal heater load values 250 setting 25 Q heater 50 0 setting 50 Q heater Current limit 2A 1A Output 1 Voltage limit 50V 50V Max power 100W 50 W Current limit 141A 1A Output 2 Voltage limit 50V 50V Max power 50W 50W TABLE 2 2 Current and voltage limits with resulting max power Even though the Model 336 heater outputs are cu
146. atus bit send the command OPSTE with the sum of the bit weighting for each desired bit Refer to section 6 2 5 2 for a list of operational status bits Operational Status Enable Query OPSTE term lt bit weighting gt term nnn Referto section 6 2 5 2 fora list of operational status bits OPSTR Input Returned Format Remarks OUTMODE Input Format Example Remarks OUTMODE Input Format Returned Format PID Input Format Remarks Example 6 6 1 InterfaceCommands 139 Operational Status Register Query OPSTR term lt bit weighting gt term nnn The integers returned represent the sum of the bit weighting of the operational sta tus bits These status bits are latched when the condition is detected This register is cleared when it is read Refer to section 6 2 5 2 fora list of operational status bits Output Mode Command OUTMODE lt output gt lt mode gt lt input gt lt powerup enable gt term n n n n lt output gt Specifies which output to configure 1 4 lt mode gt Specifies the control mode Valid entries 0 Off 1 Closed Loop PID 2 Zone 3 Open Loop 4 Monitor Out 5 Warmup Supply lt input gt Specifies which input to use for control 0 None 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 Input D2 6 Input D3 7 Input DA 8 Input D5 for 3062 option Specifies whether the output remains on or shuts off after power cycle Valid entries O powerup enable off 1 powerup enable on
147. ava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc of Santa Clara CA LabVIEW is a registered trademark of National Instruments Mac is aregistered trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Microsoft Windows Excel and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Stycast is a trademark of Emerson amp Cuming WinZip is a registered trademark of Nico Mak of Connecticut Copyright 2009 2014 Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc All rights reserved No portion of this manual may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the express written permission of Lake Shore Lake Shore CRVOTBONICS www lakeshore com CE DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc 575 McCorkle Blvd Westerville OH 43082 USA hereby declare that the equipment specified conforms to the following Directives and Standards Application of Council Directives 2006 95 EC LVD 2004 108 EC EMC 2011 65 EU RoHS Standards to which Conformity is declared EN 61010 1 2010 Overvoltage Il Pollution Degree 2 EN 61326 1 2013 Class A Annex B EN 50581 2012 Model NUM BEPera 224 336 Scott Ayer Director of Quality and Compliance Position Model 336 Temperature Controller Electromagnetic Compatibil
148. ay depend on your network config uration contact your network administrator for assistance 6 4 1 1 Network Address Parameters Network address parameters include the IP address the subnet mask and the gate way address The network address parameters of the Model 336 can be configured using one of three methods DHCP Auto IP or Static IP See section 6 4 1 2 for details on each ofthese configuration methods m PAddress an IP address is required for a device to communicate using TCP IP which is the protocol generally used for Ethernet devices and the Model 336 The IP version used by the Model 336 is IPv4 The IPv6 standard is not supported All references to the IP protocol from this point forward will be referring to IPv4 An IP address is a 32 bit logical address used to differentiate devices on a net work It is most often given in dotted decimal notation such as nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn is a decimal number from O to 255 m Subnet Mask a sub network or subnet is a group of devices within a network that have a common designated IP address routing prefix A subnet mask is a 32 bit bit mask that signifies which part ofthe IP address represents the subnet rout ing prefix and which part represents the device s address on the subnet Asubnet mask is most often given in dotted decimal notation such as nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn is a decimal number from 0 to 255 When converted to a binary nota tion the 32 bit subnet mask should
149. ay the control loop information while the new setting is entered Referto section 4 3 for details on configuring the front panel display Menu Navigation I gt 0 to 1000 Default 20 Interface Command PID Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 66 CHAPTER 4 Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller 4 5 1 5 4 Derivative D The derivative parameter sometimes called rate is the D part ofthe PID control equation The derivative time constant should normally be somewhere between 14 and Ys the integral time in seconds if used at all As a convenience to the operator the Model 336 derivative time constant is expressed in percent of 1 4 the integral time The range is between 0 and 200 Start with settings of 0 50 or 100 and determine which setting gives you the type of control you desire Do not be sur prised if the setting you prefer is O Note that by using a percent of integral time derivative scales automatically with changes in the integral value and does not have to be revisited frequently To set D first configure the front panel display to show the desired control loop infor mation then use the D key on the front panel A quick way to accessthe setting ifthe control loop information is not already being displayed is to press A B C or Don the front panel to temporarily display the control loop information while the new setting is entered Refer to the section 4 3 for details on configuring the front pane
150. ble law the terms of this limited warranty statement do not exclude restrict or modify the mandatory statutory rights applicable to the sale of the product to you CERTIFICATION Lake Shore certifies that this product has been inspected and tested in accordance with its published specifications and that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment The accu racy and calibration of this product at the time of shipment are trace able to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST formerly known as the National Bureau of Stan dards NBS FIRMWARE LIMITATIONS Lake Shore has worked to ensure that the Model 336 firmware is as free of errors as possible and that the results you obtain from the instrument are accurate and reliable However as with any com puter based software the possibility of errors exists In any important research as when using any laboratory equipment results should be carefully examined and rechecked before final con clusions are drawn Neither Lake Shore nor anyone else involved in the creation or production of this firmware can pay for loss of time inconvenience loss of use of the product or property damage caused by this product or its failure to work or any other incidental or conse quential damages Use of our product implies that you understand the Lake Shore license agreement and statement of limited warranty FIRMWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT The firmwa
151. change in setpoint actual temperature response P only too high time P only b P only too low PI d P 1 D FIGURE 2 2 Examples of PID control Model 336 Temperature Controller 2 8 Manual Tuning 2 8 1 Setting Heater Range 2 8 2 Tuning Proportional 2 8 1 SettingHeaterRange 27 There has been a lot written about tuning closed loop control systems and specifically PID control loops This section does not attempt to compete with control theory experts It describes a few basic rules ofthumb to help less experienced users get started This technique will not solve every problem but it has worked for many oth ers in the field This section assumes you have worked through the operation sections of this manual have a good temperature reading from the sensor chosen as a control sensor and are operating Loop 1 Itis also a good idea to begin at the center of the temperature range ofthe cooling system not close to its highest or lowest tempera ture Autotune section 2 9 is another good place to begin and do not forget the power of trial and error Setting an appropriate heater output range is an important first part of the tuning process The heater range should allow enough heater power to comfortably over come the cooling power of the cooling system If the heater range will not provide enough power the load will not be able to reach the setpoint temperature Con versely if the range is set too high the l
152. cking another Loop radio button The utilities panel can be collapsed to increase the size ofthe chart To collapse the utilities panel click Collapse Utilities Panel 10 When collapsed the same button becomes an Expand Utilities Panel button that can be used to restore the utilities panel on the form 6 5 4 5 Menu The standard dropdown menu includes the following sections File 1 m Interface Configuration can be used to configure the remote interface connec tion to the instrument m Exit closes the Chart Recorder application Log Chart 2 m Configure Log Chart simply expands the configuration panel if collapsed m Hide Legend hides the legend in the chart to expand the data plot Help 3 m Getting Started launches a web page with basic chart recorder instructions m About provides information about the application including the software revi sion level 6 5 4 6 Information The information panel consists of the following two bits of information m Datapoint 4 the current datapoint number If logging data this also shows the total number of data points to be taken in the current data acquisition i e 522 of 1000 m Log File 5 the file path of the file that is currently being used to log data 6 6 Command Summary Command name Form ofthe command input Syntax of user parameter input see key below Definition of first parameter Definition of second parameter 6 6 CommandSummary 123
153. configured for Open Loop mode the Manual Output setting is available in the Output Setup menu This is because in the Open Loop mode no Con trol Input feedback sensor is required and if none is set then there would be no way to use the Manual Output front panel key to set the output unless using the Custom Display mode The Control Input parameter can be assigned to a sensor input that is not being used for control as a means of quickly accessing the Manual Output setting using the Manual Output front panel key Menu Navigation Manual Output gt 0 to 100 Default 0 Interface Command MOUT 4 5 1 HeaterOutputs 67 4 5 1 5 6 Setpoint Use the Setpoint parameter to set the desired load temperature for a control loop Before entering a setpoint a control loop must be created by configuring an input sensor and assigning it to a control output using the Control Input parameter The Setpoint can be entered in either temperature units or sensor units based on the sen sor input s Preferred Units setting The Setpoint Ramping feature is available when controlling in temperature units to provide smooth continuous control from one temperature to the next Refer to section 4 4 for details on Input Setup Refer to sec tion 4 5 1 5 1 for details on assigning a Control Input Refer to section 4 5 1 5 7 for details on the Setpoint Ramping feature Most applications require control in units of temperature To control in units of tem perature se
154. consider when generating thermocouple curves m You may enter temperature response curves for all types of thermocouples Enter curve data in mV K format with thermocouple voltage in millivolts and tempera ture in kelvin m The curve must be normalized to O mV at 273 15 K 0 C Thermocouple voltages in millivolts are positive when temperature is above 273 15 K and negative when temperature is below that point m Toconvertcurves published in Celsius to kelvin add 273 15 to the temperature in Celsius m Theinputvoltage ofthe Model 336 is limited to 50 mV so any part of the curve that extends beyond 50 mV is not usable by the instrument m A message of S OVER or S NDER on the display indicates that the measured ther mocouple input is over or under the 50 mV range 5 9 2 View Curve 5 9 3 Erase Curve 5 9 4 Copy Curve 5 9 2 ViewCurve 87 The View Curve operation provides read only access to all standard and user curves To perform the View Curve operation follow this procedure 1 PressCurve Entry scroll to View Curve then press Enter 2 Scrollto the desired curve and press Enter again to view the curve header infor mation 3 Toview the curve breakpoints highlight the Curve Points parameter and press Enter The list of breakpoint pairs is scrollable but data cannot be edited 4 Press Escape Exit Menu to return to the curve header parameter list 5 Press Escape Exit Menu again to exit the Curve Entry menu and
155. couple Curve Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 178 Appendices 1 3 15 56 84 00 111 6 257510 5 424100 0 623032 289 00 2 6 257060 3 56 57 5 380600 86 50 112 0 843856 294 50 3 6 256520 4 00 58 5 336260 89 00 113 1 067190 300 00 4 6 255810 4 50 59 5 291080 91 50 114 1 293090 305 50 5 6 254950 5 04 60 5 245070 94 00 115 1 521570 311 00 6 6 253920 5 62 61 5 188800 97 00 116 1 752660 316 50 7 6 252780 6 20 62 5 131290 100 00 117 1 986340 322 00 8 6 251380 6 85 63 5 072630 103 00 118 2 222600 327 50 9 6 249730 7 55 64 5 012780 106 00 119 2 461410 333 00 10 6 247810 8 30 65 4 951770 109 00 120 2 702740 338 50 11 6 245590 9 10 66 4 889610 112 00 121 2 946550 344 00 12 6 243040 9 95 67 4 826300 115 00 122 3 192800 349 50 13 6 240300 10 80 68 4 761840 118 00 123 3 441440 355 00 14 6 237210 11 70 69 4 696250 121 00 124 3 715300 361 00 15 6 233710 12 65 70 4 629530 124 00 125 3 991980 367 00 16 6 229800 13 65 71 4 561670 127 00 126 4 271300 373 00 17 6 225630 14 65 72 4 492700 130 00 127 4 553250 379 00 18 6 221000 15 70 73 4 422610 133 00 128 4 837770 385 00 19 6 215860 16 80 74 4 351390 136 00 129 5 148790 391 50 20 6 210430 17 90 75 4 266950 139 50 130 5 462770 398 00 21 6 204430 19 05 76 4 180930 143 00 131 5 779560 404 50 22 6 198680 20 1
156. ct from the world leader in cryogenic thermome try The Model 336 is the only temperature controller available with four sensor inputs four control outputs and 150 W of low noise heater power Two independent heater outputs providing 100 W and 50 W can be associated with any of the four sen sor inputs and programmed for closed loop temperature control in proportional inte gral derivative PID mode The improved autotuning feature of the Model 336 canbe used to automatically collect PID parameters so you spend less time tuning your con troller and more time conducting experiments The Model 336 supports the industry s most advanced line of cryogenic temperature sensors as manufactured by Lake Shore including diodes resistance temperature detectors RTDs and thermocouples The controller s zone tuning feature allows you to measure and control temperatures seamlessly from 300 mK to over 1 500 K by automatically switching temperature sensor inputs when your temperature range goes beyond the usable range of a given sensor You ll never again have to be con cerned with temperature sensor over or under errors and measurement continuity issues Alarms relays and 10 V analog voltage outputs are available to help auto mate secondary control functions Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 2 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1 1 1 Sensor Inputs 1 1 2 Temperature Control Model 336 Temperature Controller Another innovative first f
157. ction 8 5 for instructions on changing the line voltage configuration 3 4 2 Line Fuse and The line fuse is an important safety feature of the Model 336 If a fuse ever fails it is Fuse Holder important to replace it with the value and type indicated on the rear panel forthe line voltage setting The letter T on the fuse rating indicates that the instrument requires a time delay or slow blow fuse Fuse values should be verified any time line voltage configuration is changed Refer to section 8 6 for instructions for changing and verify ing a line fuse Model 336 Temperature Controller 3 4 3 Power Cord INTI e 3 4 4 Power Switch 3 5 Diode Resistor Sensor Inputs 3 5 1 Sensor Input Connector and Pinout 3 4 3 PowerCord 33 The Model 336 includes a 3 conductor power cord that mates with the IEC 320 C14 line cord receptacle Line voltage is present on the two outside conductors and the center conductor is a safety ground The safety ground attaches to the instrument chassis and protects the user in case of a component failure ACE approved power cord is included with instruments shipped to Europe a domestic power cord is included with all other instruments unless otherwise specified when ordered Always plug the power cord into a properly grounded receptacle to ensure safe instru ment operation The delicate nature of measurements being taken with this instrument may necessi tate additional grounding including ground strapping of
158. d the summary bit s corresponding enable bit in the Service Request Enable Register are set Once set the user may read and clear the bit in two different ways which is why it is referred to as both the RQS and the MSS bit When this bit goes from low to high the Service Request hardware line on the bus is set this is the RQS function of the bit section 6 2 6 3 In addition the status of the bit may be read with the STB query which returns the binary weighted sum of all bits in the Status Byte this is the MSS function of the bit Performing a serial poll will automatically clear the RQS function but it will not clear the MSS function A STB will read the status of the MSS bit along with all of the summary bits but also will not clear it To clear the MSS bit either clear the event register that set the summary bit or disable the summary bit in the Service Request Enable Register m Event Summary ESB Bit 5 this bit is set when an enabled standard event has occurred m Message Available MAV Bit 4 this bit is set when a message is available in the output buffer Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 102 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller 6 2 6 2 Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register is programmed by the user and determines which summary bits of the Status Byte may set bit 6 RQS MSS to generate a Service Request Enable bits are logic
159. d with the calibrated sensor the curve is also generated at the factory and can be entered like any other curve Lake Shore silicon diode sensors incorporate remarkably uniform sensing elements that exhibit precise monotonic and repeatable temperature response For example the Lake Shore DT 400 Series of silicon diode sensors have a repeatable temperature response from 2 K to 475 K These sensors closely follow a standard curve SoftCal is an inexpensive way to improve the accuracy of an already predictable sensor A unique characteristic of DT 400 Series diodes is that their temperature responses pass through 28 K at almost exactly the same voltage This improves SoftCal algo rithm operation by providing an extra calibration data point It also explains why SoftCal calibration specifications are divided into two temperature ranges above and below 28 K See FIGURE 5 8 m Point 1 calibration data point at or near the boiling point of helium 4 2 K Accept able temperature entries are 2 K to 10 K This data point improves between the calibration data point and 28 K Points 2 and 3 improve temperatures above 28 K m Point 2 calibration data point at or near the boiling point of nitrogen 77 35 K Temperatures outside 50 K to 100 K are not allowed This data point improves accuracy between 28 K and 100 K Points 2 and 3 together improve accuracy to room temperature and above m Point 3 calibration data point near room temperature 30
160. dd dd dd dd dd s 15 s 64 s 32 lt DHCP gt O DHCP off 1 DHCP on AUTO IP 0 Dynamically configured link local addressing Auto IP off 1 2 On IP IP address for static configuration Sub Mask gt Subnet mask for static configuration Gateway Gateway address for static configuration Pri DNS gt Primary DNS address for static configuration Sec DNS gt Secondary DNS address for static configuration Pref Host Preferred Hostname 15 character maximum Pref Domain Preferred Domain name 64 character maximum Description Instrument description 32 character maximum Network Settings Query NET term lt DHCP gt lt AUTO IP gt lt IP gt lt Sub Mask gt lt Gateway gt lt Pri DNS gt lt Sec DNS gt lt Pref Host gt lt Pref Domain gt lt Description gt term n n dd dd dd dd dd s 15 s 64 s 32 refer to command for description Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 138 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation NETID Input Returned Format Remarks OPST Input Returned Format Remarks OPSTE Input Format Remarks OPSTE Input Returned Format Model 336 Temperature Controller Network Configuration Query NETID term lan status gt lt IP gt lt sub mask gt lt gateway gt lt pri DNS gt lt sec DNS gt lt mac addr gt lt actual host name gt lt actual domain gt term n dd dd dd dd dd hh hh hh hh hh hh s 15 s 32 lt lan status gt Current
161. del 336 TABLE 7 3 Model description Accessories are devices that perform a secondary duty as an aid or refinement to the primary unit Refer to the Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog for details A list of accessories available for the Model 336 is as follows Description of Accessories 106 009 Heater Output Connector Dual banana jack for heater output G 106 233 Sensor Input Mating Connector 6 pin DIN plug for diode resistor input 4 included G 106 755 T Terminal Block Mating Connector 10 pin terminal block for relays and Outputs 3 and 4 115 006 T Detachable 120 VAC Line Cord MAN 336 1T Model 336 Temperature Controller User s Manual Sensor Heater Cable Assembly 10 Feet Cable assembly for 2 diode resistor sensors and G 112 325 1 heater output Approximately 3 m 10 ft long Requires 2 to use 4 sensors and 2 heaters Refer to FIGURE 7 1 Sensor Heater Cable Assembly 20 Feet Cable assembly for 2 diode resistor sensors and 1 G 112 326 heater output Approximately 6 m 20 ft long Requires 2 to use 4 sensors and 2 heaters Refer to FIGURE 7 1 6201 IEEE 488 Cable 1 m 3 ft long IEEE 488 computer interface cable CAL 336 CERT Instrument recalibration with certificate CAL 336 DATA Instrument recalibration with certificate and data TABLE 7 4 Accessories Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 148 CHAPTER 7 Options and Accessories ES 2 20
162. e choose a sensor that has good sensitivity in the most criticaltemperature range as sensitivity can minimize the effect of most error sources Install the sensor properly following guidelines in section 2 4 Calibrate the sensor and instrument periodically or in some other way null the time dependent errors Use a sensor calibration that is appropriate for the accuracy requirement There are different packages for the various types of sensors Some types of sensors can even be purchased as bare chips without any package A sensor package generally determines its size thermal and electrical contact to the outside and sometimes lim its temperature range When different packages are available for a sensor you should consider the mounting surface for the sensor and how the leads will be thermally anchored when choosing It can sometimes be confusing to choose the right sensor get it calibrated translate the calibration data into a temperature response curve that the Model 336 can understand and then load the curve into the instrument Lake Shore provides a vari ety of calibration services to fit different accuracy requirements and budgets Best Precision calibration All sensors can be calibrated over various temperature ranges Lake Shore has defined calibration ranges available for each sensortype Better SoftCal An abbreviated calibration 2 point 77 K and 305 K 3 point 4 2 K 77 K and 305 K or 3 point 77 K 305 K and 480 K
163. e Warranty Period and the defective Product is shipped freight prepaid back to Lake Shore Lake Shore will at its option either repair or replace the Product if it is so defective with out charge for parts service labor or associated customary return shipping cost to the Purchaser Replacement for the Product may be by either new or equivalent in performance to new Replacement or repaired parts or a replaced Product will be warranted for only the unexpired portion of the original warranty or 90 days whichever is greater 2 Lake Shore warrants the Product only if the Product has been sold by an authorized Lake Shore employee sales representative dealer or an authorized Lake Shore original equipment manufacturer OEM 3 The Product may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use when it is originally sold to the Purchaser 4 The Warranty Period begins on the date of Purchaser s physical receipt of the Product or later on the date of operational training and verification OT amp V of the Product if the service is performed by Lake Shore provided that if the Purchaser schedules or delays the Lake Shore OT amp V for more than 30 days after delivery then the Warranty Period begins on the 31st day after Purchaser s physical receipt of the Product 5 This limited warranty does not apply to defects in the Product resulting from a improper or inadequate installation unless OT
164. e and click Next 5 Select Search for the best driver in these locations click to clear the Search removable media floppy CD ROM check box and click the Include this loca tion in the search check box 6 Click Browse and open the location of the extracted driver Click Next 8 When the driver finishes installing a confirmation message stating The wizard has finished installing the software for Lake Shore Model 336 Temperature Con troller should appear Click Finish to complete the installation N 6 3 3 4 Installing the USB Driver from the Included CD The Model 336 USB driver is available on the included CD The following section describes the process of installing the driver from the CD To install the driver you must be logged into a user account that has administrator privileges For Windows 7 and Vista 1 Insert the CD into the computer 2 Follow steps 1 9 of the Windows 7 and Vista procedure in section 6 3 3 3 3 3 Click Browse and select the drive containing the included CD 4 Ensure the Include subfolders check box is selected and click Next 5 When the driver finishes installing a confirmation message stating Windows has successfully updated your driver software should appear Click Close to com plete the installation For Windows XP 1 Insert the CD into the computer 2 Connect the USB cable from the Model 336 to the computer 3 Turnonthe Model 336 4 When the Found New Hardware wiz
165. e and password for the website orto remove password protection from the website The username and password parame ters are available for viewing and editing from the front panel under the Modify IP Config submenu of the Interface menu Password protection only protects access to the embedded web pages and does not pro vide any kind of security for TCP Socket access section 6 4 3 The website username and password are available from the front panel menu and there fore can easily be obtained by anyone with access to the Model 336 front panel Contact Us provides information regarding how to contact representatives of Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc The utilities embedded on the Model 336 are written using the Java programming language This theoretically allows the applications to run properly on many different platforms Windows Mac Linux etc although the applications are only sup ported on Microsoft Windows XP or Windows 7 and Vista and have been designed to work with the Java Runtime Environment JRE version 1 6 To download Java JRE please visit www java com Please note that without the proper JRE installed the utilities will not run properly The applications are launched from the Utilities web page using Java Web Start technology This allows the application to run outside ofthe web browser in a stand alone window The application can only be launched using the link in the embedded web page and cannot be p
166. e points and graph will be displayed Once a curve is loaded into the Embedded Curve Handler using either the Read from File or Read from Instrument buttons the loaded curve can be stored either toa user curve location 21 to 59 in the Model 336 orto a file Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 118 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation 6 5 2 Ethernet Firmware Updater Model 336 Temperature Controller To store the curve to a usercurve location in the Model 336 click Write to Instru ment The Write Curve to Instrument dialog box appears Select a user curve location to write the loaded temperature curve to and click OK To write the currently loaded curve to a file click Write to File A Save Browser dialog box appears First use the Files of Type drop down box to select the file format in which to save the curve Then choose a directory and a file name and click Save The 340 file format is an ASCII text file which can be read and altered using a stan dard ASCII text editor Care must be taken when altering the 340 text files to ensure that all of the values are stored in the same position in the file as the original values using the same number of digits To alter curve files it is recommended to use the XLS file format which can be altered using Microsoft Excel If using formulas to alter curves you must copy the results of the formulas and paste them back into the origi nal cells of the breakpoint values T
167. e status system is made up of status register sets the Status Byte register and the Service Request Enable register Each register set consists ofthree types of registers condition event and enable 6 2 4 1 Condition Registers Each register set except the Standard Event Register set includes a condition regis ter asshown in FIGURE 6 1 The condition register constantly monitors the instru ment status The data bits are real time and are not latched or buffered The register is read only 6 2 4 2 Event Registers Each register set includes an event register as shown in FIGURE 6 1 Bits in the event register correspond to various system events and latch when the event occurs When an event bit is set subsequent events corresponding to that bit are ignored Set bits remain latched until the register is cleared by a query command such as ESR ora CLS command The register is read only 6 2 4 3 Enable Registers Each register set includes an enable register as shown in FIGURE 6 1 An enable regis ter determines which bits in the corresponding event register will set the summary bit for the register set in the Status Byte You may write to or read from an enable reg ister Each event register bit is logically ANDed to the corresponding enable bit of the enable register When you set an enable register bit and the corresponding bit is set in the event register the output summary of the register will be set which in turn sets the su
168. e ventilation and eye and skin protection Although helium and nitrogen gases are non toxic they are dangerous in that they replace the air in a normal breathing atmosphere Liquid products are of an even greater threat since a small amount of liquid evaporates to create a large amount of gas Therefore it is impera tive that cryogenic Dewars be stored and the MTD system be operated in open and well ventilated areas Persons transferring LHe and LN should make every effort to protect eyes and skin from accidental contact with liquid or the cold gas issuing from it Protect your eyes with full face shield or chemical splash goggles Safety glasses even with side shields are not adequate Always wear special cryogenic gloves Tempshield Cryo Gloves or equivalent when handling anything that is or may have been in contact with the liquid or cold gas or with cold pipes or equipment Long sleeve shirts and cuffless trousers that are of sufficient length to prevent liquid from entering the shoes are recommended Every site that stores and uses LHe and LN2 should have an appropriate Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS present The MSDS may be obtained from the manufac turer distributor The MSDS will specify the symptoms of overexposure and the first aid to be used A typical summary of these instructions is provided as follows If symptoms of asphyxia such as headache drowsiness dizziness excitation excess salivation vomiting or unconscious
169. ears and handles to attach 1 Model 336 to a 482 6 mm 19 in rack mount cabinet See FIGURE 7 2 VGE 7031 IMI 7031 Varnish formerly GE 7031 Varnish 1 pint can IMI 7031 Insulating Varnish and Adhesive possesses electrical and bonding properties which when combined with its chemical resistance and good saturating properties make it an excellent material for cryogenic tem peratures As an adhesive IMI 7031 bonds a variety of materials has fast tack time and may be air dried or baked It is also an electrically insulating adhesive at cryogenic temperatures and is often used as a calorimeter cement When soaked into cigarette paper it makes a good high thermal conductivity low electrical conductivity heat sinking layer Maximum operating temperature 423 K 150 C Wire Lake Shore Cryogenic Wire Lake Shore sells the following types of cryogenic wire DT Duo Twist MN Single Strand MW Manganin NC Nichrome Heater ND Heavy Duty QL Quad Lead and QT Quad Twist Lake Shore Coaxial Cable Lake Shore sells the following types of coaxial cable CC Ultra Miniature Coaxial Cable SR Semi Rigid Coaxial Cable CRYC CryoCable Accessories included with a new Model 336 RoHS compliant Model 336 Temperature Controller TABLE 7 4 Accessories 7 5 Rack Mounting 7 6 Input Option Card Installation 7 5 RackMounting 149 BLK GREEN s um di FIGURE 7 1 Model 336 sensor and heater c
170. eased packaging density and thinner dielectrics between active elements which results in electronic devices with even more ESD sensitivity Some electronic parts are more ESD sensitve than others ESD levels of only a few hundred volts may damage electronic components such as semiconductors thick and thin film resistors and piezoelectric crystals during testing handling repair or assembly Discharge voltages below 4000 V cannot be seen felt or heard The following are various industry symbols used to label components as ESD sensitive o A CAUTION SOS ss Ea FIGURE 8 9 Symbols indicating ESD sensitivity Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 162 CHAPTER 8 Service 8 11 2 Handling Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Components 8 12 Enclosure Top Remove and Replace Procedure NINA CAUTION Model 336 Temperature Controller Observe all precautions necessary to prevent damage to ESDS components before attempting installation Bring the device and everything that contacts it to ground potential by providing a conductive surface and discharge paths As a minimum observe these precautions m De energize or disconnect all power and signal sources and loads used with unit m Place the unit on a grounded conductive work surface m Thetechnician should be grounded through a conductive wrist strap or other device using 1 M series resistor to protect operator m Ground any tools such as soldering equipment th
171. ece cece eee 115 6 4 4 2 Web Pages coca ye elia 115 Ud lac 117 6 5 1 Embedded Curve Handler M cece cece cece eee ARN 117 6 5 2 Ethernet Firmware Updater ccc cece cece cece eee 118 6 5 3 Instrument Configuration Backup Utility 0 eee eee 119 6 5 4 Embedded Chart Recorder cece ence e e 120 6 5 4 1 Configuration Panel sess 120 6 5 4 2 Starting Data Acquisition 121 6 5 4 3 Chart Functionality esses 121 6 5 4 4 Utilities Panel coco er here ee Y dg Ya 121 6 540 MENU sea soe te ee ate de ber 122 6 5 4 6 OM ON rinitis 122 COMMUNES 123 6 6 1 Interface CommandSs rc narrar 125 A tn 147 Model rc lai 147 OPHONS rar dalia a 147 ACCESSOPIES is iaa e RARA 147 RackMOUTEIIE scri ARIA Cerro EE Fee xe RE E Rini 149 Input Option Card Installation e 149 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS Chapter 8 Service Appendix A Temperature Scales Appendix B Handling Liquid Helium and Nitrogen Appendix C Curve Tables Model 336 Temperature Controller A PET 153 8 2 USB Troubleshooting viii saa se AEN e e v andes 153 8 2 1 New InstallatiOn cote tpesr tr aaa 153 8 2 2 Existing Installation No Longer Working css 153 8 2 3 Intermittent LOCKUDS 2 eese cR soni 153 8 3 IEEE Interface Troubleshooting cece cece eee eee e isise KERA eee enna 154 8 3 1 New Installation 0c ccc cece rr 154 8 3 2 Existing Instal
172. ecifies input to query A D D1 D5 for 3062 option Interface Select Command INTSEL lt interface gt term n lt interface gt Specifies the remote interface to enable 0 USB 1 Ethernet 2 IEEE 488 The Ethernet interface will attempt to configure itself based on the current configu ration parameters which can be set using the NET command Configuring the Ether net interface parameters prior to enabling the interface is recommended Interface Select Query INTSEL term lt interface gt term n refer to command for description INTYPE Input Format Example Remarks INTYPE Input Format Returned Format Remarks 6 6 1 InterfaceCommands 135 Input Type Parameter Command INTYPE lt input gt lt sensor type gt lt autorange gt lt range gt lt compensa tion gt lt units gt term a n n n n N lt input gt Specifies input to configure A D D1 D5 for 3062 option lt sensortype gt Specifies input sensor type O Disabled 1 Diode 3062 option only 2 Platinum RTD 3 NTC RTD 4 Thermocouple 3060 option only 5 Capacitance 3061 option only lt autorange gt Specifies autoranging O off and 1 on lt range gt Specifies input range when autorange is off Diode 3062 0 2 5V optiononly 1 310V PTC RTD 0 100 1 300 2 100Q0 3 3000 4 1kQ 5 3kQ 6 10k0 NTC RTD 0 100 1 300 2 100 323000 4 1k0 5 3kQ 6 10k0 7 30kQ 8 100kK0 Thermoco
173. ed IP address to communicate with the web server that hosts the website at www lakeshore com Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 112 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller The Model 336 can be configured to communicate with a primary and a secondary DNS server using the Primary DNS Address and the Secondary DNS Address parame ters Multiple DNS servers are sometimes used for redundancy but multiple servers are not required and not all networks provide a DNS server DNS addresses can be configured automatically using the DHCP method ifthe network DHCP server is con figured to do so Your DHCP server must be configured appropriately to provide DNS server addresses Not all DHCP servers provide this functionality on your network Hostname A hostname is a name that is assigned to a device on a network On a Domain Name System DNS enabled network a hostname can be used alone when connecting from another device on the same domain or it can be combined with a domain name to connect to devices outside ofthe local domain For example www lakeshore com refers to the Lake Shore web server on the Internet which is a DNS enabled network The web server hostname is www and it resides on the domain lakeshore com To connect to the web server from another device on the lakeshore com domain only the hostname www must be used To connect from any other domain on the Internet the enti
174. ee FIGURE 2 2 d An integral setting that is too low causes the load to take too long to reach the setpoint An integral setting that is too high creates instability and can cause the load temperature to oscillate 1 Begin this part of the tuning process with the system controlling in proportional only mode 2 Use the oscillation period of the load that was measured in section 2 8 2 in sec onds Divide 1000 by the oscillation period to get the integral setting 3 Enterthe integral setting into the Model 336 and watch the load temperature approach the setpoint 4 Adjust the integral setting if necessary a Ifthe temperature does not stabilize and begins to oscillate around the setpoint the integral setting is too high and should be reduced by one half b Ifthe temperature is stable but never reaches the setpoint the integral setting is too low and should be doubled 5 Verify the integral setting by making a few small 2 K to 5 K changes in setpoint and watch the load temperature react Trial and error can help improve the integral setting by optimizing for experimental needs Faster integrals for example get to the setpoint more quickly at the expense of greater overshoot In most systems setpoint changes that raise the temperature act differently than changes that lower the temperature If it was not possible to measure the oscillation period of the load during proportional setting start with an integral setting of 20 If
175. em TABLE 1 5 Capacitance option input specifications 1 3 2 Sensor Input Configuration Measurement type Diode RTD Thermocouple 2 lead differential room 4 lead differential temperature compensated Excitation Constant current with current reversal for RTDs NA Supported sensors Carbon Glass Cernox and Rox RTDs 100 Q Platinum option 1000 Plat Diodes Silicon GaAlAs y 1 Most thermocouple types inum Germanium pe typ Standard curves DT 470 DT 670 DT 500 D DT 500 E1 PT 100 PT 1000 RX 102A RX 202A Type E Type K Type T AuFe 0 07 vs Cr AuFe 0 03 vs CR Input connector Screw terminals in a ceramic 6 PiniDIN isothermal block TABLE 1 6 Sensor input configuration 1 3 3 Thermometry Number of inputs Input configuration Supported option cards Option slots Isolation AID resolution Input accuracy Measurement resolution Maximum update rate Maximum update rate scanner Autorange User curves Softcal Math Filter Model 336 Temperature Controller 4 8 with Model 3062 Inputs can be configured from the front panel to accept any of the supported input types Thermocouple and capacitance inputs require an optional input card that can be installed in the field Thermocouple 3060 capacitance 3061 or scanner 3062 1 Sensor inputs optically isolated from other circuits but not each other 24 bit Sensor dependent refer to Input S
176. eneral installation instructions for the Model 336 tempera ture controller Please read this entire chapter before installing the instrument and powering it on to ensure the best possible performance and maintain operator safety For instrument operating instructions referto Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 For computer interface installation and operation refer to Chapter 6 Inspect shipping containers for external damage before opening them Photograph any container that has significant damage before opening it Inspect all items for both visible and hidden damage that occurred during shipment If there is visible damage to the contents of the container contact the shipping company and Lake Shore immediately preferably within five days of receipt of goods for instruc tions on how to file a proper insurance claim Lake Shore products are insured against damage during shipment but a timely claim must be filed before Lake Shore will take further action Procedures vary slightly with shipping companies Keep all damaged shipping materials and contents until instructed to either return or discard them Open the shipping container and keep the container and shipping materials until all contents have been accounted for Check off each item on the packing list as it is unpacked Instruments themselves may be shipped as several parts The items included with the Model 336 are listed below Contact Lake Shore immediately if there is a shortage of parts or accesso
177. ent 10 pA Range gt 2 5 V Silicon Interface Command INTYPE DIOCUR PTC resistor sensors include the platinum and rhodium iron sensors detailed in TABLE 4 7 More detailed specifications are provided in TABLE 1 2 The Model 336 supplies a 1 mA excitation current for the PTC resistor sensor type A resistance range selection is available in order to achieve better reading resolution Autorange is enabled by default in order to provide the best possible reading resolution but does not affect the sensor current excitation Refer to section 4 4 4 for details on manually selecting the range Current Reversal is also enabled by default in order to compen sate for thermal EMF voltages Refer to section 4 4 5 for details on the Thermal EMF Compensation Current Reversal feature Menu Navigation Input Setup gt nput A B C or D gt Sensor Type gt PTC RTD Platinum Interface Command INTYPE NTC resistor sensors include Cernox Rox Thermox and others detailed in TABLE 4 7 More detailed specifications are provided in TABLE 1 2 The excitation current for the NTC RTD sensor type can vary between 100 nA and 1 mA depending on resistance range When autoranging is enabled the range will be automatically selected so that the excitation voltage is below 10 mV This keeps the power dissipated in the sensor at a minimum yet still enough to provide accurate measurements Current Reversal is also enabled by default in order to compensate for thermal E
178. ents like the Model 336 are not able to read some sensors over their entire temperature range Lake Shore sells calibrated sensors that operate down to 20 millikelvin mK but the Model 336 is limited to above 300 mK in its standard configuration Temperature sensor sensitivity is a measure of how much a sensor signal changes when the temperature changes It is an important sensor characteristic because so many measurement parameters are related to it Resolution accuracy noise floor and even control stability depend on sensitivity Many sensors have different sensitiv ities at different temperatures For example a platinum sensor has good sensitivity at higher temperatures but it has limited use below 30 K because its sensitivity drops sharply It is difficult to determine if a sensor has adequate sensitivity over the experi mental temperature range This manual has specifications section 1 3 that include sensor sensitivity translated into temperature resolution and accuracy at different points This is typical sensor response and can be used as a guide when choosing a sensor to be used with the Model 336 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 16 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 2 3 Environmental Conditions 2 2 4 Measurement Accuracy 2 2 5 Sensor Package 2 3 Sensor Calibrations Model 336 Temperature Controller The experimental environment is also important when choosing a sensor Environ
179. er boundary gt lt P value l value gt lt D value gt lt mout value gt lt range gt lt input gt lt rate gt term nnnnn nnnnn nnnnn nnnn nnnnn n n nnnn referto command for description Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 146 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller 7 1 General 7 2 Models 7 3 Options 7 4 Accessories 7 1 General 147 E Chapter 7 Options and Accessories This chapter provides information on the models options and accessories available for the Model 336 temperature controller The list of Model 336 model numbers is provided as follows BEEN Description of Models 336 Standard temperature controller 4 diode RTD inputs and 4 control outputs TABLE 7 1 Model description Power configurations the instrument is configured at the factory for customer selected power as follows 100 V US NEMA 5 15 120 V US NEMA 5 15 220 V EU CEE 717 240 V EU CEE 717 240 V UK BS 1363 240 V Swiss SEV 1011 220 V China GB 1002 TABLE 7 2 Power configurations NO Uc buy Nr The list of Model 336 options is provided as follows Description of Options 3060 Dual Thermocouple Input Option Card Adds 2 thermocouple inputs to the Model 336 3061 Capacitance Input Option Card Adds one capacitive sensor input to the Model 336 3062 Diode RTD Expansion Input Option Card Adds 4 scanner diode RTD inputs to the Mo
180. er to Off then use the Range parameter to select the desired range Menu Navigation Input Setup Input D2 D3 D4 or DS Autorange gt Off or On Input Setup Input D2 D3 D4 or D5 gt Range gt See TABLE 4 9 Default On Interface Command INTYPE 4 4 9 Curve Selection 4 4 9 CurveSelection 57 NEEDS Sensor Type Range Maximum Sensor Power Settings Sensor Excitation E 2 5 V Silicon 25 pW at 10 pA excitation 10 pA 1mA 10 V GaAIAs 100 pW at 10 p excitation 10 pA 1mA 100 10uW 300 30uW 100 Q 100 pW Mrs 300 Q 300 pW 1mA 1k0 1mW 3kQ 3mW 10kQ 10mW 100 10 pW 1mA 300 2 7 uW 300 pA 1000 1uW 100 pA 3000 270nW 30 pA MICRO 1k0 100nW 10 pA Cernox 3kQ 27nW 3 pA 10kQ 10nW 1pA 30kQ 2 7 nW 300 nA 100 kQ 1nW 100 nA TABLE 4 9 Model 3062 4 channel scanner option range and sensor power 4 4 8 2 Update Rate The update rate for the scanned input channels is dependent on the number of chan nels enabled and how many enabled channels are configured for 100 kO NTC RTD The scanned input channels are scanned at a rate of 10 rdg s 100 ms rdg with the exception of any channel that is configured for 100 kO NTC RTD Channels configured for 100 KO NTC RTD are scanned at a rate of 5 rdg s 200 ms rdg when other channels are enabled or if it is reversing See TABLE 4 10 Number of scanner channels enabled Updstevare 1 10 rdg s 10
181. erface is active and to configure the parameters related to the selected interface Menu Navigation Interface Enabled USB Ethernet IEEE 488 Default USB The USB interface is provided as a convenient way to connect to most modern com puters as a USB interface is provided on nearly all new PCs as of the writing of this manual The Model 336 USB driver which must be installed before using the inter face section 6 3 3 creates a virtual serial com port which can be used in the same way as a traditional serial com port Refer to Chapter 6 for details on computer inter face operation Menu Navigation Interface gt Enabled USB 4 6 2 Ethernet 4 6 3 IEEE 488 4 7 Locking and Unlocking the Keypad 4 6 2 Ethernet 71 The Ethernet interface is provided to allow the Model 336 to connect to a computer network A direct connection to a PC can also be achieved using a cross over Ethernet cable The advantages of using the Ethernet interface include the ability to communi cate directly with the Model 336 from any PCon the same local network and even from around the world via the internet Refer to section 6 4 1 for details on Ethernet configuration Menu Navigation Interface gt Enabled gt Ethernet An IEEE 488 GPIB interface is provided for compatibility with legacy systems Refer to Chapter 6 for details on computer interface operation Menu Navigation Interface gt Enabled gt IEEE 488 4 6 3 1 Remote Local Local
182. ermanently installed When launching the application multiple security warning messages may appear These messages are meant to pro tect youfrom malicious software that can cause harm to or compromise the security of your computer or your data The applications have been thoroughly tested and are considered by Lake Shore to be safe All software is imperfect and any software may be used by a malicious user for malicious purposes The Embedded Curve Handler utility is provided for uploading temperature curve files to the Model 336 The utility is also capable of reading curves from the Model 336 and writing them to a file for storage or manipulation in a third party pro gram The Embedded Curve Handler supports standard Lake Shore temperature curve files in the 340 file format and the Microsoft Excel XLS Excel 97 2003 file format Curve files are provided with calibrated sensors purchased from Lake Shore in the 340 file format To read a temperature curve from a file click Read from File Select a properly format ted temperature curve 340 or XLS file using the Open Browser dialog box The curve will be loaded into the program and the curve points and graph will be dis played To read a temperature curve from the Model 336 click Read from Instrument The Read Curve from Instrument dialog box appears Select a curve from the drop down box and click OK The curve will be loaded into the program and the curv
183. ermine the amount of voltage to apply to the unpowered output 3 or 4 when using Warm Up mode to control an external power supply The voltage applied will be the full scale output 10 V times the Warm Up Percentage For example if the Warm Up Percentage is set to 50 the control output voltage for the given unpowered output will be 50 of 10 V or 5 V when the output is on Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 3 or 4 gt Warm Up Percentage gt 0 to 100 Default 100 Interface Command WARMUP Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 78 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation 5 5 2 Warm Up Control 5 6 Monitor Out 5 6 1 Monitor Units Model 336 Temperature Controller The Warm Up Control parameter determines what happens when the control set point is reached The options are m Auto Off once the Heater Range is set to on the Warm Up Percentage voltage is applied to the output section 5 5 1 and the output stays on until the control input temperature reaches the control setpoint The output will then be turned off O V and the Heater Range setting will automatically be set to Off effectively turning off all temperature control for the control loop If the Heater Range is again manually set to On the cycle will begin again and the output will turn on and stay on until the control input temperature reaches the setpoint again Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 3 or 4 Warmup Mode gt Auto Off m Continuous t
184. ert the 14 pin ribbon cable con nector plug into the socket on the option board Orient the ribbon cable connec tor plug so that the arrow nub slides into the plug slot and the ribbon cable exits downward FIGURE 7 4 Plug the other end of the cable into the main board option connector J12 FIGURE 8 11 Slide the top panel forward in the track provided on each side of the unit Replace the rear plastic bezel by sliding it straight into the unit Full rack only use a small Phillips head screwdriver to replace the 2 top cover screws and the 1 bottom cover screw Use the hex key to replace the 4 screws on the sides of the top covers Tighten the two rear bottom screws Replace the power cord in the rear of the unit and set the power switch to On To verify option card installation check the instrument information by pressing and holding the Escape key Refer to section 8 7 for more information on instru ment information Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 152 CHAPTER 7 Options and Accessories Model 336 Temperature Controller 8 1 General 8 2 USB Troubleshooting 8 2 1 New Installation 8 2 2 Existing Installation No Longer Working 8 2 3 Intermittent Lockups 8 1 General 153 E Chapter 8 Service This chapter provides basic service information forthe Model 336 temperature con troller Customer service of the product is limited to the information presented in this chapter Factory trained service per
185. eshore com CRYOTRONICS 64 CHAPTER 4 Operation C CAUTION Model 336 Temperature Controller In Closed Loop PID mode the controller will accept user entered Proportional Inte gral and Derivative parameters to provide 3 term PID control Manual output can be used during closed loop control to add to the calculated PID control output Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1 or 2 gt 0utput Mode gt Closed Loop PID 4 5 1 4 2 Zone Mode Optimal control parameter values are often different at different temperatures within a system Once control parameter values have been chosen for each tempera ture range or zone the instrument will update the control settings each time the setpoint crosses into a new zone If desired the control parameters can be changed manually just like Closed Loop PID mode but they will be automatically updated once the setpoint crosses a zone boundary The control algorithm used for each zone is identical to that used in Closed Loop PID mode The Zone feature is useful by itself but it is even more powerful when used with other features We recommend using zone mode with setpoint ramping section 4 5 1 5 7 Refer to section 5 3 for details on setting up zones Refer to section 2 7 fora detailed discussion of PID control Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1 or 2 gt 0utput Mode gt Zone 4 5 1 4 3 Open Loop Mode Open Loop output mode allows you to directly set the output using only the Manu
186. et to 8 and resulting time constant settle time and equivalent noise band width Scanner channels Time constant with 8 Settle time 6 time Equivalent noise enabled filter points constants bandwidth 1 4 TC 1 0 755 4 55 0 334 Hz 2 1 50s 9s 0 167 Hz 3 2 255 13 55 0 111 Hz 4 3 005 18 05 0 083 Hz 5 3 745 22 55 0 067 Hz TABLE 4 13 Example of a filter settle time and bandwidth fora Model 3062 4 channel scanner option card Menu Navigation Input Setup gt nput A B C or D Filter Off or On Input Setup gt nput A B C or D gt Filter Points gt 2 to 64 Input Setup gt nput A B C or D Filter Window gt 1 to 10 Default Filter gt Off Filter Points gt 8 Filter Window gt 10 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 60 CHAPTER 4 Operation 4 4 11 Input Name 4 4 12 Temperature Limit 4 4 13 Preferred Units 4 4 14 Max Min 4 5 Output and Control Setup Model 336 Temperature Controller To increase usability and reduce confusion the Model 336 provides a means of assigning a name to each of the four sensor inputs The designated input name is used on the front panel display whenever possible to indicate which sensor reading is being displayed It is also used in the output section of the custom display mode to denote which sensor input is associated with the displayed output to form a control loop Refer to section 4 2 3 for Alpha Numer
187. etpoint Ramping i 68 4 5 1 5 3 A ea agile 69 4 5 1 5 9 ALLE ii a 70 4 5 2 Unpowered Analog Outputs cece eee n 70 4 5 2 1 Warm Up Supply cece e cece cence teen nena eee ees 70 4 5 2 2 MONMITOFOUL inci ARE LEO IAA REFER 70 ludis E EM 70 4 6 1 USB icc dates HER RR e qa Peed OSes LESTE AA 70 46 2 Ui ar 71 4 6 3 VEEE 483B AAA IRR 71 4 6 3 1 Remote Locall a ego iaia esci Od gua 71 Locking and Unlocking the Keypad sss 71 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS Chapter 5 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Computer Interface Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller A aaa 73 EMI 73 5 3 Zone SETIMES neri foi e E M RETOUR PAR herPETI ATA DEOR RI DURS 75 5 4 Bipolar Control a e I S YER de i 77 5 5 Warm Up SUpbly srepeg Ci reete A 77 5 o9 l Warm Up Percentage eset ia asa 77 5 5 2 Warm Up Control avecinan rhe n 78 5 6 Monitor QUT 3 dd 78 5 61 MONIEORUNITS cvs a ia os 78 5 6 1 1 Polarity and Monitor Out Scaling Parameters 79 5 7 Alarms and RelaySssscevuesertier ria e 80 SLAM nai 80 5 7 1 1 Alarm Annunciators eee e eee e eee e eee enn 80 SAL Alarm Catching i na al 80 572 RELAYS irrita ar 82 5 8 Curve Numbers and Storage cece eect eee ee een 82 5 8 1 Curve Header Parameters cece cece eee eee eee eee e eres 83 5 8 2 Curve Breakpolrts erre ii i 83 5 9 Front Panel Curve Entry Operations
188. ette eee ee 12 GER dn 15 Temperature Sensor Selection 0 cece cece eee een 15 2 2 1 Temperature Ratlge stood iaa 15 2 2 2 Sensor SENSICIVILY socrate EE PDeRUND denne 15 2 2 3 Environmental Conditions sisse 16 2 2 4 Measurement ACCUrACY eee e esee 16 22 5 Sensor Package csse I IA aiar 16 Sensor Calibrations 4 exeo rop RUE atri 16 2 3 1 Precision Calibration eee eee een 17 2 32 SOMA Mi A AA 17 2 3 3 Sensors Using Standard CUFVeSs cece cece cece eee e eee e eee eh 17 234 Cove Handler rosada 17 Sensor 151 151810 errno mE NN 18 2 4 1 Mounting Materials uri 18 2 4 2 Sensor Location 18 2 4 3 Thermal Conductivity eee e ees 18 2 4 4 Corta CE ATEa ioi ese n RAE PTEHMPEPASO KEEN RAE INC M PODER ERES 19 2 4 5 Contact PressSuIe iii 19 2 4 6 Lead Wile oc te ee erbe e MER EROR MC E e EVE 19 24 7 Lead Soldering coito al 20 2 4 8 Thermal Anchoring LeadS cece cece cece cence eee e eee e eens 20 2 4 9 Thermal Radiation ce IRR i gag RR PE au ee a 20 Heater Selection and Installation ee 21 2 5 1 Heater Resistance and POWEr eee 21 2 5 2 Heater Location isse E iaa 22 2 9 3 Heater PES da 22 2 5 4 Heater Winners A Rr pe S cada RE 22 Consideration for Good Control cece eee ee eee eee e ees 23 2 6 1 Thermal Conductivity cece eee cece eee e ee een 23 2 6 2 Thermal Lag ri A ea RAR a 23 2 6 3 Two SensorApproach
189. etting 1 Allow the cooling system to cool and stabilize with the heater off Place the Model 336 in closed loop PID mode tuning Turn integral derivative and manual output settings to 0 Enter a setpoint several degrees above the cooling system s lowest temperature Enter a low proportional setting of approximately 5 or 10 and enter the appro priate heater range as described in section 2 8 1 The load temperature should stabilize at a temperature below the setpoint The heater display should show a value greater than 0 and less than 100 If the load temperature does not stabilize below the setpoint do one of the following Uv 208 o a Ifthe load temperature and heater display reading swing rapidly the proportional setting or possibly the heater range may be set too high Reduce the proportional setting orthe heater range and go back to step 6 b Iftheload temperature and heater display reading change very slowly a condition described as drift it is an indication of a proportional setting that is too low Increase the proportional setting and go back to step 6 Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 28 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 8 3 Tuning Integral Model 336 Temperature Controller 7 Gradually increase the proportional setting by doubling it each time At each new setting allow time forthe temperature of the load to stabilize 8 Repeatstep 7 until you reach a setting in w
190. example of a parameter that requires Alpha Numeric Entry Press A or Wto cycle through the upper and lower case English alphabet numerals 0 through 9 and a small selection of com mon symbols Press Enter to advance the cursor to the next position or to save the string and return from Alpha Numeric Entry mode if in the last position Press Escape to move the cursor back one position orto cancel all changes and return from Alpha Numeric Entry mode if at the first position Press any ofthe number pad keys except for to enter that character into the string and advance the cursor to the next position automatically orto save the string and return to Menu Navigation mode if in the last position Use the key to enter the whitespace character 4 3 Display Setup 4 3 1 Display Modes 4 3 DisplaySetup 47 m Setting Selection allows you to select from a list of values During a selection sequence use the A or V keys to select a parameter value To select the high lighted parameter as the new setting press Ente the setting is saved and the mode returns to Menu Navigation Press Escape at any time while the parameter listis displayed to cancel any changes and return to Menu Navigation mode The intuitive front panel layout and keypad logic bright graphic display and LED indicators enhance the user friendly front panel interface of the Model 336 The Model 336 offers a bright graphic liquid crystal display with an LED backlight that s
191. g error lt 5 mK TABLE 1 1 Sensor temperature range Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 6 CHAPTER 1 Introduction Temperature Accuracy Electronic including Control Electronic Stability5 Accuracy Temperature CalCurve and Equivalents Calibrated Sensor Measurement Electronic Resolution Accuracy Temperature Temperature Equivalents Equivalents Example Nominal Typical Lake Shore Temperature Resistance Sensor Sensor Voltage Sensitivity 1664V 12 49mV K 13 mK 25 mK 1 6 mK nr e 77K 1 028V 1 73 mV K 5 8 mK 76 mK 98 mK 11 6 mK AN 300K 0 5597V 2 3 mV K 4 4 mK 47 mK 79 mK 8 8 mK 500K 0 0907V 2 12 mV K 4 7 mK 40 mK 90 mK 9 4 mK prayo sp 13 L4K 16981V 131mVK O8mK 13mK 25mK 16mK Silicon Diode Mae 7K 10203V 1 92 mV K 5 2 mK 69 mK 91 mK 10 4 mK bit 300K 0 5189 V 2 4 mV K 4 2 mK 45 mK 77 mK 8 4mK 475K 0 0906V 222mV K 4 5 mK 38 mK 88 mK 9 mK remm 5 391V 97 5mV K 0 2mK 7mK 19mK 04mK ano Ue 77K 1422V 124mV K 16 mK 180 mK 202 mK 32 mK e 300K 0 8978V 2 85 mV K 7mK 60 mK 92 mK 14 mK 475K 0 3778V 3 15 mV K 6 4 mK 38mK 88mK 13 mK 30K 3 6600 0 191 O K 1 1mK 13 mK 23mK 2 2 mK 1000 Platinum RTD PT 103 with 14 77K 20 380 0 423 O K 0 5 mK 10 mK 22 mK 1 0 mK 500 Q Full Scale calibration 300 K 110 350 0 387 Q K 5 2mK 39 mK 62 mK 10 4 mK 500K 185 6680 0 378 Q K 5 3 mK 60 mK
192. g is still recommended 2 6 Consideration for Good Control 2 6 1 Thermal Conductivity 2 6 2 Thermal Lag 2 6 3 Two Sensor Approach 2 6 4 Thermal Mass 2 6 5 System Non Linearity 2 6 1 Thermal Conductivity 23 Most of the techniques discussed in section 2 4 and section 2 5 to improve cryogenic temperature accuracy apply to control as well There is an obvious exception in sen sor location Acompromise is suggested below in section 2 6 3 Good thermal conductivity is important in any part of a cryogenic system that is intended to be at the same temperature Most systems begin with materials that have good conductivity themselves but as sensors heaters sample holders etc are added to an ever more crowded space the junctions between parts are often over looked In order for control to work well junctions between the elements of the con trol loop must be in close thermal contact and have good thermal conductivity Gasket materials should always be used along with reasonable pressure section 2 4 4 and section 2 4 5 Poor thermal conductivity causes thermal gradients that reduce accuracy and also cause thermal lag that make it difficult for controllers to do their job Thermal lag is the time it takes for a change in heating or cooling power to propagate through the load and get to the feedback sensor Because the feedback sensor is the only thing that lets the controller know what is happening in the system slow information
193. hannel Changes The capacitance input continues control at a stable temperature established with another sensor Allow the temperature to stabilize for one hour after large tempera ture changes to allow capacitance sensor recovery When the control channel is changed to the capacitance input the Model 336 auto matically changes the control setpoint to the present capacitance reading It is not necessary for the user to write down the capacitance value and enter a new setpoint Control parameters P and I may need to be changed for stable control When a Model 3062 4 Channel Scanner option is installed in the Model 336 4 addi tional channels D2 D3 D4 and D5 become available for use The channels are scanned with the Model 336 s Input D at a reduced update rate The scanner option channels can be configured for diode negative temperature coefficient resistor or positive temperature coefficient resistor sensors Specifications for the 4 channel scanner option are given in TABLE 4 9 Menu Navigation Input Setup gt nput D2 D3 D4 or D5 gt Sensor Type gt Disabled Diode PTC RTD Platinum NTC RTD Cernox Default Diode Interface Command INTYPE 4 4 8 1 Type and Range Selection The 4 channel scanner option can be configured as either diode PTC RTD or NTC RTD Autorange will be on by default whenever the Sensor Type parameter is set to PTC RTD or NTC RTD To manually select the resistance range set the Autorange paramet
194. has been exceeded Keypad Locked An attempt has been made to change a parameter while the keypad is locked Refer to section 4 7 Heater Short Circuit Detected Ashort circuit condition has been observed on 1 of the heater outputs A detailed mes sage will follow which includes a reference to which output caused the condition The output will be turned off when this occurs Heater Open Circuit Detected An open circuit condition has been observed on 1 of the heater outputs A detailed mes sage will follow which includes a reference to which output caused the condition The output will be turned off when this occurs Invalid Calibration The calibration memory is either corrupt or is at the default uncalibrated state This message appears when the Model 336 is first powered on To clear the message and continue with instrument start up press the Escape and Enter keys simultaneously Invalid Option Card Calibration The installed option card calibration memory is either corrupt or is at the default uncalibrated state This message appears when the Model 336 is first powered on To clear the message and continue with instrument start up press the Escape and Enter keys simultaneously Firmware Update in Progress This indicates that the Model 336 is in firmware update mode TABLE 8 2 Error messages Instrument calibration can be obtained through La
195. he Embedded Curve Handler cannot interpret formulas in cells In most versions of Excel this can be done by copying the formula results then pasting them in the appropriate cells using the Paste Special command and selecting Paste Values Refer to the appropriate Microsoft Excel documentation for details on the Paste Special operation The Embedded Curve Handler cannot read files in the Microsoft Excel XLSX Excel 2007 or newer format When saving files from Excel be sure to save them in the XLS Excel 97 2003 format so that the file can be read using the Embedded Curve Handler utility if Lake Shore Embedded Curve Handler Utility lolai ResdomBle Read fom instrument Vinte to fe Wie To instrument _DeleteFrom instrument LakeShore Curve Handler OFS Curve Name PT 1000 STANDARD das BERGBBEGSE 100 200 300 900 so e 700 800 Kelvin FIGURE 6 9 Screen shot of the Curve Handler The Ethernet Firmware Updater utility provides a means of updating the firmware that controls the Ethernet functionality of the Model 336 It also updates the embed ded website and the Java utilities found on the Utilities web page Please visit www lakeshore com for the latest firmware updates A lake Shore Ethernet Firmware Updater Unity TES Uploading firmware fies EthernetFirmwareUpdater jar FIGURE 6 10 Screenshot of the Ethernet Firmware Updater Thi
196. he USB cable from the Model 336 to the computer 2 Turnon the Model 336 3 Ifthe Found New Hardware wizard appears click Ask me again later 4 Open Device Manager Use this procedure to open Device Manager a Clickthe Windows Start button and type Device Managerin the Start Search box b Clickonthe Device Manager link in the Search Results Under Programs dialog box c IfUserAccount Control is enabled click Continue on the User Account Control prompt eal Click View and ensure the Devices by Type check box is selected In the main window of Device Manager locate Other Devices in the list of device types In many instances this will be between Network adapters and Ports COM amp LPT If the Other Devices item is not already expanded click the icon Lake Shore Model 336 should appear indented underneath Other Devices If it is not displayed as Lake Shore Model 336 it might be displayed as USB Device If neither are displayed click Action and then Scan for hardware changes which may open the Found New Hardware wizard automatically Ifthe Found New Hardware wizard opens click Cancel 7 Right click on Lake Shore Model 336 and click Update Driver Software 8 Click Browse my computer for driver software 9 Click Browse and select the location of the extracted driver 10 Ensure the Include subfolders check box is selected and click Next 11 When the driver finishes installing a confirmation message stating Windows h
197. he control Ensures that there is no temperaturi Aus PINETA s P a System response is too slow to Autotune si oscillation or excessive noise inthe tem 8 Testing for temperature stability i or the new control parameters are caus Use a smaller initial P value perature reading after control parameter ME ing instability in the control adjustment First of 2 stages of observing system response to setpoint Compiles data for characterizin vbt t 9 y p P p 8 Will not fail in this stage Not applicable change using new control the system parameters econd of 2 sta f observin MT Second of 2 Stages or ab erving Control parameters are changed again System response is too slow or the heater If not already using High system response to setpoint iii 10 based on observation This is the final is too underpowered for the system to range increase initial change using new control parameters stage of PI and PID Autotuning Autotune heater range Model 336 Temperature Controller TABLE 5 1 Autotune stages Menu Navigation Autotune gt nput A B C D gt Autotune P Autotune PI Autotune PID 5 3 Zone Settings Lower Boundary Upper ENTE pm iin Output Range Ramp Rate Control Input 5 3 ZoneSettings 75 The Model 336 allows you to establish up to ten custom contiguous temperature zones where the controller will automatically use pre programmed values for PID heater range manual output ra
198. her the user program should m Properlyformatandtransmitthe query including the terminator as 1 string m Prepare to receive a response immediately m Receive the entire response from the instrument including the terminator m Guarantee that no other communication is started during the response or for 50 ms after it completes m Notinitiate communication more than 20 times per second Failure to follow these simple rules will result in inability to establish communication with the instrument or intermittent failures in communication The Ethernet interface provides a means of connecting the Model 336 to an Ethernet based computer network Ethernet networks provide the ability to communicate across large distances often using existing equipment the internet pre existing local networks The Ethernet interface of the Model 336 provides the ability to use TCP socket connections section 6 4 3 to send commands and queries to the instru ment using the common command set detailed in section 6 6 The Model 336 has an embedded web interface that provides status information and additional utilities section 6 5 Menu Navigation InterfaceEnabled Ethernet There are several parameters for configuring the Model 336 Ethernet interface and three methods for configuring these parameters This section contains a brief expla nation of each of these A comprehensive discussion of computer networking is beyond the scope ofthis manual These settings m
199. hich the load temperature begins a sustained and predictable oscillation rising and falling in a consistent period of time See FIGURE 2 2 a The goal is to find the proportional value in which the oscillation begins do not turn the setting so high that temperature and heater output changes become extreme 9 Ifstep 8 is achieved complete steps 10 and 11 if not skip to step 12 10 Record the proportional setting and the amount of time it takes for the load to change from one temperature peak to the next The time is called the oscillation period of the load It helps describe the dominant time constant of the load which is used in setting integral 11 Reduce the proportional setting by half The appropriate proportional setting is one half of the value required for sustained oscillation in step 8 See FIGURE 2 2 b Continue to Tuning Integral section 2 8 3 12 There are a few systems that will stabilize and not oscillate with a very high pro portional setting and a proper heater range setting For these systems setting a proportional setting of one half of the highest setting is a good starting point Continue to the Tuning Integral section 2 8 3 When the proportional setting is chosen and the integral is set to 0 off the Model 336 controls the load temperature below the setpoint Setting the integral allows the Model 336 control algorithm to gradually eliminate the difference in tem perature by integrating the error over time S
200. his mode implements what is often referred to as On Off control Once the Heater Range is set to on the Warm Up Percentage voltage is applied to the output until the control input temperature reaches the setpoint Then the output will turn off 0 V until the temperature falls 1 K below the setpoint at which point the the Warm Up Percentage voltage is again applied to the output The Heater Range will never be automatically set to Off in this mode Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 3 or 4 gt Warm Up Control gt Auto Off Continuous Default Continuous Interface Command WARMUP In Monitor Out mode the unpowered analog output 3 or 4 will track the assigned control input according to the scaling parameters you enter Acommon use for this function would be to send a voltage proportional to temperature to a data acquisition system The Control Input parameter setting determines which sensor input is tracked by the output The remaining parameters detailed in this section dictate how the output value is determined An output configured to Monitor Out mode is not affected by the ALL OFF key as it does not have a Heater Range setting and by design is always enabled Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 3 or 4 gt 0utput Mode gt Monitor Out Output Setup Output 3 or 4 gt Control Input gt None Input A Input B Input C Input D Default Control Input gt None Interface Command OUTMODE The Monitor Units parameter de
201. hown in FIGURE B 1 NON MAGNETIC NON FLAMMABLE KEEP UPRIGHT FIGURE B 1 Typical cryogenic storage Dewar B 4 Liquid Helium Transferring LHe and LN and operation ofthe storage Dewar controls should be in and Nitrogen accordance with the manufacturer supplier s instructions During this transfer it is Safety P ti important that all safety precautions written on the storage Dewar and recom arety Frecautions mended by the manufacturer be followed Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 170 Appendices A WARNING A WARNING B 5 Recommended First Aid Model 336 Temperature Controller Liquid helium and liquid nitrogen are potential asphyxiants and can cause rapid suffoca tion without warning Store and use in area with adequate ventilation DO NOT vent con tainer in confined spaces DO NOT enter confined spaces where gas may be present unless area has been well ventilated If inhaled remove to fresh air If not breathing give artifi cial respiration If breathing is difficult give oxygen Get medical help Liquid helium and liquid nitrogen can cause severe frostbite to the eyes or skin DO NOT touch frosted pipes or valves In case of frostbite consult a physician at once If a physi cian is not readily available warm the affected areas with water that is near body tem perature The two most important safety aspects to consider when handling LHe and LN are adequat
202. ial poll except that the Status Byte bit 6 RQS MSS is not cleared In this case bit 6 is considered the MSS bit Using the STB command does not clear any bits in the Status Byte Register 6 2 6 5 Using the Message Available MAV Bit Status Byte summary bit 4 MAV indicates that data is available to read into the bus controller This message may be used to synchronize information exchange with the bus controller The bus controller can for example send a query command to the Model 336 and then wait for MAV to set If the MAV bit has been enabled to initiate an SRQ the user s program can direct the bus controller to look for the SRQ leaving the bus available for other use The MAV bit will be clear whenever the output buffer is empty 6 2 6 6 Using Operation Complete OPC and Operation Complete Query OPC The Operation Complete OPC and Operation Complete Query OPC are both used to indicate when pending device operations complete However the commands operate with two distinct methods The OPC command is used in conjunction with bit O OPC ofthe Standard Event Sta tus Register If DPC is sent as the last command in a command sequence bit 0 will be set when the instrument completes the operation that was initiated by the command sequence Additional commands may be sent between the instrument and the bus controller while waiting forthe initial pending operation to complete A typical use of this function would be to enable
203. ic entry Menu Navigation Input Setup gt nput A B C or D gt Input Name gt 15 Character String Default Input A B C D Interface Command INNAME The Temperature Limit parameter provides a means of protecting your equipment from damage by shutting down all control outputs when the assigned temperature limit is exceeded on any sensor input The parameter is available for each of the four sensor inputs A temperature limit of O K default value turns this feature off Menu Navigation Input Setup gt nput A B C or D Temperature Limit gt 0K to 2999K Default 0 0000 K Interface Command TLIMIT The Preferred Units parameter setting determines which units are used to display setpoint and max min parameters whenever these parameters are displayed in any display mode The sensor reading is also displayed in Preferred Units in all display modes except for the Custom display mode where each sensor location can be assigned specific display units Menu Navigation Input Setup gt nput A B C or D gt Preferred Units gt K C or Sensor The Max Min feature captures and stores the highest Max and lowest Min reading taken since the last reset The Preferred Units parameter under the Input Setup menu determines the units used for capturing Max and Min Max and Min are always being captured so there is no need to turn the feature on or off The readings are reset when the instrument is turned off sensor input parameter
204. ime 56 minutes 25 seconds Utilities rice Spool 100 Mbps iii Ethernet Duplex Mode Full Duplex Contact Us Total Packets Received Since Power on 491 Total Packets Sent Since Power on 173 2008 Lake Shore Crystronic Inc FIGURE 6 7 Ethernet status page Utilities Page provides links to launch the embedded curve handler application the embedded Ethernet firmware updater and the instrument configurator backup utilities LakeShore Utilities for Model 336 Temperature Controller Dent arenes RE Launch chart i been va charting and logging data Mi NNNM Curve Handler Java utility used for reading temperature curves G From a file to the Model 336 or from the Model 336 to a file Launch curve handler utility Ethernet Firmware Updater Java utility used for updating the firmware that implements the Model 336 Ethernet interface MB rm RETOURS induding the site and the Java firmware updater utility applications Note that this application does not update the Model 336 instrument Instrument Configuration Backup Utility Java utility used for exporting the current A Export 4 import configuration of the Model 336 to a file or P contig lea config importing a saved configuration to the Model FIGURE 6 8 Utilities page 6 5 Utilities 6 5 1 Embedded Curve Handler 6 5 Utilities 117 Security Settings provides a means of changing the website security settings by allowing the user to enter a new usernam
205. imultaneously displays up to eight readings The Model 336 provides several display modes designed to accommodate different instrument configurations and user preferences The Four Loop display mode offers large format sensor readings of each ofthe four sensor inputs as well as setpoint and heater output information for associated outputs all on one screen The Input display modes provide detailed information about the relevant sensor input and the associ ated output The Custom display mode provides a means for you to assign different types of information to specific sections ofthe display Menu Navigation Display Setup Display Mode Four Loop Custom Input A Input B Input C Input D Default Custom Interface Command DISPLAY 4 3 1 1 Four Loop Mode Four Loop mode provides a limited amount of information about each of the four sen sor inputs and the associated control loops Each quadrant of the display is dedicated to one sensor input and the associated loop if applicable The top line of each quad rant contains the input letter A B C or D followed by the user assignable sensor name The sensor readings are presented just below the sensor name in the large character format for easier viewing from a distance The sensor reading is displayed in the units assigned to the respective sensor input s Preferred Units setting which can be found under the Input Setup menu section 4 4 If the input is assigned as the Con trol Input
206. ing gt Off or On Default Off Interface Command RAMP To stop a ramp when the desired control loop is displayed press Setpoint then immediately press Enter This stops the ramp at the current setpoint but leaves the ramping function activated To continue the ramp enter a new setpoint Refer to sec tion 4 5 1 5 6 for details on setting the Setpoint parameter 4 5 1 HeaterOutputs 69 4 5 1 5 8 Heater Range The Heater Range setting is used for turning a control output on as well as setting the output power range for the heater outputs All four outputs provide an Off setting for turning the output off The heater outputs 1 and 2 provide Low Medium Med and High settings which provide decade steps in power based on the maximum output power available to the connected heater The High range provides the maximum power the Med range provides maximum power 10 and the Low range provides maximum power 100 Refer to section 2 5 1 for details on how to calculate the max imum output power The unpowered analog outputs 3 and 4 do not have multiple output ranges and only provide an On setting for enabling the output While controlling temperature the following will cause the heater range to automati cally turn off m Exceeding the Temperature Limit setting m Setup changes to the control input m Power loss with Power Up Enable feature turned off m Input errors such as T Over T Under S Over and S Under Available full
207. ings can be tested very quickly Some systems are too slow for the Autotune algorithm Any system that takes more than 15 min to stabilize at a new setpoint is too slow with an appropriate I setting lt 5 Thermal lag can be improved by using the sensor and heater installation techniques discussed in section 2 4 to section 2 6 Lag times up to a few seconds should be expected much larger lags can be a problem System nonlinearity is a problem for both autotune and manual tuning It is most commonly noticed when controlling near the maximum or minimum temperature of a temperature control system It is not uncommon however for a user to buy a cryogenic cooling system specifically to operate near its minimum temperature If this is the case try to tune the system at 5 degrees above the minimum temperature and gradually reduce the setpoint manu ally adjusting the control settings with each step Any time the mechanical cooling action of a cryogenic refrigerator can be seen as periodic temperature fluctuations the mass is too small or temperature too low to autotune Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 30 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 10 Zone Tuning 2 11 Thermoelectric Devices Model 336 Temperature Controller Once the PID tuning parameters have been chosen fora given setpoint the whole process may have to be done again for other setpoints significantly far away that have different tuning need
208. input data Also see the RDGST command Specifies which input to query A D D1 D5 for 3062 Minimum and Maximum Function Reset Command MNMXRST term Resets the minimum and maximum data for all inputs MODE Input Format Example MODE Input Returned Format MOUT Input Format Example Remarks MOUT Input Format Returned Format NET Input Format NET Input Returned Format 6 6 1 InterfaceCommands 137 Remote Interface Mode Command MODE lt mode gt term n lt mode gt O local 1 remote 2 remote with local lockout MODE 2 term places the Model 336 into remote mode with local lockout Remote Interface Mode Query MODE term lt mode gt term n refer to command for description Manual Output Command MOUT lt output gt lt value gt term n nnnnn term lt output gt Specifies output to configure 1 4 lt value gt Specifies value for manual output MOUT 1 22 45 term Output 1 manual output is 22 45 Manual output only applies to outputs in Closed Loop PID Zone or Open Loop modes Manual Output Query MOUT output term n lt output gt Specifies which output to query 1 4 lt value gt nnnnn term refer to command for description Network Settings Command NET lt DHCP gt lt AUTO IP gt lt IP gt lt Sub Mask gt lt Gateway gt lt Pri DNS gt lt Sec DNS gt lt Pref Host gt lt Pref Domain gt lt Description gt term n n
209. int crosses 100 K the control parameters from Zone 8 will be used The setpoint ramp will then continue toward 2 K ata rate of 20 K min until crossing 50 K when the control parameters from Zone 7 are loaded This pattern will continue until the final setpoint value of 2 K is reached or another setpoint is entered Note that Input B will be used in all zones greater than 10 K zones 4 to 8 and Input A will be used in all zones below 10 K zones 1 3 0 1 K Min Default 9 n a OK 50 20 0 0 0 Off 0 1 K Min Default 8 100 001 K 500 K 200 20 0 0 0 High 30 K Min Input B 7 50 001 K 100 K 185 25 0 0 0 Med 20 K Min Input B 6 25 001K 50K 150 30 0 0 0 Med 10 K Min Input B 5 15 001K 25K 100 30 0 0 0 Med 5 K Min Input B 4 10 001 K 15K 85 35 0 0 0 Med 2 K Min Input B 3 7 001K 10K 85 35 0 0 0 Med 0 9 K Min Input A 2 4 001 K 7K 70 0 40 0 0 0 0 Low 0 7 K Min Input A 1 OK 4K 50 0 50 0 0 0 0 Low 0 5 K Min Input A TABLE 5 2 Zone settings example Sensor accuracy and placement will affect how smoothly the transition from one feed back sensor to another is performed A large difference between the temperature read ings of each sensor at the time of transition could cause a temporary instability in the temperature control due to the sudden large error introduced into the control equation It is highly recommended to use the Setpoint Ramping feature when using the Control Input zone paramete
210. iode DT 670 WK 475 Negative 0 00001 V GaAlAs Diode TG 120 WK 325 Negative 0 00001 V Platinum 100 PT 100 Q K 800 Positive 0 001 Q Platinum 1000 Q K 800 Positive 0 01 Q Rhodium Iron RF 800 Q K 325 Positive 0 0010 Carbon Glass CGR 1 1000 log Q K 325 Negative 0 00001 log Q Cernox CX 1050 log Q K 325 Negative 0 00001 log Q Germanium GR 200A 100 log Q K 325 Negative 0 00001 log Q Rox RX 102A log Q K 40 Negative 0 00001 log Q Type K 9006 005 mV K 1500 Positive 0 0001 mV Type E 9006 003 mV K 930 Positive 0 0001 mV Type T 9006 007 mV K 673 Positive 0 0001 mv Au Fe 0 03 mV K 500 Positive 0 0001 mV Au Fe 0 07 9006 001 mV K 610 Positive 0 0001 mV Not offered by Lake Shore TABLE 5 4 Typical curve parameters Setting resolution is also six digits in sensor units The curve format parameter defines the range and resolution in sensor units as shown in TABLE 5 3 The sensor type determinesthe practical setting resolution TABLE 5 4 lists recommended sen sor units resolutions Enterthe breakpoints with the sensor units value increasing as point number increases There should not be any breakpoint locations left blankin the middle ofa curve The search routine in the Model 336 interprets a blank breakpoint as the end of the curve There are five operations associated with front panel curve entry Edit curve View Curve Erase Curve Copy Curve and SoftCal as detailed below Description F Edit Curve allows y
211. ion E Lake Shore Model 336 4 channel variable heater output temperature controler Utilities Security Settings Instrument LSCI Model 336 ELS Description Lake Shore Model 336 Instrument Serial Number 898898 Option Serial Number Not Present Instrument FirmwareRev 04 Ethernet Firmware Rev 09 Hostname 192168012 IP Address 192168012 MAC Address 00 40 9D 2C 33 AE FIGURE 6 5 Model 336 home page Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 116 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller Ethernet Configuration Page provides a means of reconfiguring the Ethernet config uration parameters ofthe Model 336 LakeShore Model 336 Temperature Controller Teo Ethernet Configuration for Model 336 Temperature Controller Ethernet Configuration DHCP Ethernet Status Utilities O Auto Security Settings statici Contact Us IP Address 192168012 Subnet Mask 2552552550 Default Gateway 192 168 0 1 Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Prefered Hostname LSCI 336 1 Prefered Domain Description Lake Shore Model 336 FIGURE 6 6 Ethernet configuration page Ethernet Status Page provides status and statistics related to the current Ethernet connection LakeShore Model 336 Temperature Controller Temperature Products Home Ethernet Status for Model 336 Temperature Controller Ethernet Configuration Ethernet Status ethernet Upt
212. ion is based on these points section 5 10 Lake Shore offers two or three point SoftCal calibrated sensors that include both the large interpolation table and the smaller breakpoint interpolation table for 400 series diode and Platinum sensors Some types of sensors behave in a very predictable manner and a standard tempera ture response curve can be created for them Standard curves are a convenient and inexpensive way to get reasonable temperature accuracy Sensors that have a stan dard curve are often used when interchangeability is important Some individual sen sors are selected for their ability to match a published standard curve but in general these sensors do not provide the accuracy of a calibrated sensor For convenience the Model 336 has several standard curves included in firmware Lake Shore provides a software application called Curve Handler which makes loading temperature curves into the Model 336 a very simple process The program can copy curves from properly formatted files into the Model 336 user curve loca tions You can also use it to read curves from the Model 336 and save them to files Lake Shore calibrated sensors are provided with a CD containing all the proper for mats to load curves using the Curve Handler software program Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 18 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 4 Sensor Installation 2 4 1 Mounting Materials 2 4 2 Sens
213. ion is being used Menu Navigation Input Setup nput C or D Sensor Type gt Thermocouple Interface Command INTYPE 4 4 6 1 Internal Room Temperature Compensation Room temperature compensation is required to give accurate temperature measure ments with thermocouple sensors It corrects for the temperature difference between the instrument thermal block and the curve normalization temperature of 0 C An external ice bath is the most accurate form of compensation but is often inconvenient The Model 336 has internal room temperature compensation that is adequate for most applications You can turn internal compensation on or off It oper ates with any thermocouple type that has an appropriate temperature response curve loaded Room temperature compensation is not meaningful for sensor units measurements Room temperature compensation should be calibrated as part of every installation section 4 4 6 2 Menu Navigation Input Setup nput C or D gt Room Compensation Off or On Default On Interface Command INTYPE 4 4 6 2 Internal Room Temperature Compensation Calibration Procedure Factory calibration of the instrument is accurate to within approximately 1 K Differ ences in thermocouple wire and installation technique create errors greater than the instrument errors To achieve the best accuracy calibrate with the thermocouple actually being used because it eliminates most sources of error Ifthat is not possible use a
214. is accepted Keypad Unlocked will be displayed for 3 s and the display will return to normal All Model 336 parameters are now accessible Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 72 CHAPTER 4 Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller 5 1 General 73 Chapter 5 Advanced Operation 5 1 General 5 2 Autotune This chapter provides information on the advanced operation ofthe Model 336 tem perature controller The Model 336 can automate the tuning process of typical cryogenic systems with the Autotune feature For additional information about the algorithm refer to section 2 9 Before initiating the Autotune process properly configure the cooling system with control input sensor and heater output to make it capable of closed loop control Assign the control sensor with a valid temperature response curve Also determine an appropriate heater range as described in section 2 8 1 The system must be coarsely maintaining temperature within 5 K of the setpoint where new tuning parameters are desired in order for the Autotuning process to initiate Autotune works only with one control loop at a time and does not set the manual output or heater range For autotuning to work properly on a control loop with a scanner input assigned Model 3062 4 channel scanner option only that scanner input channel can be enabled all other scanner input channels must be disabled To initiate the Autotune process press Autotune then select
215. isting RS 232 based remote interface software It also provides a simpler means of commu nicating than a standard USB implementation The Model 336 has a B type USB connector on the rear panel This is the standard connector used on USB peripheral devices and it allows the common USB A type to B type cable to be used to connect the Model 336 to a host PC The pin assignments for A type and B type connectors are shown in section 8 10 The maximum length ofa USB cable as defined by the USB 2 0 standard is 5 m 16 4 ft This length can be extended using USB hubs every 5 m 16 4 ft up to five times for a maximum total length of 30 m 98 4 ft The USB interface emulates an RS 232 serial port at a fixed 57 600 baud rate but with the physical connections of a USB This programming interface requires a cer tain configuration to communicate properly with the Model 336 The proper configu ration parameters are listed in TABLE 6 5 Baud rate 57 600 Data bits 7 Start bits 1 Stop bits 1 Parity Odd Flow control None Handshaking None TABLE 6 5 Host com port configuration The USB hardware connection uses the full speed 12 000 000 bits sec profile ofthe USB 2 0 standard however since the interface uses a virtual serial com portata fixed data rate the data throughput is still limited to a baud rate of 57 600 bits s The Model 336 USB driver has been made available through Windows Update This is the recommended
216. itCurve 85 To perform the Edit Curve operation follow this procedure 1 PressCurve Entry 2 Scroll to Edit Curve and press Enter 3 Scrollto the desired curve and press Enter again 4 Editthe curve header parameters using the standard keypad operation methods described in section 4 2 3 The curve breakpoints are entered in a slightly differ ent way than other menu parameters 5 Toaccess the breakpoint data highlight Curve Points in the Curve Edit menu screen and press Enter to enter the Curve Point entry screen The Curve Point entry screen contains a scrollable list of all curve breakpoint pairs in the selected curve There are three columns in the list From left to right the columns are breakpoint number breakpoint sensor value breakpoint temperature value Ini tially the highlight is on the first breakpoint number Menu Navigation Curve Entry Edit Curve Interface Command CRVHDR 5 9 1 1 Edit a Breakpoint Pair To edit a breakpoint pair follow this procedure 1 Select a breakpoint pairto edit Do this by scrolling to the desired breakpoint number and press Enter The highlight moves to the sensor value of the selected pair 2 Usethe Number Entry method to edit the value Referto section 4 2 1 1 for details on the Number Entry method 3 Oncethe new sensor value is entered press Enterto highlight the temperature value 4 Usethe Number Entry method to enter the new temperature value Press Enter atthis pointto
217. itance input The temperature response of capacitance sensors shifts with thermal cycling making calibration unpredictable All Model 3061 option measurement and control must be done in sensor units With this option two sensors should be installed at the control point Use a resistive sensor in one of the standard inputs to establish a control tem perature and stabilize the system in a low magnetic field Before increasing the field strength shift control to the capacitance sensor to maintain the current temperature 3 6 1 Wiring Guarding and Shielding 3 7 Thermocouple Sensor Inputs Thermocouple Model 3060 3 7 1 Sensor Input Terminals 3 6 1 Wiring GuardingandShielding 37 The capacitance input uses the same 6 pin din connector as the standard inputs and the same pins for current excitation and voltage feedback Cable capacitance in lon ger cables can cause large sensor reading errors if proper guarding and shielding methods are not applied To address this problem a driven guard is provided on pin 6 anda shield pin is provided on pin 3 The guard pin should be connected to a foil shield that surrounds a single twisted pair of wires used for l and V The shield pin on pin 3 should be connected to a foil shield that surrounds a single twisted pair of wires used for l and V See FIGURE 3 7 This wiring scheme must be applied to ensure proper sensor readings using the Model 3061 capacitance option Guard V Cs Shield
218. ith the option card Refer to section 3 6 for more information on using the Model 3061 4 4 7 1 Range Selection The capacitance option input has two input voltage ranges 15 nF and 150 nF The lower range is specified to 15 nF but can read up to 25 nF and is recommended for CS 401 series sensors The higher range is specified to 150 nF but can read up to 250 nF and is recommended for CS 510 series sensors Menu Navigation Input Setup nput D gt Sensor Type gt Capacitance Interface Command INTYPE Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 56 CHAPTER 4 Operation 4 4 84 Channel Scanner Input Setup Model 3062 Only Model 336 Temperature Controller 4 4 7 2 Temperature Coefficient Selection Capacitance sensors can have both a positive and negative temperature coefficient slope They have a positive temperature coefficient at very low temperatures and a negative temperature coefficient at warmer temperature Sensor data sheets detail where the coefficient changes There is often a temperature range where the sensor is not usable Temperature control is impossible if the Model 336 does not know which slope the sensor is on System overheating can result if the wrong coefficient is cho sen The user must select a temperature coefficient before control is switched to the capacitance input Menu Navigation Input Setup nput D Temp Coefficient gt Negative or Positive Interface Command INTYPE 4 4 7 3 Control C
219. ity EMC for the Model 336 Temperature Controller Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC of electronic equipment is a growing concern worldwide Emissions of and immunity to electromagnetic interference is now part of the design and manufacture of most electronics To qualify for the CE Mark the Model 336 meets or exceeds the requirements of the European EMC Directive 89 336 EEC as a CLASS A product A Class A product is allowed to radiate more RF than a Class B product and must include the follow ing warning WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures The instrument was tested under normal operating conditions with sensor and interface cables attached If the installation and operating instructions in the User s Manual are followed there should be no degradation in EMC performance This instrument is not intended for use in close proximity to RF Transmitters such as two way radios and cell phones Exposure to RF interference greater than that found in a typical laboratory environment may disturb the sensitive measurement circuitry ofthe instrument Pay special attention to instrument cabling Improperly installed cabling may defeat even the best EMC protection Forthe best performance from any precision instrument follow the grounding and shielding instructions in the User s Manual In addition the installer of the Model 33
220. ivated ee Low alarm deactivated FIGURE 5 5 Dead band example To setup an alarm enter the Alarm Setup menu by pressing the Alarm key Ifa latching alarm has been activated you will be prompted with a Reset Alarm message Select No to enter the Alarm Setup menu Menu Navigation Alarm Input A B C D gt Latching gt 0ff On Alarm Input A B C D gt Deadband gt see note below Low and High Setpoint limits are determined by the Preferred Units of the associated sensor input Default Latching Off Deadband 1 0000 K Interface Command ALARM Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 82 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation 5 7 2 Relays Relay 1 Relay 2 There are two relays on the Model 336 numbered 1 and 2 They are most commonly thought of as alarm relays butthey may be manually controlled also Relay assign ments are configurable as shown in FIGURE 5 6 Two relays can be used with one sen sor input for independent high and low operation or each can be assigned to a different input E off Manual off relay remains in normal state On Manual on relay remains in active state A Alarm B Alarm C Alarm D Alarm off On A Alarm B Alarm C Alarm D Alarm Follows Follows Follows Follows Manual off Manual on Follows Follows Follows Follows InputA Input B Input C Input D relay remains in orsi remains in Input A Input B Input C Input D normal sta
221. iver release the drawer holding the line voltage selector and fuse Slide out the removable plastic fuse holder from the drawer Rotate the fuse holder until the proper voltage indicator shows through the window 7 Re assemblethe line input assembly in the reverse order 8 Verifythe voltage indicator in the window ofthe line input assembly 9 Connectthe instrument power cord 10 Turn the line power switch On I Refer to FIGURE 8 2 Bump gat 8 6 Fuse Replacement YTV Te CAUTION 8 7 Factory Reset Menu 8 6 FuseReplacement 155 Linecord Powerswitch Screwdriver Fuse input o off ion slot drawer 100 120 220 240V 10 Voltage 100 120V 4AT250V_ 5x20mm 50 60 Hz 250 VA MAX 220 240V 4AT250V 5x20mm FIGURE 8 2 Power fuse access Use this procedure to remove and replace a line fuse To avoid potentially lethal shocks turn off controller and disconnect it from AC power before performing these procedures For continued protection against fire hazard replace only with the same fuse type and rating specified for the line voltage selected Test fuse with an ohmmeter Do not rely on visual inspection of fuse Bow mE oO MND Locate the line input assembly on the instrument rear panel See Figure 8 2 Turn the power switch Off O Remove the instrument power cord With a small screwdriver release the drawer holding the line voltage selector and fuse Remove existing fuse s Replace with proper Slow Blow
222. ke Shore Service Refer to section 8 14 for technical inquiries and contact information Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 158 CHAPTER 8 Service 8 10 Rear Panel Connector Definition Model 336 Temperature Controller The sensor input heater output terminal block USB Ethernet and IEEE 488 con nectors are defined in FIGURE 8 3 through FIGURE 8 8 Forthermocouple connector details referto FIGURE 3 8 FIGURE 8 3 Sensor input A through D 1 l Current 2 v Voltage 3 None Shield 4 V Voltage 5 I Current 6 None Shield TABLE 8 3 Sensor input A through D connector details OUTPUT 1 HEATER GND OUTPUT 2 HEATER HI LO HI LO 100 W MAX 50 W MAX FIGURE 8 4 Heater output connectors 8 10 RearPanelConnector Definition 159 Use screwdriver to lock or unlock wires Slides into slot at rear of Model 336 Insert wire into slot FIGURE 8 5 Terminal block for relays and Output 3 and 4 Description Output 3 Output 3 Output 4 Output 4 Relay 1 normally closed Relay 1 common Relay 1 normally open Relay 2 normally closed Relay 2 common TUM Relay 2 normally open TABLE 8 4 Terminal block pin and connector details 21 Tl 34 FIGURE 8 6 USB pinand connector details Description 1 VEC 5 VDC 2 D Data 3 D Data 4 GND Ground TABLE 8 5 USB pin and connector details Lake Shore w
223. l display Menu Navigation D gt 0 to 200 Default 0 Interface Command PID 4 5 1 5 5 Manual Output Manual Output is a manual setting of the control output It can function in two differ ent ways depending on control mode In open loop control mode the Manual Output is the only output to the load You can directly set the control output from the front panel or over the computer interface In closed loop control mode Manual Output is added directly to the output of the PID control equation In effect the control equa tion operates about the Manual Output setting The Manual Output setting is in percent of full scale Percent of full scale is defined as percent of full scale current or power on the selected heater range Refer to section 4 5 1 3 to set the Heater Out display Available full scale current and power are determined by the heater resistance Max Current setting and Heater Range Manual Output setting range is 0 to 100 with a resolution of 0 01 To set Manual Output first configure the front panel display to show the desired con trol loop information and then press Manual Output on the front panel A quick way to access the setting if the control loop information is not already being displayed is to press A B C or D on the front panel to temporarily display the control loop infor mation while the new setting is entered Refer to section 4 3 for details on configuring the front panel display When an output is
224. l on the form When data acquisition is in prog ress the configuration panel controls are disabled but the current settings can still be seen Model 336 Temperature Controller 6 5 4 Embedded Chart Recorder 121 6 5 4 2 Starting Data Acquisition Once the parameters in the configuration panel are set as desired simply click Start to begin data acquisition If you are logging data to a file the Number of Data Points to Log parameter is used to determine how many data points to take before terminat ing data acquisition However once data acquisition has begun the Start button becomes a Stop button and data acquisition can be terminated by pressing Stop but ton If you are not logging to a file data acquisition will continue until you press Stop 6 5 4 3 Chart Functionality By default the chart 6 will autoscale in both the x and y axis The time scale slider 7 is provided to adjust the time scale window x axis scaling When less than one hour of data has been logged the slider will allow a time window between 1 and 60 min in increments of 1 min As the total elapsed time increases the values on the time scale slider will also increase to allow time windows proportional to the elapsed time A y axis is added for each unique measurement unit of the selected readings Each y axis will be autoscaled so if more than one reading is being taken in the same unit the scale for the associated axis will be set such that the largest value
225. l poll capability talk only unaddressed to talk if addressed to listen L4 Basic Listener unaddressed to listen if addressed to talk SRI Service request capability AH1 Acceptor handshake capability PPO No parallel poll capability E1 Open collector electronics TABLE 6 1 Model 336 IEEE 488 interface capabilities and their subsets Instruments are connected to the IEEE 488 bus by a 24 conductor connector cable as specified by the standard section 8 10 1 Cables can be ordered from Lake Shore as IEEE 488 Cable Kit 4005 or they can be purchased from other electronic suppliers Cable lengths are limited to 2 m 6 6 ft for each device and 20 m 65 6 ft for the entire bus The Model 336 can drive a bus with up to ten loads If more instruments or cable length is required a bus expander must be used Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 94 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation 6 2 1 Changing IEEE 488 Interface Parameters 6 2 2 Remote Local Operation 6 2 3 IEEE 488 2 Command Structure Model 336 Temperature Controller The IEEE 488 address must be set from the front panel before communication with the instrument can be established Menu Navigation Interface gt Enabled gt IEEE 488 Interface gt IEEE 488 Address gt 1 to 31 Default IEEE 488 Normal operations from the keypad are referred to as local operations The Model 336 can also be configured for remote operations via the IEEE 488 interface o
226. lation No Longer Working sss 154 8 3 3 Intermittent Lockups ii 154 8 4 FUSEDraWwer a capelli a ea ent 154 8 5 Line Voltage Selection siii a 154 8 6 FUSE REPIACEMENE viii ea 155 8 7 Factory Reset Menu wi cicews ies ra ei 155 87 Default Values ccc suon e aLaaa 156 8 7 2 Product InfoMine t Re EROR PREDA RA ERREUR ER QUE EIE 157 8 8 EIrOr MESSAGES cunda Rev RAI alle acini 157 8 9 Calibration Procedure sueco cese etd e EXEUUUR I IR Ode Od edi ties 157 8 10 Rear Panel Connector Definition sss n 158 8 10 1 IEEE 488 Interface Connector sss 160 8 11 Electrostatic Discharge c c 161 8 11 1 Identification of Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Components 161 8 11 2 Handling Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Components 162 8 12 Enclosure Top Remove and Replace Procedure 0 162 8 13 Firmware Updates i eee n pe ir 164 8 13 1 Updating the Firmware ee 164 8 13 2 Record of Updates Made to the Firmware eee eee eees 164 8 14 TechinicalInquiries pian a 164 8 14 1 Contacting Lake Shore cece eee in TEn ee teen nr rra 164 8 14 2 Return of Equipment ccc ee eese eee 165 8 14 3 RMAValid Period eee eee 165 8 14 4 Shipping ChargeS e 165 8 14 5 Restocking Fee ui i 165 Al MD STUN y A E A 167 AZ COMPARISON ii a an 167 A3 CONVEFSIONS stri a rd I medals 167 B I General nenita a 169 Miren
227. lete accuracy specifications for calibrated sensors Calibrated sensors include the measured test data printed and plotted the coeffi cients of a Chebychev polynomial that have been fitted to the data and two tables of data points to be used as interpolation tables Both interpolation tables are opti mized to allow accurate temperature conversion The smaller table called a break point interpolation table is sized to fit into instruments like the Model 336 where it is called a temperature response curve It is important to look at instrument specifications before ordering calibrated sen sors A calibrated sensor is required when a sensor does not follow a standard curve if you wish to display in temperature Otherwise the Model 336 will operate in sensor units like ohms or volts The Model 336 may not work over the full temperature range of some sensors The standard inputs in are limited to operation above 300 mK even with sensors that can be calibrated to 20 mK SoftCal is a good solution for applications that do not require the accuracy of a pre cision calibration The SoftCal algorithm uses the well behaved nature of sensors that follow a standard curve to improve the accuracy of individual sensors A few known temperature points are required to perform SoftCal The Model 336 can also perform a SoftCal calibration You need to provide one two or three known tem perature reference points The range and accuracy of the calibrat
228. lp you properly install sensors Lake Shore offers a line of cryogenic accessories Many ofthe materials discussed are available through Lake Shore and can be ordered with sensors or instruments Choosing appropriate mounting materials is very important in a cryogenic environ ment The high vacuum used to insulate cryostats is one consideration Materials used in these applications should have a low vapor pressure so they do not evaporate or out gas and spoil the vacuum insulation Metals and ceramics do not have this problem but greases and varnishes must be checked Another consideration is the wide extremes in temperature most sensors are exposed to The linear expansion coefficient of materials becomes important when temperature changes are large Never try to permanently bond materials with linear expansion coefficients that dif fer by more than three Use a flexible mounting scheme orthe parts will break apart potentially damaging them The thermal expansion or contraction of rigid clamps or holders could crush fragile samples or sensors that do not have the same coefficient Thermal conductivity is a property of materialsthat can change with temperature Do not assume that a thermal anchor grease that works well at room temperature and above will do the same job at low temperatures Finding a good place to mount a sensor in an already crowded cryostat is never easy There are fewer problems if the entire load and sample holder are at the same
229. mQ 0 01 of rdg 00to1000 1mALl 1mQ 2ma 10 004 Q 0 1 MO 0 001 of rdg C 4 mQ 0 01 of rdg 00t03000 1 mA 1mQ 2mQ 10 0000 0 3 mQ 0 00126 of rdg C H mo 0 01 of rdg 00to1kQ 1 mAn 10mO 20mO 0 04 Q 1 MQ 0 001 of rdg C 40 MQ 0 02 of rdg 00to3kQ 1mAu 10mQ 20mQ 0 04 0 3 MO 0 001 of rdg C 40 mQ 0 02 of rdg 0Oto 10kQ 1mAu 100mo 200mQ 1040 10m0 0 001 ofrdg C 400 ma 0 02 of rdg NTC RTD Negative 00to100 1mAll 0 1mQ 0 2mQ 0 0020 0 06 0 01 mQ 0 001 of rdg C 0 3 MQ 10 mV ofrdg 00 to300 300 pA11 0 1mQ 0 2mQ 0 002 Q 0 06 0 03 mQ 0 001 of rdg C 0 9 mQ of rdg 00to1000 100 pA11 1mQ 1mQ 0 01 Q 0 04 0 1 MQ 0 001 of rdg C 3 mQ of rdg 00to3000 30pA11 1mQ 2ma 0 01 40 04 of 0 3 mQ 0 001 of rdg C 9 mQ rdg 00to1kQ 10 pA 10mQ 10m0 0 002 0 10 0 04 1mQ 0 001 of rdg C 30 mQ 0 004 of rdg of rdg of rdg 00to3kQ 3 pAn 10mQ 20 mQ 0 002 0 10 0 04 3mQ 0 001 ofrdg C 90 mQ 0 004 of rdg of rdg of rdg 0Qto10kQ lpAn 100 mQ 100 mQ 0 002 1 00 0 04 10 mQ 0 001 of rdg C 300 mQ ofrdg ofrdg 0 004 of rdg 0Qto30kQ 300 nA 100 mQ 200 mQ 0 002 2 0 Q 0 04 30mQ 0 001 of rdg C 900 mQ of rdg of rdg 0 004 of rdg 00 to 100 kQ 100 nA11 10 10 0 005 ofrdg 10 0 Q 0 04 100 mQ 0 001 of rdg C 3 Q 0 01 of of rdg rdg 8 Control stability ofthe electronics only in ideal thermal system 9 Current
230. mall changes in the system Without buffering small disturbances can very quickly create large temperature changes In some systems it is necessary to add a small amount of thermal mass such as a copper block in order to improve control stability Because of nonlinearities a system controlling well at one temperature may not con trol well at another temperature While nonlinearities exist in all temperature control systems they are most evident at cryogenic temperatures When the operating tem perature changes the behavior of the control loop the controller must be retuned As an example a thermal mass acts differently at different temperatures The specific heat of the load material is a major factor in thermal mass The specific heat of materials like copper change as much as three orders of magnitude when cooled from 100 K to 10 K Changes in cooling power and sensor sensitivity are also sources of nonlinearity Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 24 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 7 PID Control 2 7 1 Proportional P 2 7 2 Integral I Model 336 Temperature Controller The cooling power of most cooling sources also changes with load temperature This is very important when operating at temperatures near the highest or lowest tem perature that a system can reach Nonlinearities within a few degrees of these high and low temperatures make it very difficult to configure them for stable contr
231. mmary bit of the Status Byte register 6 2 4 Status System Overview 97 o a tatus register a p butter TT as Ba a a my P Bp standardeve 7 T6 5 4 T3 2 3 0 95 Status enable register Noe wm m FESE ESE PON wea cue ex is ove ises onc Name PON Power on CME Command error EXE Execution error YE Query error Bi Hag ee i complete Status byte register 7 s 4 3 2 21 9 Bit TUM sci Name RQS Generate service request reset by serial poll MSS Read by STB Service request 7 I IP 7 Bit enable register Nac T oc nee Not SRE SRE ssa Name OSB Operation summary bit Operation 7 6 s 4 3 2 2 0 Bit mos seveeremest gt condition register com cat arune woo rama pare ovo aru Name MSS Master summary status bit OPST ESB Event status summary bit HOY Y y d MAV Message available summary bit e LHH Hee ao event register OPER com cat arune NRDG RAM mea vez OVLD JALARM Name Doerr operationevent 7 T6 s afs 2 4 9 5 enable a Ei OPSTE OPSTE ATUNE NRDG RAMP1 RAMP2 OVLD ALARM Name COM Processor communication error CAL Calibration error ATUNE Autotune process completed NRDG New sensor reading RAMP1 Loop 1 ramp done RAMP2 Loop 2 ramp done OVLD Sensor overload ALARM Sensor alarming FIGURE 6 1 Model 336 status system Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 98 CHAPTER 6
232. mp rate and control input Zone control can be active for both control loops at the same time Configure the zones using 1 as the lowest to 10 as the highest zone Zone boundaries are always specified in kelvin K The bottom of the first zone is always O K therefore only the upper limit is required for all subse quent zones Make a copy of FIGURE 5 1 to plan your zones To use the programmed zones the output mode must be set to Zone refer to section 4 5 1 4 2 to set up Zone mode In Zone mode the instrument will update the control settings each time the setpoint crosses into a new zone If you change the settings manually the controller will use the new setting while it is in the same zone and will update to the programmed zone table settings when the setpoint crosses into a new zone The zone settings include a Control Input parameter for each temperature zone This allows a different feedback sensor to be used for each temperature zone For exam ple a diode sensor can be used while cooling down from room temperature to 10 K at which point the Control Input could be switched to a Cernox sensor for tempera tures under 10 K To illustrate how the control parameters are updated in Zone mode consider the zone settings from the table below Starting from room temperature about 300 K and setting a setpoint of 2 K with Setpoint Ramping turned On the setpoint will begin ramping at the current setpoint Ramp Rate then once the setpo
233. mputer Interface Operation Input Alarm Parameter Query ALARM lt input gt term a lt input gt A D lt off on gt lt high value gt lt low value gt lt deadband gt lt latch enable gt lt audible gt lt visible gt term n tnnnnnn tnnnnnn nnnnnn h n n refer to command for description Input Alarm Status Query ALARMST input term a lt input gt A D D1 D5 for 3062 option high state gt lt low state term n n lt high state gt 0 Off 1 On lt low state gt 0 Off 1 On Reset Alarm Status Command ALMRST term Clears both the high and low status of all alarms including latching alarms Monitor Out Parameter Command ANALOG lt output gt lt input gt lt units gt lt high value gt lt low value gt lt polarity gt term n n n tnnnnn tnnnnn n lt output gt Unpowered analog output to configure 3 or 4 lt input gt Specifies which input to monitor O none 1 Input A 2 Input B 3 InputC 4 Input D 5 Input D2 6 Input D3 7 Input D4 8 Input D5 for 3062 option lt units gt Specifies the units on which to base the output voltage 1 kelvin 2 Celsius 3 sensor units lt high value gt If output mode is Monitor Out this parameter represents the data at which the Monitor Out reaches 100 output Entered in the units designated by the lt units gt parmeter Refer to OUTMODE command If output mode is Monitor Out this parameter represents the data at which the analog outp
234. n ual output or heater range Setting an inappropriate heater range is potentially dan gerous to some loads so the Model 336 does not automate that step of the tuning process When Autotune is initiated step changes are applied to the setpoint and the system response is observed to determine the best tuning parameters The Autotuning message appears when autotuning and the display is configured to show the output of the control loop being tuned The message blinks to indicate that the algorithm is still processing and displays the current stage of the process such as Stage 3 of 7 If the tuning process completes successfully then the message is removed and the new PID parameters are configured If the algorithm fails the mes sage stops blinking to indicate that it is no longer processing and a failure message appears to indicate which stage of the process failed There are situations where Autotune is not the answer The algorithm can be fooled when cooling systems are very fast very slow have a large thermal lag or have a non linear relationship between heater power and load temperature If a load can reach a new setpoint in under 10 sec with an appropriate I setting 500 the cooling system is too fast for Autotuning Systems with a very small thermal mass can be this fast Adding mass is a solution but is unappealing to users who need the speed for fast cycle times Manual tuning is not difficult on these systems because new Sett
235. n Windows XP 1 Connectthe USB cable from the Model 336 to the computer 2 Turnon the Model 336 3 When the Found New Hardware wizard appears select Yes this time only and click Next 4 SelectInstallthe software automatically Recommended and click Next 5 The Found New Hardware wizard should automatically connect to Windows Update and install the drivers If the Found New Hardware wizard is unable to connect to Windows Update or find the drivers a message saying Cannot Install this Hardware will be displayed Click the Cancel button and refer to section 6 3 3 3 to install the driver from the web 6 When the Found New Hardware wizard finishes installing the driver a confirma tion message stating the wizard has finished installing the software for Lake Shore Model 336 Temperature Controller will appear Click Finish to com plete the installation 6 3 3 3 Installing the Driver From the Web The Model 336 USB driver is available on the Lake Shore website To install the driver it must be downloaded from the website and extracted Use the procedure in section 6 3 3 1 through section 6 3 3 4 to download extract and install the driver using Windows 7 Vista and XP 6 3 3 3 1 Download the driver 1 Locate the Model 336 USB driver on the downloads page on the Lake Shore website 2 Right click on the USB driver download link and select save target link as 3 Save the driver to a convenient place and take note a
236. n the power supply manual during setup Consider the following suggestions for protecting the power supply and heater load Short circuits are common in cryogenic lead wiring If the power supply does not specify that it is short circuit protected the power output should be wired witha fuse in series to prevent damage Unipolar power supplies are designed to use a positive programming voltage and some can be damaged if the programming voltage is negative Be careful when wiring the system to maintain the correct polarity Also never set the control out put of the Model336 to bipolar mode Some power supplies can be damaged if there is a programming voltage present at their input when they are turned off This can happen if the Model 336 and power supply use a different source of line power or are turned on and off individ ually It can be avoided if the two instruments share a switched power strip The heater and wiring in the system must be rated for both the maximum current and maximum voltage provided by the power supply The Model 336 can be set to warm up using less than full power if the load will not tolerate the full power of the supply 3 8 5 Powering Outputs 3 and 4 Using an External Power Supply 41 3 8 5 3 Connecting to the Model 336 The voltage programming cable attaches to the removable terminal block on the rear panel of the Model 336 FIGURE 3 10 Output number and polarity of the output leads are indicated on the silk screen
237. nd Opera tion Event Register and terminates all pending operations Clears the interface but notthe controller The related controller command is RST Event Status Enable Register Command ESE bit weighting term nnn Each bit is assigned a bit weighting and represents the enable disable mask of the corresponding event flag bit in the Standard Event Status Register To enable an event flag bit send the command ESE with the sum ofthe bit weighting for each desired bit Referto section 6 2 5 for a list of event flags To enable event flags O 4 and 7 send the command ESE 145 term 145 is the sum of the bit weighting for each bit Bit Bit Weighting Event Name 0 1 OPC 2 4 QXE 4 16 EXE 5 32 CME 7 128 PON Total 181 Event Status Enable Register Query KESE term lt bit weighting gt term nnn Referto section 6 2 5 fora list of event flags Standard Event Status Register Query XESR term lt bit weighting gt nnn The integer returned represents the sum of the bit weighting of the event flag bits in the Standard Event Status Register Refer to section 6 2 5 fora list of event flags Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 126 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation KIDN Input Returned Format Example KOPC Input Remarks KOPC Returned Remarks KRST Input Remarks KSRE Input Format Remarks Example SRE Input Returned Format Model 336 Temperature Contr
238. nel Changes ccc ceee cece eect e eee eeeeeee tenes 56 4 4 8 4 Channel Scanner Input Setup Model 3062 Only ee ees 56 4 4 8 1 Type and Range Selection sss 56 4 4 8 2 Update Rate eee e enn 57 44 9 Curve Selection tet a ERR E Ka uua Sede SS 57 4410 Eternal e i ats 58 4 4 11 NputName cleaner 60 4 4 12 Temperature Limit cece eee eee e e e en 60 4 4 13 Preferred Units sc esses e eer ee RE qug ed rris 60 4414 MI Mii ret pa Ert Rx le Ru E ER EE MIRA RUE EE 60 Output and Control Setup 22 rrr ee e e eT a 60 4 5 T Heater OUEDUIS serinin epR rale 61 4 5 1 1 Max Current and Heater Resistance cece eee ee ee 61 45 111 User Max Current scita 61 4 5 1 2 PowerUp Enable ssssssssssssssssse a aia EA 63 4 5 1 3 Heater Out Display cece ee eect teen enn e ee eed 63 4 5 1 4 Output Modes cece cence ee een 63 4 5 1 4 1 Closed Loop PID Mode 63 45 L42 Z0ONEMOdE para 64 4 5 1 4 3 Open Loop Mode m 64 4 5 1 5 Control Parameters 0 cece cece REEERE AKEE eens 64 4 51 51 Control PUE enn aa 65 4 5 1 5 2 Proportional P c cece cece cece cece eee e eee eee ee 65 A ER RR e Ra 65 4 5 1 5 4 Derivative D cece cece cece eee e eee e eee eee aee 66 4 5 1 5 5 Manual OUtput cee ee 66 4 5 1 5 6 NN 67 4 5 1 5 7 S
239. ness are observed remove the victim to fresh air If breathing is difficult give oxygen If breathing has stopped give artificial respira tion Call a physician immediately If exposure to cryogenic liquids or cold gases occurs restore tissue to normal body temperature 98 6 F as rapidly as possible then protect the injured tissue from fur ther damage and infection Call a physician immediately Rapid warming of the affected parts is best achieved by bathing it in warm water The water temperature should not exceed 105 F 40 C and under no circumstances should the frozen part be rubbed either before or after rewarming If the eyes are involved flush them thor oughly with warm water for at least 15 minutes In case of massive exposure remove clothing while showering with warm water The patient should not drink alcohol or smoke Keep warm and rest Call a physician immediately 171 Appendix C Curve Tables C 1 General Standard curve tables included in the Model 336 temperature controller are as fol lows ESC N CN Curve 01 DT 470 Silicon Diode Table D 1 Curve 02 DT 670 Silicon Diode Table D 2 Curve 03 8 04 DT 500 D E1 Silicon Diode Table D 3 Curve 06 amp 07 PT 100 1000 Platinum RTD Table D 4 Curve 08 RX 102A Rox Table D 5 Curve 09 RX 202A Rox Table D 6 Curve 12 Type K Thermocouple Table D 7 Curve 13 Type E Thermocouple Table D 8 Curve 14 Type T Thermocouple Table
240. ng cali brated the correct standard curve must be selected When calibration is complete you must assign the new curve to an input The Model 336 does not automatically assign the newly generated curve to either input Calibration data points must be entered into the Model 336 These calibration points are normally measured at easily obtained temperatures like the boiling point of cryo gens Each algorithm operates with 1 2 or 3 calibration points The range of improved accuracy increases with more points There are two ways to get SoftCal calibration data points you can record the response of an unknown sensor at well controlled temperatures or you can purchase a SoftCal calibrated sensor from Lake Shore There are advantages to both methods m User when you can provide stable calibration temperatures with the sensor installed SoftCal calibration eliminates errors in the sensor measurement as well as the sensor Thermal gradients instrument accuracy and other measure ment errors can be significant to some users Calibration can be no better than user supplied data m Purchased Lake Shore sensors with SoftCal calibration include a set of calibra tion points in the calibration report The SoftCal calibration points are gener ated in a controlled calibration facility at Lake Shore for best accuracy The calibration points can be entered into the Model 336 so it can generate a curve If the CalCurve service is purchase
241. nks to indicate that the algorithm is still processing If an error occurs the status message stops blinking and displays an error message containing the stage in which Autotune failed See TABLE 5 1 for a description of the Autotune stages reasons for failure and possible solutions When the process completes suc cessfully the previous P I and D parameters are replaced by the newly acquired val ues To cancel the Autotune process press Autotune and choos Yes to the cancel Autotune prompt Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 74 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation Purpose for Stage Reason for Failure Possible Solution Curve not assigned to Input heater not Ensure curve is assigned to input heateris on and 0 Testing initial conditions Determine if Autotuning can be initiated on or temperature not within sii temperature is within 5 Kof setpoint 5 Kof setpoint Ensures that temperature is not still A Allow the temperature to ne ge Temperature was moving too much to SR 1 Waiting for temperature to settle settling toward the setpoint or drifting settle more before initiating 2 properly Autotune away from the setpoint Autotune Ensures that there is no temperature ms e st am pe May indicate that the initial P value is too NoN 2 Testing for temperature stability oscillation or excessive noise in the Use a smaller initial P value temperature reading high Observing system response to
242. no change below 30 K 0 25 K 30 K to lt 60 K 0 15 K 60 K to lt 345 K 0 25 K 345 K to lt 375 K 1 0K 375to 475K TABLE 5 6 2 point SoftCal calibration accuracy for DT 470 SD 13 diode sensors Three point SoftCal calibrations are performed at liquid helium 4 2 K liquid nitro gen 77 35 K and room temperature 305 K Accuracy for the DT 470 SD 13 diode sensor is as follows 0 5K 2 Kto lt 30 K 0 25 K 30 K to lt 60 K 0 15 K 60 K to lt 345 K 0 25 K 345 Kto lt 375 K 1 0K 375to475K TABLE 5 7 3 point SoftCal calibration accuracy for DT 470 SD 13 diode sensors Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 90 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation 5 10 3 SoftCal With Platinum Sensors 5 10 4 SoftCal Accuracy With Platinum Sensors Model 336 Temperature Controller The platinum sensor is a well accepted temperature standard because of its consis tent and repeatable temperature response above 30 K SoftCal gives platinum sen sors better accuracy than their nominal matching to the DIN 43760 curve SoftCal Point One SoftCal Point Two SoftCal Point Three Liquid nitrogen Room temperature High temperature boiling point point point 77 35 K 305 K 480 K y y q AA H 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 50 100 K 200 325 K 400 600 K FIGURE 5 9 Acceptable temperature range for platinum SoftCal sensors One two orthree calibration data points c
243. nput Format Remarks Example LOCK Input Returned Format MDAT Input Format Returned Format Remarks MNMXRST Input Remarks Model 336 Temperature Controller CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Kelvin Reading Query KRDG lt input gt term a lt input gt option lt kelvin value gt term nnnnnn Also see the RDGST command Specifies which input to query A D D1 D5 for 3062 Front Panel LEDS Command LEDS off on term n off on O LEDs Off 1 LEDs On If setto O front panel LEDs will not be functional Function can be used when display brightness is a problem LED O term turns all front panel LED functionality off Front Panel LEDS Query LEDS term off on term n referto command for description Front Panel Keyboard Lock Command LOCK state code term n nnn lt state gt O Unlocked 1 Locked lt code gt Specifies lock out code Valid entries are 000 999 Locks out all front panel entries except pressing the All Off key to immediately turn off all heater outputs Refer to section 4 7 LOCK 1 123 term enables keypad lock and sets the code to 123 Front Panel Keyboard Lock Query LOCK term lt state gt lt code gt term n nnn refer to command for description Minimum Maximum Data Query MDAT lt input gt term a lt input gt option lt min value gt lt max value gt term tnnnnnn tnnnnnn Returns the minimum and maximum
244. ntrol Setpoint is used to set the desired tar get temperature and Heater Range is used to turn on the control output as well as to set the power range of the output These parameters are described in detail in section 4 5 1 5 1 to section 4 5 1 5 8 4 5 1 HeaterOutputs 65 4 5 1 5 1 Control Input For closed loop control Closed Loop PID Zone Warm Up Supply a control loop must be created A control loop consists of a control output for controlling the temperature and an input for feedback into the control algorithm Use the Control Input parame terto assign the control input sensorto the desired output Inthe Monitor Out mode the Control Input parameter is used to determine the source ofthe output voltage In the Open Loop mode the Control Input parameter can be set simply for convenience in order to easily access the associated output s Manual Out put and Heater Range parameters using the Direct Operation keys Refer to section 4 2 1 1 for details on Direct Operation keys Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1 2 3 or 4 gt Control Input None Input A Input B Input C Input D Default Output 1 gt Control Input Input A Output 2 Control Input Input B Output 3 4 gt Off Interface Command HTRSET 4 5 1 5 2 Proportional P The proportional parameter also called gain isthe P partofthe PID control equation It has a range of O to 1000 with a resolution of 0 1 The default value is 50 Entera value greater
245. nu Navigation Output Setup gt Output 1 or 2 gt User Max Current gt 0 1 A to 2 A Default Output 1 gt User Max Current gt 2 A Output 2 gt User Max Current gt 1 414 A 4 5 1 HeaterOutputs 63 4 5 1 2 Power Up Enable All configuration parameters of the Model 336 can be retained through a power cycle Some systems require that the Heater Range is turned off when power is restored The power up enable feature allows you to choose whether or not the heater range is turned off each time the instrument power is cycled Set the Power Up Enable param eter to Off to ensure that the heater range is turned off on power up Set it to On to return the Heater Range to its previous setting when power is restored Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1 2 3 or 4 gt Power Up Enable Off or On Default Off Interface Command OUTMODE 4 5 1 3 Heater Out Display The heater output can be displayed in units of percent of full scale current or percent of full scale power The heater output display on the front panel is displayed in these units and the Manual Output parameter is set in these units Available full scale cur rent and power are determined by the heater resistance max current setting and heater range The heater output display is a calculated value intended to aid in system setup and tun ing It is not a measured value and may not accurately represent actual power in the heater Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1
246. o On anytime the Sensor Type parameter is changed to PTC RTD or NTC RTD Menu Navigation Input Setup nput A B C or D gt Current Reversal gt Off or On Default On Interface Command INTYPE Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 54 CHAPTER 4 Operation 4 4 6 Thermocouple Sensor Input Setup Model 3060 Only Model 336 Temperature Controller When a Model 3060 Thermocouple option is installed in the Model 336 a setting of Thermocouple becomes available under the Sensor Type parameter in the Input Setup menu The standard diode RTD sensor inputs can still be used when the Ther mocouple option is installed but the Thermocouple and standard inputs cannot be used simultaneously Refer to section 7 6 1 to install the Model 3060 Thermocouples include a variety of commercial such as E K T and specialty types such as cryogenic Chromel AuFe Standard curves are included in the Model 336 for the types listed in TABLE 4 7 Other types can be used as long as an appropriate tem perature response curve is loaded as a user curve Representative thermocouple spec ifications are given in TABLE 1 2 The Model 336 provides one thermocouple range and no excitation because thermocouples do not require it Internal room tempera ture compensation is included for convenience section 4 4 6 2 and should be cali brated before use Room temperature compensation is enabled by default but can be turned off if external compensat
247. o configure 1 or 2 lt mode gt Specifies relay mode 0 Off 1 On 2 Alarms lt input alarm gt Specifies which input alarm activates the relay when the relay is in alarm mode A D D1 D5 for 3062 option lt alarm type gt Specifies the input alarm type that activates the relay when the relay is in alarm mode 0 Low alarm 1 High Alarm 2 BothAlarms RELAY 1 2 B O term relay 1 activates when Input B low alarm activates Relay Control Parameter Query RELAY relay number gt term n relay number Specifies which relay to query 1 or 2 lt mode gt lt input alarm gt lt alarm type term n a n refer to command for description Relay Status Query RELAYST lt relay number gt term n lt relay number gt Specifies which relay to query 1 or 2 lt status gt term n 0 Off 1 On Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 142 SCAL Input Format Remarks Example SETP Input Format Example Remarks SETP Input Format Returned Format SRDG Input Format Returned Format Remarks Model 336 Temperature Controller CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Generate SoftCal Curve Command SCAL lt std gt lt dest gt lt SN gt lt T1 value gt lt Ul value gt lt T2 value gt lt U2 value gt lt T3 value gt lt U3 value gt term n nn S 10 nnnnnn tnnnnnn nnnnnn tnnnnnn nnnnnn tnnnnnn lt std gt Specifies the standard curve from which to generate a SoftCal
248. o not section 6 2 4 8 The response toa query will be a decimal value that corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits in the register TABLE 6 2 The actual query commands are described later through out section 6 2 4 Position B7 B6 BS B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Decimal 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Weighting 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Example If bits 0 2 and 4 are set a query of the register will return a decimal value of 21 1 4 16 TABLE 6 2 Binary weighting ofan 8 bit register 6 2 4 7 Programming Registers The only registers that may be programmed by the user are the enable registers All other registers in the status system are read only registers To program an enable register send a decimal value that corresponds to the desired binary weighted sum of all bits in the register TABLE 6 2 The actual commands are described throughout section 6 2 4 6 2 5 Status System Detail Status Register Sets 99 6 2 4 8 Clearing Registers The methods to clear each register are detailed in TABLE 6 3 Condition registers None Registers are not latched Event registers Standard event status register ESR clears Standard Event uery the event register Query 8 Status Register Operation event register Send CLS CLS clears both registers Power on instrument Enable registers Write Otothe ESE 0 clears Standard Event Standard Event Status Enable Register Operation Event Enable Registe
249. oad may have very large temperature changes that take a long time to settle out Delicate loads can even be damaged by too much power Often there is little information on the cooling power of the cooling system at the desired setpoint If this is the case try the following allow the load to cool completely with the heater off Set Manual Output to 50 while in Open Loop control mode Turn the heater to the lowest range and write down the temperature rise if any Select the next highest heater range and continue the process until the load warms up to room temperature Do not leave the system unattended the heater may have to be turned off manually to prevent overheating If the load never reaches room tempera ture some adjustment may be needed in heater resistance or load The list of heater range versus load temperature is a good reference for selecting the proper heater range It is common for systems to require two or more heater ranges for good control over their full temperature Lower heater ranges are normally needed for lower temperature The Model 336 is of no use controlling at or below the temperature reached when the heater was off Many systems can be tuned to control within a degree or two above that temperature The proportional setting is so closely tied to heater range that they can be thought of as fine and course adjustments of the same setting An appropriate heater range must be known before moving on to the proportional s
250. ol If dif ficulty is encountered it is recommended to gain experience with the system at tem peratures several degrees away from the limit and gradually approach it in small steps Keep an eye on temperature sensitivity Sensitivity not only affects control stability but it also contributes to the overall control system gain The large changes in sensi tivity that make some sensors so useful may make it necessary to retune the control loop more often For closed loop operation the Model 336 temperature controller uses an algorithm called PID control The control equation for the PID algorithm has three variable terms proportional P integral I and derivative D See FIGURE 2 2 Changing these variables for best control of a system is called tuning The PID equation in the Model 336 is Heater Output Pl 1 e dt D where the error e is defined as e Setpoint Feedback Reading Proportional is discussed in section 2 7 1 Integral is discussed in section 2 7 2 Deriv ative is discussed in section 2 7 3 Finally the manual heater output is discussed in section 2 7 4 The Proportional term also called gain must have a value greater than 0 for the con trol loop to operate The value of the proportional term is multiplied by the error e which is defined as the difference between the setpoint and feedback temperatures to generate the proportional contribution to the output Output P Pe If propor tional is ac
251. oller Identification Query XIDN term lt manufacturer gt lt model gt lt instrument serial gt lt option serial lt firmware version gt term s 4 5 8 5 7 s 7 n n lt manufacturer gt Manufacturer ID lt model gt Instrument model number lt instrument serial Instrument serial number lt option card serial Option card serial number firmware version Instrument firmware version LSCI MODEL336 1234567 1234567 1 0 Operation Complete Command XOPC term Generates an Operation Complete event in the Event Status Register upon comple tion of all pending selected device operations Send it as the last command in a com mand string Operation Complete Query XOPC term 1 term Places a 1 in the controller output queue upon completion of all pending selected device operations Send asthe last command in a command string Not the same as OPC Reset Instrument Command RST term Sets controller parameters to power up settings Service Request Enable Register Command SRE lt bit weighting gt term nnn Each bit has a bit weighting and represents the enable disable mask ofthe corre sponding status flag bitin the Status Byte Register To enable a status flag bit send the command SRE with the sum of the bit weighting for each desired bit Refer to section 6 2 6 for a list of status flags To enable status flags 4 5 and 7 send the command SRE 208 term 208 is the sum of the bit weighting for each bit
252. ontroller LakeShore undertakes no responsibility that the products will be fit for any particular purpose for which you may be buying the Products Any implied warranty is limited in duration to the warranty period No oral or written information or advice given by the Company its Agents or Employees shall create a warranty or in any way increase the scope of this limited warranty Some countries states or provinces do not allow limitations on an implied warranty so the above limita tion or exclusion might not apply to you This warranty gives you spe cific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country to country state to state or province to province 8 Further with regard to the United Nations Convention for Interna tional Sale of Goods CISC if CISG is found to apply in relation to this agreement which is specifically disclaimed by Lake Shore then this limited warranty excludes warranties that a the Product is fit for the purpose for which goods of the same description would ordinarily be used b the Product is fit for any particular purpose expressly or impliedly made known to Lake Shore at the time of the conclusion of the contract c the Product is contained or packaged in a manner usual for such goods or in a manner adequate to preserve and protect such goods where it is shipped by someone other than a carrier hired by Lake Shore 9 Lake Shore disclaims any warranties of technological value or
253. or Location 2 4 3 Thermal Conductivity Model 336 Temperature Controller There are two versions of the Curve Handler application The fully featured version is a 32 bit Microsoft Windows application that must be installed ona Windows PC This version works with the IEEE 488 and USB computer interfaces on the Model 336 and allows you to manipulate the temperature curves directly in the pro gram window This version will also work with all existing Lake Shore temperature controller and temperature monitor instruments The Windows version of the Curve Handler application is available free of charge from the Lake Shore website at www lakeshore com The second version of Curve Handler is written in the Java programming language andis available through the Ethernet web interface on the Model 336 This version allows you to copy curves from files to the Model 336 and vice versa but it does not allow manipulation of curve data and only works using the Ethernet interface Refer to section 6 4 4 for details on connecting to the web interface and opening the embedded Curve Handler application This section highlights some of the important elements of proper sensor installation For more detailed information Lake Shore sensors are shipped with installation instructions that coverthat specific sensortype and package The Lake Shore Tem perature Measurement and Control Catalog includes an installation section as well To further he
254. or changing control loop parameters Press any active keys while the temporary display mode is active to reset the timeout period of the tempo rary display Press Escape or the same temporary display key again to manually return the display to the configured display mode Press and hold a temporary display key until an audible beep is heard about 3 s to cause the configured display mode to change to the input display mode associated with that key Menu Navigation Display Setup Display Mode Input A B C D Each input can also be accessed by pressing and holding A B C or D Interface Command DISPLAY 4 3 1 DisplayModes 49 4 3 1 4 Custom Display Mode The custom display mode provides the abilityto customize the displayed front panel information to your preference As with the input display modes the custom display mode shows sensor input information in the top half of the screen and control loop information in the bottom half The sensor input information can be customized to display two large character sensor readings with names four large character sensor readings without names or eight small character format sensor readings without names Each displayed reading can use any sensor as the input and can be displayed in units of kelvin Celsius sensor min or max Menu Navigation Display Setup Display Mode gt Custom Interface Command DISPLAY m Locations depending on the Number of Displays parameter there can be any
255. or controlling temperatures near room temperature since they have both heating and cooling capabilities Since thermoelectric devices are solid state they are free of the mechanical vibrations associated with mechanical coolers Some thermoelectric coolers in a stacked configuration are capable of cool ing devices down to cryogenic temperatures about 100 K These are often used to cool and maintain the temperatures of charge coupled device CCD sensors Since thermoelectric devices are capable of both heating and cooling they require a controller that has a bipolar output to take full advantage of this The Model 336 can be configured for bipolar control on Output 3 or 4 Closed loop PID control works the same in bipolar mode as it does in unipolar mode except that the output can go nega tive instead of stopping at zero Refer to section 5 4 to setup Output 2 in bipolar mode The Model 336 cannot drive a thermoelectric device directly Most thermoelectric devices require high current approximately 3 A and low voltage typically 10 V Output 3 or 4 are capable of 1 mA An external power amplifier is necessary to boost the power up to a level that will effectively control the thermoelectric device Refer to section 3 8 5 for more information on using an external power amplifier with Output 2 3 1 General 31 Chapter 3 Installation 3 1 General 3 2 Inspection and Unpacking 3 3 Rear Panel Definition This chapter provides g
256. ore than one sensor prevents the sen sor excitation current sources from operating Shielding the sensor lead cable is important to keep external noise from entering the measurement A shield is most effective when it is near the measurement potential so the Model 336 offers a shield at measurement common The shield of the sensor cable should be connected to the shield pin of the input connector The shields should not be connected to earth ground on the instrument chassis One shield should be connected to the cryostat s ground as long as it is near earth ground Connecting at more than one point will cause a ground loop which adds noise to the measurement The shells of the input connectors are at the same potential as the shield pin on the Model 336 Older Lake Shore controllers are not configured this way This section describes the diode resistor sensor inputs Lake Shore sensors are shipped with instructions that indicate which sensor leads are which It is important to follow these instructions for plus and minus leads polarity as well as voltage and current when applicable Diode sensors do not operate in the wrong polarity They look like an open circuit to the instrument Two lead resistors can operate with any lead arrangement and the sensor instructions may not specify Four lead resistors can be more dependent on lead arrangement Follow any speci fied lead assignment for four lead resistors Mixing leads could give a reading tha
257. ote operation The first is the IEEE 488 interface described in section 6 2 The second is the USB interface described in section 6 3 The third isthe Ethernet interface described in section 6 4 The three interfaces share a common set of commands detailed in section 6 6 Only one ofthe interfaces can be used at a time The IEEE 488 interface is an instrumentation bus with hardware and programming standards that simplify instrument interfacing The Model 336 IEEE 488 interface complies with the IEEE 488 2 standard and incorporates its functional electrical and mechanical specifications unless otherwise specified in this manual All instruments on the interface bus perform one or more ofthe interface functions of Talker Listener or Bus Controller A Talker transmits data onto the bus to other devices A Listener receives data from other devices through the bus The Bus Control ler designates to the devices on the bus which function to perform The Model 336 performs the functions of Talker and Listener but it cannot be a Bus Controller The Bus Controller is the digital computer that tells the Model 336 which functions to perform TABLE 6 1 defines the IEEE 488 capabilities and subsets for the Model 336 see ars SH1 Source handshake capability RL1 Complete remote local capability DC1 Full device clear capability DTO No device trigger capability Co No system controller capability T5 Basic Talker seria
258. ou to edit curves at any user curve location Stan Edit Curve 5 9 1 dard curves cannot be changed View Curve allows you to view any curve at any curve location No View Curve y y y 5 9 2 curves can be changed Erase Curve allows you to delete a curve from any user curve location Erase Curve 5 9 3 Standard curves cannot be erased Copy Curve allows you to copy a curve from any location to any user Copy Curve py y y cas duri aieo de E 5 9 4 curve location Curves cannot be copied into standard curve locations SoftCal allows you to create a new temperature curve from a standard SoftCal 5 10 curve and known data points entered by the user TABLE 5 5 Front panel curve entry operations Menu Navigation Curve Entry gt Edit Curve View Curve Erase Curve Copy Curve SoftCal Use the Edit Curve operation to enter a new curve or edit an existing user curve Only user curves 21to 59 can be edited Entering the identification parameters associ ated with the curve is as important as entering the breakpoints Curve header param eters are listed in TABLE 5 3 Typical curve parameters for common sensors are listed in TABLE 5 4 Read this section completely and gather all necessary data before beginning the process If the curve you wish to enter has similar parameters as an existing curve first copy the similar curve as described in Section 5 2 4 to a new location then edit the curve to the desired parameters 5 9 1 Ed
259. pdates Refer to the following sections when contacting Lake Shore for application assistance or product service Questions regarding product applications price availability and shipments should be directed to sales Questions regarding instrument calibration or repair should be directed to instrument service Do not return a product to Lake Shore without a Return Material Authorization RMA number section 8 14 2 The Lake Shore Service Department is staffed Monday through Friday between the hours of 8 00 AM and 5 00 PM EST excluding holidays and company shut down days Contact Lake Shore Service through any of the means listed below However the most direct and efficient means of contacting is to complete the online service request form at http www lakeshore com sup serf html Provide a detailed description of the problem and the required contact information You will receive a response within 24 hours or the next business day in the event ofweekends or holidays 8 14 2 Return of Equipment 8 14 3 RMA Valid Period 8 14 4 Shipping Charges 8 14 5 Restocking Fee 8 14 2 ReturnofEquipment 165 Ifyou wish to contact Service or Sales by mail or telephone use the following Lake Shore Cryotronics Instrument Service Department Mailing address p 575 McCorkle Blvd Westerville Ohio USA 43082 8888 Emailaddress sales lakeshore com Sales service lakeshore com Instrument Service Telephone 614 891 2244 l Sales l 6
260. pecifications table Sensor dependent refer to Input Specifications table 10 rdg s on each input 5 rdg s when configured as 100 kO NTC RTD with reversal on The maximum update rate for a scanned input is 10 rdg s distributed among the enabled channels Any channel configured as 100 kQ RTD with reversal on changes the update rate for the channel to 5 rdg s Automatically selects appropriate NTC RTD or PTC RTD range Room for 39 200 point CalCurves or user curves Improves accuracy of DT 470 diode to 0 25 K from 30 K to 375 K improves accuracy of platinum RTDs to 0 25 K from 70 K to 325 K stored as user curves Maximum and minimum Averages 2 to 64 input readings 1 3 4 Control There are 4 control outputs 1 3 4 1 Heater Outputs Outputs 1 and 2 1 3 4 Control Control type Update rate Tuning Control stability PID control settings Proportional gain Integral reset Derivative rate Manual output Zone control Setpoint rampin Closed loop digital PID with manual heater output or open loop 10 s Autotune one loop at a time PID PID zones Sensor dependent see Input Specifications table 0 to 1000 with 0 1 setting resolution 1 to 1000 1000 s with 0 1 setting resolution 1 to 200 with 1 resolution Oto 100 with 0 01 setting resolution 10 temperature zones with P I D manual heater out heater range control channel ramp rate 0 1 K min to 100 K min 25 O setting 500 setting
261. pecifies which output to query 1 4 Sensor Units Input Reading Query SRDG input term a input Specifies which input to query A D D1 D5 for 3062 option sensor units value term tnnnnnn Also see the RDGST command TEMP Input Returned Format Remarks TLIMIT Input Format Example Remarks TLIMIT Input Format Returned Format TUNEST Input Returned Format Remarks 6 6 1 InterfaceCommands 143 Thermocouple Junction Temperature Query TEMP term lt junction temperature gt term nnnnn Temperature is in kelvin This query returns the temperature of the ceramic thermo couple block used in the room temperature compensation calculation Temperature Limit Command TLIMIT lt input gt lt limit gt term a nnnn lt input gt Specifies which input to configure A D D1 D5 for 3062 option lt limit gt The temperature limit in kelvin for which to shut down all control outputs when exceeded A temperature limit of zero turns the temperature limit feature off for the given sensor input TLIMIT B 450 term if the temperature of the sensor on Input B exceeds 450 K all control outputs will be turned off Atemperature limit setting of O K turns the temperature limit feature off Temperature Limit Query TLIMIT lt input gt term a lt input gt Specifies which input to query A D D1 D5 for 3062 option lt limit gt term nnnn refer to command for description
262. peration Control Loop PID Values Query PID lt output gt term n lt output gt Specifies which output s control loop to query 1 or 2 lt P value l value gt lt D value gt term nnnnn nnnnn nnnn referto command for description Control Setpoint Ramp Parameter Command RAMP lt output gt lt off on gt lt rate value gt term n n nnnn lt output gt Specifies which output s control loop to configure 1 or 2 lt off on gt Specifies whether ramping is O Off or 1 On lt rate value gt Specifies setpoint ramp rate in kelvin per minute from 0 1 to 100 The rate is always positive but will respond to ramps up or down A rate of 0 is interpreted as infinite and will therefore respond as if setpoint ramping were off RAMP 1 1 10 5 term when Output 1 setpoint is changed ramp the current set point to the target setpoint at 10 5 K minute Control loop settings are assigned to outputs which results in the settings being applied to the control loop formed by the output and its control input Control Setpoint Ramp Parameter Query RAMP lt output gt term n lt output gt Specifies which output s control loop to query 1 or 2 lt off on gt lt rate value gt term n nnnn refer to command for description Control Setpoint Ramp Status Query RAMPST lt output gt term n lt output gt lt ramp status gt term n lt ramp status gt Specifies which output s control loop to query 1 or 2
263. ption provides support for up to two thermocouple inputs by adding thermocouple functionality to inputs C and D Sensor inputs feature a high resolution 24 bit analog to digital converter each input has its own current source providing fast settling times All four sensor inputs are optically isolated from other circuits to reduce noise and to provide repeatable sensor measurements Current reversal eliminates thermal electromotive force EMF errors in resistance sensors Nine excitation currents facilitate temperature measurement and control down to 300 mK using appropriate negative temperature coefficient NTC RTDs Autorange mode automatically scales excitation current in NTC RTDs to reduce self heating at low temperatures as sensor resistance changes by many orders of magnitude Temperatures down to 1 4 K can be measured and con trolled using silicon or GaAlAs diodes Software selects the appropriate excitation cur rent and signal gain levels when the sensortype is entered via the instrument front panel The unique zone setting feature automatically switches sensor inputs enabling you to measure temperatures from 300 mK to over 1 500 K without inter rupting your experiment The Model 336 includes standard temperature sensor response curves for silicon diodes platinum RTDs ruthenium oxide RTDs and thermocouples Non volatile memory can also store up to 39 200 point CalCurves for Lake Shore calibrated tem perature sensors or user curves A
264. put Noise 3 8 5 Powering Outputs 3 and 4 Using an External Power Supply 3 8 2 HeaterOutputConnectors 39 Dual banana jacks on the rear panel of the instrument are used for connecting wires to the heater outputs Two standard dual banana plug mating connectors are included in the connector kit shipped with the instrument This is a common jack and additional mating connectors can be purchased from local electronic suppliers or from Lake Shore as P N 106 009 The heater is connected between the HI and LO terminals OUTPUT 1 HEATER GND OUTPUT 2 HEATER HI LO HI LO nmm 100 W MAX 50 W MAX FIGURE 3 9 Rear panel showing heater output connectors Heater output current is what determines the size gauge of wire needed to connect the heater The maximum current that can be sourced from heater Output 1 is 2 A When less current is needed to power a cooling system it can be limited with range settings When setting up a temperature control system the lead wire for the heater must be capable of carrying a continuous current that is greater than the maximum current Wire manufacturers recommend 26 AWG or larger wire to carry 2 A of current but there is little advantage in using wire smaller than 20 AWG to 22 AWG outside the cryostat Inside the cryostat smaller gauge wire is often desirable It is recommended to use twisted heater leads Large changes in heater current can induce noise in measurement leads and twisting reduces the
265. r Service Request Enable Register enable register Status Enable register Power on instrument Status byte There are no commands that directly clear the status byte as the bits are non latching to clear individual summary bits clear the event register that corresponds to the summary bit sending CLS will clear all event registers which in turn clears the status byte If bit 5 ESB of the status byte is set send ESR to read the standard event status register and bit 5 will clear Power on instrument 6 2 5 Status System Detail Status Register Sets TABLE 6 3 Register clear methods As shown in FIGURE 6 1 there are two register sets in the status system of the Model 336 Standard Event Status Register and Operation Event Register 6 2 5 1 Standard Event Status Register Set The Standard Event Status Register reports the following interface related instru ment events power on detected command syntax errors command execution errors query errors operation complete Any or all of these events may be reported in the standard event summary bit through the enable register FIGURE 6 2 The Standard Event Status Enable command ESE programs the enable register and the query command ESE reads it ESR reads and clears the Standard Event Status Register The used bits of the Standard Event Register are described as follows m Power On PON Bit 7 this bit is set to indicate an instrument off on tr
266. r the Remote Local key The Remote Local key will toggle between remote and local operation During remote operations the remote annunciator LED will be illumi nated and operations from the keypad will be disabled The Model 336 supports several command types These commands are divided into four groups 1 Bus Control section 6 2 3 1 a Universal m Uniline m Multiline b Addressed bus control 2 Common section 6 2 3 2 3 Device Specific section 6 2 3 3 4 Message Strings section 6 2 3 4 6 2 3 1 Bus Control Commands A bus control command can either be a universal or an addressed bus control A uni versal command addresses all devices on the bus Universal commands include uni line and multiline commands A uniline command message asserts only a single signal line The Model 336 recognizes two of these messages from the Bus Controller Remote REN and Interface Clear IFC The Model 336 sends one uniline command Service Request SRQ m REN Remote puts the Model 336 into remote mode m IFC Interface Clear stops current operation on the bus m SRQ Service Request tells the bus controller that the Model 336 needs interface service A multiline command asserts a group of signal lines All devices equipped to imple ment such commands do so simultaneously upon command transmission These commands transmit with the Attention ATN line asserted low The Model 336 recog nizes two multiline commands m LLO
267. r the error exists This will result in a large over shoot or undershoot once the setpoint temperature is reached since the contribu tion will only decrease when the error polarity is reversed Use a ramp rate that keeps the control output from reaching the extremes of 100 or 0 while ramping for optimal results The ramping feature is useful by itself but it is even more powerful when used with other features Setpoint ramps are often used with zone control mode As tempera ture is ramped through different temperature zones control parameters are auto matically selected for best control Ramps can be initiated and status read back using a computer interface During computer controlled experiments the instrument gen erates the setpoint ramp while the computer is busy taking necessary data When anincomplete ramp is shut off the setpoint will remain on the most current setting the reading will not jump to the end of the ramp If the input type or input curve is changed while a ramp is in progress both ramping and the heater are turned off If Ramp is on and the setpoint is set to sensor units the ramping function will remain on but when another setpoint is entered the setpoint goes directly to the new setpoint value To bypass ramping and load the setpoint with the current temperature with the control loop displayed press and hold the Setpoint button for 3 s Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1 or 2 gt Setpoint Ramp
268. r to change sensor inputs Otherwise a setpoint change may cause a control input sensor to be used outside of its usable range which will cause an overload condition to shut down the control loop Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 76 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation Zone 10 Zone 09 Zone 08 Zone 07 Zone 06 Zone 05 Zone 04 Zone 03 Zone 02 Zone 01 Proportional Integral Derivative MHP Output 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 Proportional Integral Derivative MHP Output 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 Proportional Integral Derivative MHP Output 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 Proportional Integral Derivative MHP Output 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 Proportional Integral Derivative MHP Output 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 Proportional Integral Derivative MHP Output 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 Proportional Integral Derivative MHP Output 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 Proportional Integral Derivative MHP Output 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 Proportional Integral Derivative MHP Output 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 Proportional Integral Derivative MHP Output 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 Model 336 Temperature Controller
269. re and Ethernet firm ware The files for these updates can be downloaded from our website To access the firmware updates follow this procedure 1 Goto http www lakeshore com products cryogenic temperature controllers model 336 Pages Overview aspx to download the instrument and Ethernet firmware 2 Enteryour name and email address so that we can keep you updated on any new firmware for your instrument 3 Click the Go to the download bar and follow the prompts that are provided on the screen for you TABLE 8 8 and TABLE 8 9 describe the updates made to the temperature controller in each version Instrument Features added firmware version Closed loop PID and Zone modes available on Outputs 3 and 4 2 Setpoint press and hold loads current temperature to setpoint bypassing ramping 2 2 Capacitance option card support added 2 3 Scanner option card support added 2 5 l Added sensor name units for custom display mode TABLE 8 8 Instrument firmware updates Ethernet ESE firmware version 11 Instrument configuration backup utility added 20 Chart recorder utility added 1 Support for Model 350 added 21 Chart recorder and instrument configuration utilities updated to support Model 3062 scanner option card E 2 Support for Model 224 increased TCP socket connections to 5 and added available TCP socket j connections to Ethernet status page TABLE 8 9 Ethernet firmware u
270. re coefficient is derived by the Model 336 from the first two breakpoints The user does not enter this setting If it is not cor rect check for proper entry of the first two breakpoints A positive coefficient indicates that the sensor signal increases with increasing temperature A negative coefficient indicates that the sensor signal decreases with increasing temperature Temperature response data of a calibrated sensor must be reduced to a table of breakpoints before entering it into the instrument A curve consists of 2 to 200 break points and each breakpoint consists of one value in sensor units and one temperature value in kelvin The Model 336 uses linear interpolation to calculate temperature between breakpoints The instrument will show T OVER or T UNDER on the display if the sensor reading is outside the range of the breakpoints Sensor units are defined by the format setting in TABLE 5 3 Breakpoint setting resolution is six digits in temperature Most temperature values are entered with 0 001 resolution Temperature values of 1000 K and greater can be entered to 0 01 resolution Temperature values below 10 K can be entered with 0 0001 resolution Temperature range for curve entry is OK to 9999 99 K Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 84 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation 5 9 Front Panel Curve Entry Operations 5 9 1 Edit Curve Model 336 Temperature Controller Silicon D
271. re fully qualified name consisting of the host name and the domain name www lakeshore com must be used Hostnames can only contain alpha numeric characters and hyphens but cannot begin or end witha hyphen A hostname can be assigned by a network administrator or if the Model 336 is con nected to a network with Dynamic DNS DDNS capability a DNS entry is automati cally created for it using the Preferred Hostname and Preferred Domain Name parameters and the assigned IP address Menu Navigation Interface gt Modify IP Config Preferred Hostname gt Valid Hostname String If DNS reverse lookup is enabled on the network DNS server and the DNS address parameters are correctly configured the Model 336 will perform a reverse lookup to determine if a hostname is assigned for the Model 336 s configured IP address This will occur regardless of whether the hostname was configured dynamically using DDNS or manually by the network administrator The returned hostname will appear in the Actual Hostname parameter in the View IP Config submenu of the Interface Setup menu Menu Navigation Read Only Interface View IP Config Actual Hostname When using naming systems other than DNS the Model 336 cannot assign the Preferred Hostname or retrieve the Actual Hostname Domain Name A domain is a collection of network devices that are managed according to some common characteristic of its members Domains can contain subdomains which are subset
272. re in this instrument is protected by United States copy right law and international treaty provisions To maintain the war ranty the code contained in the firmware must not be modified Any changes made to the code is at the user s risk Lake Shore will assume no responsibility for damage or errors incurred as result of any changes made to the firmware FIRMWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT continued Under the terms of this agreement you may only use the Model 336 firmware as physically installed in the instrument Archival copies are strictly forbidden You may not decompile disassemble or reverse engineer the firmware If you suspect there are problems with the firmware return the instrument to Lake Shore for repair under the terms of the Limited Warranty specified above Any unauthorized duplication or use of the Model 336 firmware in whole or in part in print orin any other storage and retrieval system is forbidden TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGMENT Many manufacturers and sellers claim designations used to distin guish their products as trademarks Where those designations appear in this manual and Lake Shore was aware of a trademark claim they appear with initial capital letters and the or symbol Alumel and Chromel are trademarks of Conceptech Inc Corporation Apiezon is a registered trademark of M amp I Materials Ltd CalCurve Cernox SoftCal Rox Curve Handler are trade marks of Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc J
273. rear panel connections This is espe O CAUTION cially critical when making sensor to instrument connections 00 2 zl ANNOG RELA 4 TA cou wo i sj E INPUTC INPUTD aon 94 9 e e p ETHERNET IEEE 488 USB FIGURE 3 1 Model 336 rear panel 3 4 Line Input This section describes how to properly connect the Model 336 to line power Please Assembly follow these instructions carefully to ensure proper operation ofthe instrument and the safety of operators 100 120 220 240V 10 Voltage 100 120V_4AT250v 5x20mm 50 60 Hz 250VA MAX 220 240V 4AT250V 5x20mm FIGURE 3 2 Line input assembly 3 4 1 Line Voltage The Model 336 has four different AC line voltage configurations so that it can be oper ated from line power anywhere in the world The nominal voltage and voltage range of each configuration is shown below The recommended setting for 230 V operation is 240 V Nominal Minimum Maximum 100V 90V 110V 120V 108V 132V 220V 198V 242V 240V 216V 264V TABLE 3 1 Line voltage o CAUTIO N AC line voltage is set at Lake Shore but it is good to verify that the AC line voltage indica tor in the fuse drawer window is appropriate before turning the instrument on The instrument may be damaged if turned on with the wrong voltage selected Also remove and verify that the proper fuse is installed before plugging in and turning on the instru ment Refer to se
274. rer version 6 0 and 7 0 6 4 4 1 Connecting to the Web Interface To connect to the web interface type http followed by the IP address assigned to the Model 336 that you are attempting to connect to If connecting from a device on the same local network and a hostname is properly assigned to the Model 336 via a naming service on the network section 6 4 1 3 then the IP address can be replaced by the hostname If connecting from a device not on the same local network but on a network which is connected to the local network ofthe Model 336 and a hostname and a domain name are properly assigned the IP address can be replaced by the host name followed by the domain name with a dot separator between them For exam ple ifthe hostname LSCI 3360001 and the domain name yourdomain com were assigned via a naming service then typing http LSCI 3360001yourdomain com would open the home web page of the Model 336 embedded website 6 4 4 2 Web Pages Each web page contains detailed help information in the form of tool tips You can access these tool tips by hovering the mouse pointer over the various help icons show help icon image here located throughout the embedded website Home Page provides a summary of information specific to the Model 336 LakeShore 575 MOCORKLE BLVD WESTERVILLE OH 83082 lt GIN ESI 2z08 IFORLAKESHORECON Model 336 Temperature Controller Home Model 336 Temperature Controller Ethernet Configurat
275. return to nor mal operation Menu Navigation Curve Entry View Curve Interface Command CRVHDR CRVPT You can erase user curves that are no longer needed Erase Curve sets all identifica tion parameters to default and blanks all breakpoint values To perform the Erase Curve operation follow this procedure 1 Press Curve Entry scroll to Erase Curve then press Enter 2 Scroll to the desired curve and press Enter 3 Choose Yes at the confirmation message to finalize the operation 4 Tocancel the operation either choose No to the confirmation message or press Escape Menu Navigation Curve Entry Erase Curve gt 21 59 Interface Command CRDEL Temperature curves can be copied from one location inside the Model 336 to another This is a good way to make small changes to an existing curve Curve copy may also be necessary if you need the same curve with two different temperature limits or if you need to extend the range of a standard curve The curve that is copied from is always preserved The copy routine allows you to overwrite an existing user curve Please ensure the curve number you are writing to is correct before proceeding with the copy curve operation 1 To perform the Copy Curve operation press Curve Entry scroll to Copy Curve then press Enter 2 Scroll to the desired curve to copy and press Enter A list of user curves is dis played Scroll to the desired user curve location to copy to and press Enter
276. rew Loosen unshown bottom rear side cover Remove top screws cover screws both sides To remove Remove top top cover sd slide itto both sides pa tracks FIGURE 7 3 Cover and option plate screws full rack B Full rack only use a small Phillips screwdriver to remove the 2 top cover screws and 1 rear bottom screw FIGURE 7 3 5 Remove the rear plastic bezel The cover is tracked Slide the top cover to the rear on the track to remove it 6 Removethe rear panel option plate screws and set aside Remove the rear panel option plate 7 With the instrument still standing on its face turn it to view the inside circuit board 8 Place the option card into its position in the rear panel from inside the instru ment Orient the card so that the 14 pin ribbon cable connector is toward the bottom of the instrument closest to the main circuit board FIGURE 7 4 Half rack only use the screws removed in step 1 to attach the card by starting both screws in a few threads before tightening either 1o 7 6 1 InputOption CardInstallation 151 10 Full rack only use the screws removed in step 6 to attach the card by starting both 11 12 Attach connector so arrow is on top 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 screws in a few threads before tightening either Fully tighten both screws This step is not applicable to the 3062 option card Ins
277. ries Lake Shore is not responsible for any miss ing items if not notified within 60 days of shipment If the instrument must be returned for recalibration replacement or repair a Return Authorization RMA number must be obtained from a factory representative before itis returned Refer to section 8 14 2 for the Lake Shore RMA procedure Items Included with Model 336 temperature controller BH 1Model 336 instrument 1 Model 336 user s manual 4 sensor input mating connector 6 pin DIN G 106 233 2 heater output connectors dual banana for heater Outputs 1 and 2 1 terminal block mating connector 10 pin terminal block for Outputs 3 and 4 and relays 1 and 2 1 line power cord B line power cord for alternative voltage Included only when purchased with VAC 120 ALL power option This section provides a description of the Model 336 rear panel connections The rear panel consists of the Input A B C and D sensor input connectors 1 in FIGURE 3 1 Output 3 and 4 analog voltage output and relays 1 and 2 terminal block connector 2 RJ 45 Ethernet connector 3 USB B type connector 4 IEEE 488 interface con nector 5 line input assembly 6 Output 1 and 2 heater output connectors 7 and 8 and the thermocouple option card inputs 9 Refer to section 8 10 for rear panel con nector pin out details Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 32 CHAPTER 3 Installation Always turn offthe instrument before making any
278. rom Lake Shore the ability to custom label sensor inputs eliminates the guesswork in remembering or determining the location to which a sensor input is associated As we strive to maintain increasingly demanding work loads ease of use and the ability to stay connected from anywhere in the world are critical attributes With standard Ethernet USB and IEEE 488 interfaces and an intu itive menu structure and logic the Model 336 was designed with efficiency reliable connectivity and ease of use in mind While you may need to leave your lab Ethernet ensures you ll always be connected to your experiments The new intuitive front panel layout and keypad logic bright graphic display and LED indicators enhance the user friendly front panel interface ofthe Model 336 In many applications the unparalleled feature set of the Model 336 allows you to replace several instruments with one saving time money and valuable laboratory space Delivering more feedback tighter control and faster cycle times the Model 336 keeps up with increasingly complex temperature measurement and con trol applications It is the ideal solution for general purpose to advanced laboratory applications Put the Model 336 temperature controller to use in your lab and let it take control of your measurement environment The Model 336 offers 4 standard sensor inputs that are compatible with diode and RTD temperature sensors The field installable Model 3060 thermocouple input o
279. rrent setting for 25 O and 500 heaters Menu Navigation Output Setup gt Output 1 or 2 gt Heater Resistance 25 Q or 50 Q Output Setup gt Output 1 or 2 gt Max Current User 0 707 A 1A 1 414 A or 2 A Default Heater Resistance gt 25 Q Output 1 Max Current gt 2 A Output 2 gt Max Current gt 1 414 A Interface Command HTRSET 4 5 1 1 1 User Max Current When using a heater that is not 25 Q 100 W or 50 Q 50 W the provided discrete cur rent limits may not be appropriate The User Max Current setting is available for this case The optimal maximum current value should be calculated based on the heater s power rating orthe maximum desired heater output power whichever is lower The heater output compliance voltage 50 V for both heater outputs should also be taken into account in orderto maximize heater setting resolution This calculated current limit can then be entered using the User Max Current setting To calculate the Max Current setting based on a heater or load power limit calculate current I using both of the following equations Sqrt P R and 50V R where Pis the maximum allowable power R is the heater resistance The load power limit and voltage compliance limit of the heater output 50 V are in place at the same time so the lower calculated current is the correct Max Current setting Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 62 CHAPTER 4 Operation Max Current 2A 40W Example 1 A
280. rrent sources they have a limit of 50 V called the compliance voltage This compliance voltage also limits maximum power So for heaters values other than 25 Q or 50 Q calculate the maximum power using the following equations P I2R and P V2 R where P is maximum power is max current V is max voltage and R is the heater resistance The current and voltage limits are in place at the same time so the smaller ofthe two computations gives the maximum power available to the heater Example 1 A 200 heater is connected to Output 1 and the heater resistance setting is setto 25 O which can provide up to 2 A of current and up to 50 V Current Limit Voltage Limit P 12R P V2 R P 2 A x 20 0 P 50 V 2 20 Q P 80W P 125W The power limit is the smaller of the two or 80 W limited by current Example 2 A 60 O heater is connected to Output 2 and the heater resistance setting is set to 500 which can provide up to 1A of current and up to 50 V Current Limit Voltage Limit P 12R P V2 R P 1A 2x 60 Q P 50 V 2 60 Q P 60W P 41 7W The power limit is the smaller of the two or 41 7 W limited by voltage Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 22 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 5 2 Heater Location 2 5 3 Heater Types 2 5 4 Heater Wiring Model 336 Temperature Controller It ispossible to choose a heater value that results in a maximum power greater than the power rating of 5
281. s Trying to remember when to use which set of tuning parameters can be difficult The Model 336 has a Zone feature as one of its tuning modes that can help To use the Zone feature you must determine the best tuning parameters for each part of the temperature range of interest Then enter the parameters into the Model 336 where up to 10 zones can be defined with different P D heater range manual out put ramp rate and control input settings An upper boundary setting is assigned as the maximum temperature forthat zone The minimum temperature for a zone isthe upper boundary for the previous zone and O K is the starting point for the first zone When Zone tuning is on each time the setpoint changes appropriate control param eters are chosen automatically Zone tuning works best when used in conjunction with setpoint ramping section 4 5 1 5 7 You can determine control parameters manually or you can use the Autotune feature Autotune is a good way to determine a set of tuning parameters for the control sys tem that can then be entered as zones section 2 9 Athermoelectric device sometimes referred to as a Peltier device ora solid state heat pump is a device that takes advantage of the Peltier effect When a DC current is applied to the device heat is transferred from one side of the device to the other Heat can be transferred in either direction by reversing the polarity of the current Thermo electric devices are well suited f
282. s are changed or the Max Min Reset key is pressed Menu Navigation Max Min Reset Once the sensor inputs have been configured section 4 4 the outputs can be config ured The Output Setup menu is used to create control loops for controlling tempera ture whether using feedback closed loop or manually setting the output open loop This section describes how to operate the output and control features and how to set control parameters Each control parameter should be considered before turn ing on a control loop output or the instrument may not be able to perform the most simple control functions A good starting point is deciding which control loop to use whether to operate in open or closed control mode and which tuning mode is best for the application Other parameters fall into place once these have been chosen Section 2 7 of this manual describes the principals of closed loop proportional inte gral and derivative PID control 4 5 1 Heater Outputs 4 5 1 HeaterOutputs 61 Heater Outputs 1 and 2 are traditional control loop heater outputs for a cryogenic temperature controller The two outputs are identical except in the amount of power available Output 1 can provide up to 100 W and Output 2 can provide up to 50 W They each include a large set of hardware and software features making them very flexible and easy to use The heater outputs are well regulated DC outputs This pro vides quiet stable control for a broad range of
283. s 15 s 10 n nnn nnn n refer to command for description Curve Data Point Command CRVPT lt curve gt lt index gt lt units value gt lt temp value gt term nn nnn tnnnnnn nnnnnn lt curve gt Specifies which curve to configure Valid entries 21 59 lt index gt Specifies the points index in the curve Valid entries 1 200 lt units value gt Specifies sensor units for this point to 6 digits lt temp value gt Specifies the corresponding temperature in kelvin for this point to 6 digits Configures a user curve data point CRVPT 21 2 0 10191 470 000 N term sets User Curve 21 second data point to 0 10191 sensor units and 470 000 K Curve Data Point Query CRVPT lt curve gt lt index gt term nn nnn lt curve gt Specifies which curve to query 1 59 lt index gt Specifies the points index in the curve 1 200 lt units value gt lt temp value gt term tnnnnnn nnnnnn refer to command for description Returns a standard or user curve data point DFLT Input Remarks DIOCUR Input Format Remarks DIOCUR Input Format Returned Format DISPFLD Input Format Example Remarks DISPFLD Input Format Returned Format 6 6 1 InterfaceCommands 131 Factory Defaults Command DFLT 99 term Sets all configuration values to factory defaults and resets the instrument The 99 is included to prevent accidentally setting the unit to defaults Diode Excitation Current Parameter Command D
284. s Visual parame ter is set to On Blinks when any input sensor alarms are in the alarming state and the alarming input s Visual parameter is set to On 5 7 Control outputs On steady when the corresponding output is in the On state does not apply to Monitor Out mode Off when corresponding output is in the Off state or when it is set to Monitor Out mode 4 5 14 TABLE 4 4 LED annunciators Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 46 CHAPTER 4 Operation 4 2 3 General Keypad Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller Display annunciators include symbols for sensor inputs and their respective tempera tures and units A Sensor input A B Sensor input B C Sensor input C D Sensor input D D1 Sensor input D channel 1 D2 Sensor input D channel 2 D3 Sensor input D channel 3 D4 Sensor input D channel 4 D5 Sensor input D channel 5 K Temperature in kelvin c Temperature in degrees Celsius V Sensor units of volts Q Sensor units of ohms kQ Sensor units of kilohms mV Sensor units of millivolts TABLE 4 5 Display annunciators There are five basic keypad operations direct operation menu navigation number entry alpha numeric entry and setting selection Direct Operation the key function occurs as soon as you press the key these include the Setpoint P I D Manual Out and All Off keys Menu Navigation each menu has a list of configurable p
285. s key to configure the Alarm feature 5 7 1 A Press this key to navigate menus and to select parameters N A v Press this key to navigate menus and to select parameters N A Press this key to cancel a number entry or parameter selection You can also use this key to Escape exit E ERI navigate up one level in a setting menu which exits the menu if atthe top level Press and N A hold for 3 sto reset instrument parameters to factory default values Enter Press this key to accept a number entry or a parameter selection You can also use it to navi N A gate deeper into a menu setting screen Press and hold for 3 sto lock or unlock the keypad 0 9 4 Press this key to enter numeric data This includes a key to toggle plus or minus anda 4 2 3 SOTA key for entry of a decimal point TABLE 4 3 Menu number pad keys 4 2 2 Annunciators LED annunciators three blue four red LED annunciators are included to provide visual Remote feedback ofthe following operation On steady when the instrument is in Remote mode may be controlled via the IEEE 488 Interface Ifthe LED is not illuminated the instrument is in Local mode Refer to section 4 6 3 1 Ethernet On steady when Ethernet is connected and properly configured Blinks at a slow pace when attempting to acquire an IP address Blinks rapidly when in an error state 4 6 2 Alarm On steady when the alarm feature for any sensor input is turned on and the input
286. s of all readings are at the extremes Data that is charted on the same axis but that is far apart in magnitude will result in low resolution for each data series Manual zooming of the chart can be achieved either by using the mouse wheel or by clicking and dragging a box around the area of the chart to zoom to Manual panning can be achieved by holding the Ctrl key then clicking and dragging the chart After manually zooming or panning autoscaling in both axes is turned off and Reset Zoom Pan becomes active To return to autoscale mode click Reset Zoom Pan Ascreenshot of the currently displayed chart can be copied to the clipboard saved in the PNG image format or printed directly to a printer using the context menu that appears when right clicking on the chart Other chart properties such as colors and fonts can be customized through this context menu by clicking Properties Note that changes to these chart properties are not saved when the application is closed so the default values will be restored when reopening the chart recorder utility 6 5 4 4 Utilities Panel The utilities panel 11 provides added functionality to assist the user in various com mon tasks associated with user applications Three tabs provide a means of selecting between the three utili ties Command Line provides command line access for sending commands and queries to the instrument To send a command or query type the command or query into the Command tex
287. s to where the driver was downloaded 6 3 3 3 2 Extract the driver The downloaded driver is in a ZIP compressed archive The driver must be extracted from this file Windows provides built in support for ZIP archives If this support is disabled a third party application such as WinZip or 7 Zip must be used For Windows 7 and Vista 1 Right click on the file and click extract all 2 An Extract Compressed Zipped Folders dialog box will appear It is recom mended the default folder is not changed Take note of this folder location 3 Clickto clear the Show extracted files when complete checkbox and click Extract For Windows XP 1 Right click on the file and click extract all 2 The Extraction wizard will appear Click Next Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 106 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller 3 Itis recommended to keep the same default folder Take note of this folder loca tion and click Next 4 An Extraction complete message will be displayed Click to clear the Show extracted files checkbox and click Finish 6 3 3 3 3 Manually install the driver Manually installing drivers differ between versions of Windows The following sections describe how to manually install the driver using Windows 7 Vista and XPTo install the driver you must be logged into a user account that has administrator privileges For Windows 7 and Vista 1 Connect t
288. s utility only updates the Ethernet firmware and not the instrument firmware Another utility is provided at the Lake Shore website www lakeshore com for updating the instrument firmware 6 5 3 Instrument Configuration Backup Utility 6 5 3 Instrument Configuration Backup Utility 119 To use the Ethernet Firmware Updater utility first ensure that your Java Runtime Environment is at version 1 6 0 or higher and then use this procedure to download the Ethernet firmware Updater utility 1 Download the latest Model 336 Ethernet Firmware file from www lakeshore com 2 Oncethe firmware files have been downloaded connect to the embedded web site section 6 4 4 and navigate to the Utilities page Click Launch Ethernet Firmware Updater 4 Acceptany security warning messages that are presented referto section 6 5 for an explanation ofthese security warnings The Ethernet Firmware Updater application window should now be open Click Upload New Ethernet Firmware and a file browser window will open 6 Navigate to the directory where the Model 336 Ethernet firmware is stored Select the file and click Open w eal At this point the application should check to see if the firmware you are attempting to update to is newer than what is already installed on the Model 336 If it is then the firmware should immediately begin uploading and the progress of the firmware update operation should be displayed using the two progress bars in
289. s within the domain The hierarchy can contain several dot sepa rated levels which flow from right to left For example lakeshore com contains the top level domain com and the subdomain lakeshore When using the Domain Name System DNS to connect to a specific host device on a network the device s hostname is tacked onto the left of the domain name For example the www in www lakeshore com refers to the Lake Shore web server located within the internet domain lakeshore com 6 4 2 Viewing Ethernet Configuration 6 4 2 Viewing Ethernet Configuration 113 If the Model 336 is connected to a network with Dynamic DNS DDNS capability a DNS entry is automatically created using the Preferred Hostname and Preferred Domain Name parameters and the assigned IP address The Preferred Domain Name parameter can only be accessed using the NET interface command section 6 6 1 or by using the Ethernet configuration page section 6 4 2 of the embedded website on the Model 336 If DNS reverse lookup is enabled on the network DNS server and the DNS address parameters are correctly configured the Model 336 will perform a reverse lookup to determine if a domain name is assigned for the Model 336 s configured IP address This will occur regardless of whether the domain name was configured dynamically using DDNS or manually by the network administrator The returned domain name will appear in the Actual Hostname parameter in the View I
290. sensor units If a tem perature response curve is selected for an input its readings may also be displayed in temperature 01 DT 470 Diode DT 470 1 4 475 K Table D 1 02 DT 670 Diode DT 670 1 4 500K Table D 2 03 DT 500 D Diode DT 500 D 1 4 365 K Table D 3 04 DT 500 E1 Diode DT 500 E1 1 1 330K Table D 3 05 Reserved 06 PT 100 PTCRTD PT 100 30 800K Table D 4 07 PT 1000 PTCRTD PT 1000 30 800K Table D 4 08 RX 102A AA NTCRTD Rox RX 102A 0 05 40K Table D 5 09 RX 202A AA NTCRTD Rox RX 202A 0 05 40K Table D 6 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 TypeK Thermocouple TypeK 3 1645K Table D 7 13 Type E Thermocouple Type E 3 1274K Table D 8 14 Type T Thermocouple Type T 3 670K Table D 9 15 AuFe 0 03 Thermocouple AuFe 0 03 3 5 500 K Table D 10 16 AuFe 0 07 Thermocouple AuFe 0 07 3 15 610 K Table D 11 17 Reserved 18 Reserved 19 Reserved i 20 Reserved 21 59 User Curves No longer offered by Lake Shore Instrument may not support the sensor over its entire range TABLE 4 11 Sensor curves Once the input is configured section 4 4 you may choose a temperature curve Any standard or user curve that matches the format of the sensor type configured for a given input will be available under the Curve parameter in the Input Setup menu for that input You are also given the choice of None When set
291. ses the assigned temperature curve to convert the Setpoint to the new control units This provides minimal disruption in the control output if you change the Preferred Units parameter while the control loop is active Menu Navigation Setpoint See note below Default 0 0000 K Interface Command SETP When controlling in temperature setpoint is limited by the control input temperature curve s Setpoint Limit When controlling in sensor units setpoint is limited by the limits of the configured control sensor Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 68 CHAPTER 4 Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller 4 5 1 5 7 Setpoint Ramping The Model 336 can generate a smooth setpointramp when the setpoint units are expressed in temperature You can seta ramp rate in degrees per minute with a range of Oto 100 and a resolution of 0 1 Once the ramping feature is turned on its action is initiated by a setpoint change When you enter a new setpoint the instrument changes the setpoint temperature from the old value to the new value at the ramp rate A positive ramp rate is always entered it is used by the instrument to ramp either up or down in temperature Always use the ramping feature to minimize temperature overshoot and undershoot When ramping is not used a setpoint change can cause the error used by the PID equation to become very large which causes the contribution of the control output equation to become larger the longe
292. sonnel should be consulted ifthe instrument requires repair This section provides USB interface troubleshooting for issues that arise with new installations existing installations and intermittent lockups D go a ONE Check that the instruments interface is set to USB Check that the USB driver is installed properly and that the device is functioning In Microsoft Windows the device status can be checked using Device Manager by right clicking Lake Shore Model 336 Temperature Controller under Ports COM amp LPT or Other Devices and then clicking Properties Refer to section 6 3 3 for details on installing the USB driver Check that the correct com port is being used In Microsoft Windows the com port number can be checked using Device Manager under Ports COM amp LPT Check that the correct settings are being used for communication Refer to section 6 3 3 for details on installing the USB driver Check cable connections and length Send the message terminator Send the entire message string at one time including the terminator Many ter minal emulation programs do not Send only one simple command at a time until communication is established Be sure to spell commands correctly and use proper syntax Power the instrument off then on again to see if it is a soft failure Power the computer off then on again to see if communication port is locked up Check all cable connections Check that the com port assignment
293. source error has negligible effect on measurement accuracy 10 Diode input excitation can be set to 1 mA 11 Current source error is removed during calibration 12 Accuracy specification does not include errors from room temperature compensation TABLE 1 3 Input specifications Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS CHAPTER 1 Introduction Sensor Tempera ture Coeffi cient Excitation Current Input Range Thermocouple DIEM option Resolution Model 3060 Thermocouple Positive 50 mV NA 3060 0 1 pv Electronic Control Stability13 Electronic Accuracy at 25 C Measurement Resolution Measurement Temperature Coefficient 1 pV 0 05 0 4pV ofrdg12 0 1 pV 0 001 of rdg C 0 8pV 13 Control stability of the electronics only in ideal thermal system TABLE 1 4 Thermocouple option input specifications Sensor Tempera ture Coeffi cient Excitation Current Input Range Display Capacitance Resolution option Model 3061 Electronic Control Stability14 Electronic Accuracy at 25 C Measurement Resolution Measurement Temperature Coefficient Capacitance Positiveor O 1nFtol5nF 3 496kHz1mA 0 1 pF 0 05 pF 50 pF 0 1 2 5 pF C 0 1 pF 3061 negative square wave of rdg 1InFto150nF 3 496kHz10mA 1pF 0 5 pF 50 pF 0 1 5 pF C 1pF square wave of rdg 14 Control stability of the electronics only in ideal thermal syst
294. ssigned address will not be preserved through a device reconfiguration such as a power cycle To use Auto IP to automatically configure a link local IP address and subnet mask set the DHCP parameter to Off then set the Auto IP parameter to On By default the Auto IP feature of the Model 336 is Off Menu Navigation Interface Modify IP Config Auto P Off or On Static IP Static IP isa method of manually configuring the IP address subnet mask and gateway of Ethernet enabled devices When using the Static IP method the IP address subnet mask and gateway must be configured appropriately for the con nected network or for the connected PC in orderto establish connection to the net work A major advantage to the Static IP method is that the IP address will not change during device reconfiguration power cycle Disadvantages of using the Static IP method include the requirement of knowing how your network is config ured in orderto choose the correct configuration parameters The Static IP method is always enabled and therefore will defaultto this method when both automatic configuration methods DHCP and Auto IP are disabled or if all enabled automatic configuration methods fail To use Static IP to manually config ure the IP address subnet mask and gateway ofthe Model 336 setthe DHCP and the Auto IP parameters to Off Refer to the paragraphs above for details on turning off DHCP and Auto IP The Model 336 will now use the Static
295. store the new breakpoint pair 6 Press Escape at any time when a sensor ortemperature value is highlighted to cancel any changes to either ofthe values and return the highlightto the break point number Y If the sensor value entered is not between the previous breakpoint sensor value and the following breakpoint sensor value then the new breakpoint pair will be moved to the position in the curve that bounds the sensor value ofthe new breakpoint pair If the pairis moved a message will be displayed to indicate to the location to which the breakpoint pairwas moved Curve Entru Curve Entry J i k l k k k k k EEE J AGG K F MEC J 50000 E F Y K FIGURE 5 7 Left Scroll to highlight a breakpoint number Middle Press the enter key to highlight the sensor value of the selected pair Right Press the enter key again and the temperature value is highlighted Menu Navigation Curve Entry Edit Curve 21 59 Curve Points 1 200 Interface Command CRVPT Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 86 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller 5 9 1 2 Add a New Breakpoint Pair The last breakpoint of a curve is signified by the first pair that contains a O value for both the temperature and sensor portions Curves are limited to 200 breakpoint pairs so if 200 pairs already exist then the 200th pair will be the last pair in the list To add a new breakpoint pair to a curve that has less than 200 p
296. surement is the resistance of the lead wire run with cur rent and voltage together If the leads contribute 2 O or 3 Q to a 10 kQ reading the error can probably be tolerated When measuring voltage for diode sensors you can calculate the error in voltage as the lead resistance times the current typically 10 pA For example a 10 Q lead resistance times 10 pA results in a 0 1 mV error in voltage Given the sensitivity of a silicon diode at 4 2 K the error in temperature would be only 3 mK At 77 K the sensitivity of a silicon diode is lower so the error would be close to 50 mK Again this may not be a problem for every user Connectors are also a big source of error when making two lead measurements Connector contact resistance is unpredictable and changes with time and temperature Minimize interconnections when making two lead measurements Refer to FIGURE 3 6 for an image of a two lead sensor measurement Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 36 CHAPTER 3 Installation 3 5 7 Lowering Measurement Noise 3 6 Capacitance Sensor Inputs Model 3061 Model 336 Temperature Controller I V FIGURE 3 6 2 lead sensor measurement Good instrument hardware setup technique is one of the least expensive ways to reduce measurement noise The suggestions fall into two categories 1 do not let noise from the outside enter into the measurement and 2 let the instrument isolation and other hardware features work to their best adv
297. t appears correct but is not the most accurate e Cathode P Anode FIGURE 3 4 DT 670 SD Diode sensor leads 3 5 5 Four Lead Sensor Measurement 3 5 6 Two Lead Sensor Measurement 3 5 5 Four LeadSensorMeasurement 35 All sensors including both two lead and four lead can be measured with a four lead technique The purpose of a four lead measurement is to eliminate the effect of lead resistance on the measurement If it is not taken out lead resistance is a direct error when measuring a sensor In a four lead measurement current leads and voltage leads are run separately up to the sensor With separate leads there is little current in the voltage leads so their resistance does not enter into the measurement Resistance in the current leads will not change the measurement as long as the voltage compliance of the current source is not reached When two lead sensors are used in four lead measurements the short leads on the sensor have an insignificant resistance Resistive sensor Diode option only v V v 7 v I FIGURE 3 5 4 lead measurement There are times when crowding in a cryogenic system forces users to read sensors in a two lead configuration because there are not enough feedthroughs or room for lead wires If this is the case plus voltage to plus current and minus voltage to minus cur rent leads are attached at the back of the instrument or at the vacuum feedthrough The error in a resistive mea
298. t box and click Send Query responses are displayed in the Response box below Click Command Summary to pull up the list of command line commands and queries supported by the instrument Notes provides a means of adding notes to the log file while logging data The note will be added to the notes column of the log file at the row associated with the most recently acquired data point To add a note simply add text to the text box next to the Save Note button then click Save Note Notes will be appended to the note history text box along with a time stamp If a note is saved while not currently logging data to a file the note will only appear in the note history text box and will only be avail able while the application is running Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 122 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Model 336 Temperature Controller Control provides easy access to the control functions of the instrument The P I D Manual Output Setpoint and Heater Range settings can be configured here for each control loop on the instrument The current configuration ofthe given control loop is displayed when the Loop radio button is selected To update these parameters on the instrument first selectthe loop to update by choosing a Loop radio button Then update the values in the Control panel and click Send Each control loop must be updated independently so once the values in the Control panel are updated click Send before cli
299. t grease Melting pointis 523 K 250 C Can be removed using Xylene with an isopropyl alcohol rinse GAN 25 Apiezon N Grease 25 g Tube General purpose grease well suited for cryogenic use because of its low viscosity It is often used as a means of thermally anchoring cryogenic sensors as well as lubricating joints and o rings Contains high molecular weight polymeric hydrocarbon additive that gives it a tenacious rubbery consistency allowing the grease to form a cushion between mating surfaces Melting pointis 316 K 43 C Can be removed using Xylene with an isopropyl alcohol rinse HTR 25 25 Q Cartridge Heater The heater features precision wound nickel chromium resistance wire magnesium oxide insulation 2 solid pins non magnetic package and has UL and CSA compo nent recognition The heater is 25 Q 6 35 mm 0 25 in diameter by 25 4 mm 1 in long The 25 Q rating is in dead air With proper heat sinking the cartridge heater can handle many times this dead air power rating HTR 50 50 Q Cartridge Heater The heater features precision wound nickel chromium resistance wire magnesium oxide insulation 2 solid pins non magnetic package and has UL and CSA compo nent recognition The heater is 50 Q 6 35 mm 0 25 in diameter by 25 4 mm 1in long The 50 Q rating is in dead air With proper heat sinking the cartridge heater can handle many times this dead air power rating Rack Mounting Kit Mounting brackets
300. t space gt lt parameter data gt lt terminators gt Query mnemonics are often the same as commands with the addition of a question mark Parameter data is often unnecessary when sending queries Query mnemonics and parameter data if necessary is described in section 6 6 Terminators must be sent with every message string The computer should expect a response very soon after a query is sent Aresponse string is the instrument s response or answer to a query string The response can bea reading value status report or the present value of a parameter Response data formats are listed along with the associated queries in section 6 6 The response is sent as soon as possible after the instrument receives the query It is important to remember that the user program is in charge of the USB communi cation at all times The instrument cannot initiate communication determine which device should be transmitting at a given time or guarantee timing between mes sages All of this is the responsibility of the user program When issuing commands the user program alone should m Properly format and transmit the command including the terminator as 1 string m Guarantee that no other communication is started for 50 ms after the last char acter is transmitted m Notinitiate communication more than 20 times per second 6 4 Ethernet Interface 6 4 1 Ethernet Configuration 6 4 EthernetInterface 109 When issuing queries or queries and commandstoget
301. t the Preferred Units parameter of the control input sensor to either kel vin or Celsius When controlling in temperature the available setting range of the setpoint is limited by the Setpoint Limit parameter of the assigned temperature curve Refer to section 4 4 13 for details on setting the Preferred Units parameter Refer to section 5 8 1 for details on setting a curve Setpoint Limit The Setpoint Limit feature only limits the Setpoint entry For even greater protection the Temperature Limit feature can be used to turn off all heater outputs if a sensor reading above the specified temperature is observed Refer to section 4 4 12 for details on the Temperature Limit feature There are some instances when temperature control in sensor units may be desired for example when a temperature curve is not available For these applications the Model 336 can control temperature in sensor units To control in sensor units set the Preferred Units parameter to Sensor When controlling in sensor units the Setpoint resolution matches the display resolution for the sensor input type given in the speci fications section 1 3 Temperature control in sensor units can be unpredictable since most sensors do not have a linear response to temperature and therefore have can have different sensitivity in dif ferent temperature ranges If you change the Preferred Units from Sensor to temperature Kelvin or Celsius or from temperature to Sensor the Model 336 u
302. te active state off On A Alarm B Alarm C Alarm D Alarm 5 8 Curve EE EE Both Low Alarms Alarm High Both Low High Alarm Alarms Alarm Alarm Manual off relay remains in the normal state Manual on relay remains in the active state Relay will follow Input A alarms Relay will follow Input B alarms Both Alarms Relay active when either the High or Low Alarm is active Low Alarms Relay active only when the Low Alarm is active Relay will follow Input C alarms High Alarms Relay active only when the High Alarm is active Relay will follow Input D alarms Numbers and Storage Model 336 Temperature Controller FIGURE 5 6 Relay settings When using relays with alarm operation set up alarms first The relays are rated for 30 VDC and 3 A Theirterminals are in the detachable terminal block on the Model 336 rear panel In the Off mode the relay is un energized leaving the normally open NO contacts open and the normally closed NC contacts closed In the On mode the relay is ener gized so the NO contacts will be closed and the NC contacts will beopen In the Alarm mode the relay will activate based on the state ofthe configured Alarm Input sensor When the Alarm to Follow parameter is set to Low the relay will energize if the con figured Alarm Input sensor goes into a low alarm state If it is set to High the rela
303. tem perature Unfortunately this not the case in many systems Temperature gradients differences in temperature exist because there is seldom perfect balance between the cooling source and heat sources Even in a well controlled system unwanted heat sources like thermal radiation and heat conducting through mounting structures can cause gradients For best accuracy position sensors nearthe sample so that little or no heat flows between the sample and sensor This may not however be the best location for temperature control as discussed below The ability of heat to flow through a material is called thermal conductivity Good thermal conductivity is important in any part of a cryogenic system that is intended to bethe same temperature Copper and aluminum are examples of metals that have good thermal conductivity while stainless steel does not Non metallic electrically insulating materials like alumina oxide and similar ceramics have good thermal con 2 4 4 Contact Area 2 4 5 Contact Pressure 2 4 6 Lead Wire 2 4 4 ContactArea 19 ductivity while G 10 epoxy impregnated fiberglass does not Sensor packages cool ing loads and sample holders should have good thermal conductivity to reduce temperature gradients Surprisingly the connections between thermally conductive mounting surfaces often have very poor thermal conductivity referto section 2 4 4 and section 2 4 5 Thermal contact area greatly affects thermal conduction beca
304. termines the units of the Control Input sensor to use for creating the proportional voltage output The Monitor Out scaling parameter set tings are entered using the units chosen for this parameter Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 3 or 4 gt Monitor Units K C or Sensor Default K Interface Command ANALOG 5 6 1 MonitorUnits 79 5 6 1 1 Polarity and Monitor Out Scaling Parameters In the Monitor Out and Open Loop modes the unpowered analog outputs can be con figured as either unipolar 0 V to 10 V or bipolar 10 V to 10 V outputs In bipolar mode the Monitor Out 10 V setting determines the temperature or sensor value at which the output should be 10 V In unipolar mode the Monitor Out O V setting determines the temperature or sensor value at which the output should be O V The Monitor Out 10 V setting determines the temperature or sensor value at which the output should be 10 V in either unipolar or bipolar modes Lowest PME Middle Highest Bipolar A 10V Outpt OV 10V Lowest Middle Highest Unipolar OV 5V Outpt 10V FIGURE 5 2 Unipolar and bipolar mode For example if Polarity is set to Bipolar then setting the Monitor Out 10 V parameter to O K and the Monitor Out 10 V parameter to 100 K will cause the analog output to correspond to the input temperature as shown in FIGURE 5 3 In this case if the actual reading was 50 K then the output would be at O V middle of the scale
305. than O for P when using closed loop control To set P first configure the front panel display to show the desired control loop infor mation then use the P key on the front panel A quick way to access the setting if the control loop information is not already being displayed is to press A B C or Don the front panel to temporarily display the control loop information while the new setting is entered Refer to section 4 3 for details on configuring the front panel display Menu Navigation P 0 to 1000 Default 50 Interface Command PID 4 5 1 5 3 Integral I The integral parameter also called reset is the part of the PID control equation It has a range of Oto 1000 with a resolution of 0 1 The default value is 20 Setting to O turns the reset function off The I setting is related to seconds by setting 1000 lseconds For example a reset number setting of 20 corresponds to a time constant of 50 s A system will normally take several time constants to settle into the setpoint The 50s time constant if correct for the system being controlled would result in a system that stabilizes at a new setpoint in between 5 min and 10 min To set I first configure the front panel display to show the desired control loop infor mation then use the key on the front panel A quick way to access the setting if the control loop information is not already being displayed is to press A B C or Don the front panel to temporarily displ
306. thermocouple made from the same wire Itis best practice to use the same material forthermocouple wires ifit is at all possible it is also best to avoid splices When splices are necessary continue the splice with the same type of material For less demanding applications a short across the input terminals will suffice Both thermocouple inputs should be calibrated even if they use the same type of thermo couple An appropriate curve must be selected and room temperature compensation must be turned on before calibration can be started Follow this procedure to calibrate room temperature compensation 4 4 7 Capacitance Sensor Input Setup Model 3061 Only 4 4 7 Capacitance Sensor Input Setup Model 3061 Only 55 For best results the calibration temperature should be close to the measurement tem perature that requires best accuracy 1 Attach a thermocouple sensor or direct short across the input terminals of the thermocouple input See FIGURE 3 8 for polarity 2 Placethe instrument away from drafts If calibrating using a short place an accu rate room temperature thermometer near the terminal block 3 Allow the instrument to warm up for at least 1 2 hr without moving or handling the sensor 4 Ifcalibrating with a short skip to step 6 otherwise insert the thermocouple into the ice bath liquid nitrogen helium Dewar or other known fixed temperature 5 Readthe displayed temperature If the temperature display is not as
307. ting alone with no integral there must always be an error or the output will go to 0 A great deal must be known about the load sensor and controller to com pute a proportional setting P Most often the proportional setting is determined by trial and error The proportional setting is part of the overall control loop gain and so are the heater range and cooling power The proportional setting will need to change if either of these change In the control loop the integral term also called reset looks at error over time to build the integral contribution to the output Output I Pi e at By adding the integral to proportional contributions the error that is necessary in a proportional only system can be eliminated When the error is at O controlling at the setpoint the output is held constant by the integral contribution The integral setting 1 is more predictable than the gain setting It is related to the dominant time con stant of the load As discussed in section 2 8 3 measuring this time constant allows a reasonable calculation of the integral setting In the Model 336 the integral term is not set in seconds like some other systems The integral setting can be derived by dividing 1000 by the integral seconds Isetting 1000 Iseconds 2 7 3 Derivative D 2 7 4 Manual Output 2 7 3 Derivative D 25 The derivative term also called rate acts on the change in error with time to make its contribution to the output
308. tire message string at one time including the terminator 4 Send only one simple command ata time until communication is established 5 Besureto spell commands correctly and use proper syntax 6 Attempt both Talk and Listen functions If one works but not the other the hard ware connection is working so look at syntax terminator and command format 1 Powerthe instrument off then on again to see if itis a soft failure 2 Powerthe computer off then on again to see if the IEEE card is locked up 3 Verify that the address has not been changed on the instrument during a memory reset 4 Checkall cable connections 1 Checkcable connections and length 2 Increase the delay between all commands to 50 ms to make sure the instrument is not being overloaded The fuse drawer supplied with the Model 336 holds the instrument line fuses and line voltage selection module The drawer holds two 5 mm x 20 mm 0 2 in x 79 in time delay fuses It requires two good fuses ofthe same rating to operate safely Refer to Section 8 5 for details 120 FIGURE 8 1 Fuse drawer Use the following procedure to change the instrument line voltage selector To avoid potentially lethal shocks turn off the controller and disconnect it from AC power before performing these procedures Identify the line input assembly on the instrument rear panel See FIGURE 8 2 Turn the line power switch OFF O Remove the instrument power cord With a small screwdr
309. to the sensor slows the response time For example if the temperature at the load drops slightly below the setpoint the controller gradually increases heating power If the feedback information is slow the controller puts too much heat into the system before it is told to reduce heat The excess heat causes a temperature overshoot which degrades control stability The best way to improve thermal lag is to pay close attention to thermal conductivity both in the parts used and their junctions There is a conflict between the best sensor location for measurement accuracy and the best sensor location for control For measurement accuracy the sensor should be very near the sample being measured which is away from the heating and cooling sources to reduce heat flow across the sample and thermal gradients The best con trol stability is achieved when the feedback sensor is near both the heater and cooling source to reduce thermal lag If both control stability and measurement accuracy are critical it may be necessary to use two sensors one for each function Many tempera ture controllers including the Model 336 have multiple sensor inputs for this reason Cryogenic designers understandably want to keep the thermal mass of the load as small as possible so the system can cool quickly and improve cycle time Small mass can also have the advantage of reduced thermal gradients Controlling a very small mass is difficult because there is no buffer to adsorb s
310. to 673 K T gt 40K amp BS2 5T Coefficient RTDs Rhodium Iron RF 800 4 1 4 K to 500 K T gt 77K amp BS8T Rhodium Iron RF 100T U 1 4Kto 325K T gt 77 K amp BS8T Negative Cernox CX 1010 0 3 Kto 325 K1 T gt 2K amp BS19T Temperature Cernox CX 1030 HT 0 3 K to 420 K1 3 T gt 2K8B lt 19T Sosffcient To Cernox CX 1050 HT 1 4Kto420K1 T gt 2K amp BS19T Cernox CX 1070 HT 4K to 420 K1 T gt 2K8B lt 19T Cernox CX 1080 HT 20 K to 420 K1 T gt 2K amp B lt 19T Germanium GR 200A 100 0 3 Kto 100 K Not recommended Germanium GR 200A 250 0 5 Kto 100 K Not recommended Germanium GR 200A B 500 1 4 Kto 100 K Not recommended Germanium GR 200A B 1000 1 4 K to 100 K Not recommended Germanium GR 200A B 1500 1 4 K to 100 K Not recommended Germanium GR 200A B 2500 1 4 K to 100 K Not recommended Carbon Glass CGR 1 500 1 4 K to 325K T gt 2K8B lt 19T Carbon Glass CGR 1 1000 1 7 K to 325 K2 T gt 2K amp B lt 19T Carbon Glass CGR 1 2000 2 Kto 325 K2 T gt 2K amp B lt 19T Rox RX 102 0 3 K to 40 K3 T gt 2K amp B lt 10T Rox RX 103 1 4 K to 40 K T gt 2K amp B lt 10T Rox RX 202 0 3 K to 40 K3 T gt 2K amp B lt 10T PEDE CS 501 14Kto290K D42K amp BX187T Thermocouples TypeK 9006 006 3 2Kto 1505 K Not recommended 3060 Type E 9006 004 3 2 Kto 934K Not recommended Chromel AuFe 0 07 9006 002 1 2 Kto 610 K Not recommended 1 Non HT version maximum temperature 325 K 2 Low temperature limited by input resistance range 3 Low temperature specified with self heatin
311. to None front panel read ings configured for kelvin or Celsius will display the NOCURV message and the inter face will report 0 K and 273 15 C for KRDG and CRDG queries respectively Data points for standard curves are detailed in Appendix C Menu Navigation Input Setup gt nput A B C or D gt Curve gt Any curve of matching type 4 4 10 Filter The reading filter applies exponential smoothing to the sensor input readings If the filter is turned on for a sensor input all reading values for that input are filtered The filter is a running average so it does not change the update rate of an input Filtered readings are not used for control functions but they are used for all input features including Max Min The number of filter points determines filter bandwidth One filter point corresponds to one new reading on that input A larger number of points does more smoothing but also slows the instruments response to real changes in temperature The default number of filter points is 8 which settles to within six time constants of a step change value in 45 readings or 4 5 s Model 336 Temperature Controller 4 4 10 Filter 59 The time constant time it takes to settle to within 36 8 ofthe step value after a step change fora given number of filter points can be derived using the following formula TC 2 0 1 In N N 1 where TC is one time constant and N is the number of filter points A reading is usually considered settled
312. tua tion characters are used as delimiters to separate different commands or pieces of data A special ASCII character line feed LF OAH is used to indicate the end of a mes sage string This is called the message terminator The Model 336 will accept either the line feed character alone or a carriage return CR ODH followed by a line feed as the message terminator The instrument query response terminator will include both carriage return and line feed 6 3 4 2 Message Strings A message string is a group of characters assembled to perform an interface function There are three types of message strings commands queries and responses The computer issues command and query strings through user programs the instrument issues responses Two or more command or query strings can be chained together in one communication but they must be separated by a semi colon The total com munication string must not exceed 255 characters in length A command string is issued by the computer and instructs the instrument to perform a function or change a parameter setting The format is lt command mnemonic gt lt space gt lt parameter data gt lt terminators gt Command mnemonics and parameter data necessary for each one is described in section 6 6 Terminators must be sent with every message string A query string is issued by the computer and instructs the instrument to send a response The query format is lt query mnemonic gt lt gt l
313. u Navigation Display Setup Display Contrast gt 1 to 32 Default 28 Interface Command BRIGT The Model 336 supports a variety oftemperature sensors manufactured by Lake Shore and other manufacturers An appropriate sensor type must be selected for each input Ifthe exact sensor model is not shown use the sensor input performance chart in TABLE 4 7 to choose an input type with similar range and excitation For additional details on sensors refer to the Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog or visit our website at www lakeshore com Any unused input should be set to disabled Display Curve A Sensor Type Input Range Coefficient Famat Lake Shore Sensors DT 400 Series DT 500 Silicon Diode 0V 2 5V 10 pA 1 mA Negative DT 670 Series Gallium Aluminum Poesias 0V 10V 10 pA 1 mA Negative WK TG 120 Series PT 1 ies Plati b Platinum RTD PTCRTD 00to10k0 ad SOSTIS Platinum Rhodium Iron RTD Platinum 7 ranges 1mA Positive Q K RF 800 Rhodium Iron S RF 100 Rhodium Iron 100nA to 1mA PA E A Glass Negative Temperature NTCRTD 00 to 100kQ decade steps in Negative log a Coefficient NTC RTD Cernox 9 Ranges power autorange 8 Q K eevee En and Thermox maintains 10 mV Chromel AuFe 0 07 Thermocouple Type E Chromel Constantan t Pi V K Option 3060 only Thermacoupig SOmmy NA ostiv mui Type K Chromel Alumel Type T Copper Constantan Refer to the Lake Shore Temperature Meas
314. umber pad keys and the Up Down Escape and Enter keys FIGURE 4 1 The Direct Operation keys provide one touch access to the most often used functions ofthe Model 336 The Number Pad keys with the exception ofthe dec imal point key are dual function keys If the instrument is in the number entry mode the keys are used to enter numbers If it is in normal operating mode the number keys provide menu entry points An abbreviated description of each key is provided as fol lows Amore detailed description of each function is provided in section 4 3 to section 4 5 4 2 1 1 Direct Operation Keys Refer to section 4 3 1 3 Setpoint Press this key to enter the control setpoint for the currently displayed loop if applicable 4 5 1 5 6 Proportional P Press this key to manually adjust the Proportional control parameter for the currently displayed loop if applicable 4 5 1 5 2 Integral I Pressthis key to manually adjustthe Integral control parameterforthe currently displayed loop if applicable 4 5 1 5 3 Derivative D Press this key to manually adjust the Derivative control parameter for the currently displayed loop if applicable 4 5 1 5 4 Heater Range For Outputs 1 and 2 this key allows selection of High Med or Low heater range For Outputs 3 and 4 this key allows selection of Output On Off except when in Monitor Out mode 4 5 1 5 8 Manual Out Press this key to adjust the Manual Outp
315. unication channel between one program on one computer and one program on another computer for example a web browser on a PC and a web server on the Internet In the case of the Model 336 the protocol is used to create a communication channel between one program on one computer and the command line interface ofthe Model 336 TCP uses error correction and collision avoidance schemes that make it a very reliable form of Ethernet communication but has drawbacks of having nondeterministic tim ing and can encounter relatively large delays depending on network conditions These delays can be on the order of seconds Sockets use port numbers to identify sending and receiving endpoints on network devices This allows for multiple sepa rate communication links to exist on each device The port number used for TCP socket connections on the Model 336 is 7777 A maximum of two simultaneous socket connections can be made to the Model 336 Any attempts to open a new socket while two socket connections are already openona Model 336 will fail 6 4 4 Embedded Web Interface 6 4 4 Embedded Web Interface 115 The Model 336 provides a web interface via an embedded web serverthat runs onthe instrument Once the Model 336 is properly connected and the IP parameters prop erly configured the web interface can be opened using a web browser The web inter face should be accessible using any modern web browser but has only been tested with Microsoft Internet Explo
316. up to 8 readings You can show all 4 loops or if you need to monitor 1 input you can display just that one in greater detail Or you can custom configure each display location to suit your experiment Data from any input can be assigned to any ofthe locations and your choice of temperature or sensor units can be displayed For added convenience you can also custom label each sensor input eliminating the guesswork in remembering or determining the location to which a sensor input is associated 1 1 5 Three Option Cards 1 2 Sensor Selection Model 336 Temperature Controller Field installable input option cards can expand your sensor selection to include sili con diodes like DT 670 capacitance sensors or thermocouples Once installed the option input can be selected and named from the front panel like any other input type These option cards further expand the application versatility of the Model 336 temperature controller by allowing specialized sensors to be switched in and out to achieve specific measurement objectives For example addition of the thermocouple input option enables continuous mea surement to 1000 K and above Alternatively the capacitance sensor option card enables a magnetics impervious capacitance temperature sensor to be temporarily switched in for elimination of magneto resistive effects while taking low tempera ture sample measurements under high or changing fields The 4 channel scanner option card enables
317. uple 0 50 mV TABLE 6 8 Input range lt compensation gt Specifies input compensation where 0 off and 1 on Reversal for thermal EMF compensation if input is resistive room compensation if input is thermocouple Always 0 if input is a diode 3062 option only lt units gt Specifies the preferred units parameter for sensor readings and for the control setpoint 1 kelvin 2 Celsius 3 Sensor INTYPE A 2 1 0 1 1 term sets Input A sensor type to Platinum RTD autorange on thermal compensation on and preferred units to kelvin The lt autorange gt and lt range gt parameters do not apply to Thermocouple sensor type and the lt autorange gt and lt compensation gt parameters do not apply to Diode sensor type When configuring diode or thermocouple sensor types these parameters must be included but are ignored A setting of O for each is recommended in this case Input Type Parameter Query INTYPE lt input gt term a lt input gt Specifies input to query A D D1 D5 for 3062 option lt sensor type gt lt autorange gt lt range gt lt compensation gt lt units gt term n n n n n refer to command for description If autorange is on the returned range parameter is the currently auto selected range Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 136 KRDG Input Format Returned Format Remarks LEDS Input Format Remarks Example LEDS Input Returned Format LOCK I
318. urement and Control Catalog for details on Lake Shore temperature sensors TABLE 4 7 Sensor input types Menu Navigation Input Setup gt nput A B C or D gt Sensor Type Disabled Diode PTC RTD Platinum NTC RTD Cernox Thermocouple Default Diode Interface Command INTYPE Lake Shore www lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 52 CHAPTER 4 Operation 4 4 1 Diode Sensor Input Setup 4 4 2 Positive Temperature Coefficient PTC Resistor Sensor Input Setup 4 4 3 Negative Temperature Coefficient NTC Resistor Sensor Input Setup 4 4 4 Range Selection Model 336 Temperature Controller Diode sensors include the silicon and the gallium aluminum arsenide sensors detailed in TABLE 4 7 Input ranges are selectable to 0 2 5 V or 0 10 V and standard excitation current is 10 pA As an alternative to the standard diode excitation current of 10 pA you may select a 1 mA excitation The 1 mA excitation current is not calibrated and will not work prop erly with standard Lake Shore diode sensors For protection against accidentally set ting the 1 mA excitation current the Diode Current setting is automatically set to 10 pA every time the Sensor Type is set to Diode Menu Navigation Input Setup gt nput A B C or D Sensor Type Diode Input Setup gt nput A B C or D Diode Current gt 10 pA or 1 mA Input Setup gt nput A B C or D Range 2 5 V Silicon or 10 V GaAlAs Default Sensor Type Diode Diode Curr
319. use a larger area has more opportunity to transfer heat Even when the size of a sensor package is fixed thermal contact area can be improved with the use of a gasket material like indium foil and cryogenic grease A soft gasket material forms into the rough mating surface to increase the area ofthe two surfaces that are in contact Good gasket materials are soft thin and have good thermal conductivity They must also withstand the environ mental extremes Indium foil and cryogenic grease are good examples When sensors are permanently mounted the solder or epoxy used to hold the sensor act as both gasket and adhesive Permanent mounting is not a good solution for everyone because it limits flexibility and can potentially damage sensors Much care should be taken not to over heat or mechanically stress sensor packages Less perma nent mountings require some pressure to hold the sensor to its mounting surface Pressure greatly improves the action of gasket material to increase thermal conduc tivity and reduce thermal gradients A spring clamp isrecommended so that different rates of thermal expansion do not increase or decrease pressure with temperature change Different types of sensors come with different types and lengths of electrical leads In general a significant length of lead wire must be added to the sensor for proper ther mal anchoring and connecting to a bulk head connector at the vacuum boundary The lead wire must be a good electric
320. use the Continuous control mode with a 5 V 50 output voltage for activating the external power supply The Output Mode parameter and the Control Input parameter must be configured using the OUTMODE command Warmup Supply Parameter Query WARMUP output term n nnn nn lt output gt Specifies which unpowered analog output to query 3 or 4 lt control gt lt percentage gt term n nnn refer to command for description Website Login Parameters WEBLOG lt username gt lt password gt term s 15 s 15 lt username gt 15 character string representing the website username lt password gt 15 character string representing the website password WEBLOG user pass sets the username to user and the password to pass Strings can be sent with or without quotation marks but to send a string that con tains spaces commas or semi colons quotation marks must be used to differentiate the actual parameter separator Website Login Parameter Query WEBLOG term lt username gt lt password gt term s 15 s 15 refer to command for description Note that all strings returned by the Model 336 will be padded with spaces to main tain a constant number of characters ZONE Input Format Remarks Example ZONE Input Format Returned Format 6 6 1 InterfaceCommands 145 Control Loop Zone Table Parameter Command ZONE lt output gt lt zone gt lt upper bound gt lt P value gt lt I value gt
321. ut reaches 100 output if bipolar or 0 output if positive only Entered in the units designated by the lt units gt parmeter Specifies output voltage is 0 unipolar positive output only or 1 bipolar positive or negative output ANALOG 4 1 1 100 0 0 0 0 term sets output 4 to monitor Input A kelvin reading with 100 0 K at 100 output 10 0 V and 0 0 K at 0 output 0 0 V Use the OUTMODE command to set the output mode to Monitor Out The lt input gt parameter in the ANALOG command is the same as the lt input gt parameter in the OUT MODE command It is included in the ANALOG command for backward compatibility with previous Lake Shore temperature monitors and controllers The ANALOG com mand name is also named as such for backward compatibility lt low value gt lt polarity gt ANALOG Input Format Returned Format AOUT Input Format Returned Format Remarks ATUNE Input Format Example Remarks BRIGT Input Format Remarks BRIGT Input Returned Format CRDG Input Format Returned Format Remarks 6 6 1 InterfaceCommands 129 Monitor Out Parameter Query ANALOG output term n lt output gt Specifies which unpowered analog output to query the Monitor Out parameters for 3 or 4 lt input gt lt units gt lt high value gt lt low value gt lt polarity gt term n n tnnnnn tnnnnn n refer to command for definition Analog Output Data Query AOUT lt output gt term
322. ut setting of the currently displayed output if applicable 4 5 1 5 5 All Off Press this key to set the range for all Outputs to Off not applicable for Monitor Out mode 4 5 Model 336 Temperature Controller TABLE 4 2 Direct operation keys 4 2 1 2 Menu Number Pad Keys 4 2 2 Annunciators 45 Key Refer to section Press this key to configure features related to the inputs 4 4 for sensor input setup Input setup 4 4 9 for curve selection Press this key to configure features related to the outputs including configuration of Output setup Se a E p 8 s 4 5 control loops Display setup Press this key to configure the display 4 3 Max Min reset Press this key to reset the maximum and minimum readings for all inputs 4 4 14 Press this key to view edit copy and erase temperature curves and to generate SoftCal Section 5 2 Front Panel Curve Entry Curve entry curves Operations Zone settings Press this key to enter user specified control parameters for up to ten temperature zones 5 3 Autotune Press this key to configure and execute the Autotune algorithm 5 2 Remote local Press this key to toggle the IEEE 488 Remote mode 4 6 3 1 5 z 4 6 1 for USB 4 6 2 for Ethernet 4 6 3 Interface Press this key to configure the USB Ethernet and IEEE 488 interfaces Or USB 46 2 for Etnerne for IEEE 488 Relays Press this key to configure the two rear panel relays 5 7 2 Alarm Press thi
323. utomatically configure the IP address subnet mask and gateway of the Model 336 simply connect the Model 336 to a network that provides a DHCP server and set the DHCP parameter to On By default the DHCP feature of the Model 336 is On Menu Navigation Interface Modify IP Config gt DHCP 0ff or On Auto IP Auto IP is a method of automatically configuring the IP address and subnet mask parameters of Ethernet devices on a link local network This configuration is performed by the Model 336 and does not require any external device Auto IP is defined in RFC 3927 Dynamic Configuration of IPv4 Link Local Addresses and can be found at The Internet Engineering Task Force website at www ietf org The auto matically configured address will be in the link local address group of 169 254 1 0 to 169 254 254 255 This group is reserved for independent local networks that do not connect to other networks This method chooses an IP address that is not already active on the network which eliminates IP address conflicts A gateway address is not applicable when using Auto IP since the purpose of a gateway address is to commu 6 4 1 EthernetConfiguration 111 nicate with outside networks and by definition Auto IP only works on link local net works A disadvantage of Auto IP is the limitation of only working with a link local network which cannot connect to other networks including the internet Another disadvantage lies in the fact that an Auto IP a
324. values 8 7 2 Product Information 8 8 Error Messages 8 9 Calibration Procedure 8 7 2 ProductInformation 157 Product information for your instrument is also found in the Factory Reset menu The following information is provided Firmware date Serial number Option card type Ethernet version Firmware version Option card serial number The following are error messages that may be displayed by the Model 336 during operation Message Description DISABL Input is disabled Refer to section 4 4 NOCURV Input has no curve Refer to section 4 4 9 S OVER Input is at or over full scale sensor units S UNDER Input is at or under negative full scale sensor units T OVER Input at or over the high end of the curve T UNDER Input at or under the low end of the curve Cannot Communicate with Input uP The main microprocessor has lost communication with the sensor input microprocessor NOVRAM Corrupt Invalid data or contents in NOVRAM when this message appears options are provided for resetting the instrument to default values and for clearing all user curve locations 21 59 To perform the reset set the desired parameters to Yes then choose the Execute option Atemperature limit has been exceeded The temperature reading on a sensor input has exceeded the Temperature Limit set ting A detailed message will follow which includes a reference to which sensor input s temperature limit
325. vents may be reported in the operation event summary bit through the enable register FIGURE 6 3 The Operation Event Enable command OPSTE programs the enable register and the query command OPSTE reads it OPSTR reads and clears the Operation Event Register OPST reads the Operation Condition register The used bits of the Operation Event Register are described as fol lows m Processor Communication Error COM Bit 7 this bit is set when the main pro cessor cannot communicate with the sensor input processor m Calibration Error CAL Bit 6 this bit is set if the instrument is not calibrated or the calibration data has been corrupted m Autotune Done ATUNE Bit 5 this bit is set when the Autotuning algorithm is NOT active m New Sensor Reading NRDG Bit 4 this bit is set when there is a new sensor reading m Loop 1 Ramp Done RAMP1 Bit 3 this bit is set when a loop 1 setpoint ramp is completed m Loop 2 Ramp Done RAMP2 Bit 2 this bit is set when a loop 2 setpoint ramp is completed m Sensor Overload OVLD Bit 1 this bit is set when a sensor reading is in the over load condition m Alarming ALARM Bit 0 this bit is set when an input is in an alarming state and the Alarm Visible parameter is on 6 2 6 Status System Detail Status Byte Register and Service Request 6 2 6 Status System Detail Status Byte Register and Service Request 101 Operation 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Eu condition register 128 64
326. well as IP address parameters An order of precedence is followed when the Model 336 attempts to acquire IP address parameters If enabled the DHCP method will be used first If DHCP is dis abled or if the attempt to acquire parameters from the DHCP server fails the Model 336 then checks if Auto IP is enabled If Auto IP is enabled this method will be used If disabled or if this attempt fails the Static IP method will be used If the Static IP method fails the IP address parameters will not be configured and the Ethernet status will enter an error state Refer to section 6 4 2 1 ifyou receive an error message Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP DHCP is a method of automatically configur ing the IP address subnet mask and gateway of Ethernet devices on a network This method provides simple automatic configuration for users connecting to a network that provides a DHCP server The network DHCP server will provide an IP address sub net mask and gateway address Depending on the DHCP server configuration it may also provide primary DNS and secondary DNS addresses as well DHCP is the simplest method of IP configuration DHCP does have the disadvantage of not necessarily pre serving the IP address through a device reconfiguration as well as the possibility of being automatically reconfigured when the DHCP lease expires Contact your net work administrator to find out the DHCP lease policy on your network To use DHCP to a
327. ww lakeshore com CRYOTRONICS 160 CHAPTER 8 Service 8 10 1 IEEE 488 Interface Connector Model 336 Temperature Controller FIGURE 8 7 Ethernet pin and connector details NEN 1 TXD4 Transmit data 2 TXD Transmit data 3 RXD Receive data 4 EPWR Power from switch not used 5 EPWR Power from switch not used 6 RXD Receive data 7 EPWR Power from switch not used 8 EPWR Power from switch not used TABLE 8 6 Ethernet pin and connector details Connect to the IEEE 488 Interface connector on the Model 336 rear with cables spec ified in the IEEE 488 standard The cable has 24 conductors with an outer shield The connectors are 24 way Amphenol 57 Series or equivalent with piggyback recepta cles to allow daisy chaining in multiple device systems The connectors are secured in the receptacles by 2 captive locking screws with metric threads The total length of cable allowed in a system is 2 m for each device on the bus or 20 m maximum The Model 336 can drive a bus of up to 10 devices A connector extender is required to use the IEEE 488 interface and relay terminal block at the same time FIGURE 8 8 shows the IEEE 488 interface connector pin location and signal names as viewed from the Model 336 rear panel FIGURE 8 8 IEEE 488 interface 8 11 Electrostatic Discharge 8 11 1 Identification of Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Components 8 11 ElectrostaticDischarge 161 EE
328. y will energize ifthe configured Alarm Input sensor goes into a high alarm state If the Alarm to Follow parameter is set to Both the relay will energize ifthe configured Alarm Input sensor goes into either a low alarm or a high alarm state Menu Navigation Relays gt Relay 1 Relay 2 gt Mode 0ff On Alarm Relays Relay 1 Relay 2 gt Alarm Input gt Input A B C D Relays Relay 1 Relay 2 gt Alarm to Follow gt Low High Both Default Mode gt Off Alarm Input gt Input A Alarm to Follow gt Both Interface Command RELAY The Model 336 has 20 standard curve locations numbered 1 through 20 At present not all locations are occupied by curves the others are reserved for future updates If a standard curve location is in use the curve can be viewed using the view operation Standard curves cannot be changed by the user and reserved locations are not avail able for user curves 5 8 1 Curve Header Parameters 5 8 2 Curve Breakpoints 5 8 1 CurveHeaderParameters 83 The Model 336 has 39 user curve locations numbered 21 through 59 Each location can hold from 2 to 200 data pairs breakpoints including a value in sensor units and a corresponding value in kelvin Using fewer than 200 breakpoints will not increase the number of available curve locations SoftCal generated curves are stored in user curve locations Each curve has parameters that are used for identification and to allow the instru ment to use
329. zone setting feature which enables automatic switching of sensor inputs and scales current excitation through 10 different preloaded temperature zones the Model 336 provides continuous measurement and control from 300 mK to 1505 K Control outputs 1 and 2 are variable DC current sources referenced to chassis ground Output 1 can provide 100 W of continuous power to a 25 Q load or 50 W toa 50 Q or 25 Q load Output 2 provides 50 W to 25 Q or 50 Q heater loads Outputs 3 and 4 are variable DC voltage source outputs providing two 10 V analog outputs When notin use to extend the temperature controller heater power these outputs can function as manually controlled voltage sources Temperature limit settings for inputs are provided as a safeguard against system damage Each input is assigned a temperature limit and if any input exceeds that limit all control channels are automatically disabled The Model 336 is standard equipped with Ethernet universal serial bus USB and parallel IEEE 488 interfaces In addition to gathering data nearly every function of the instrument can be controlled through a computer interface You can download the Lake Shore curve handler software to your computer to easily enter and manipu late sensor calibration curves for storage in the instrument s non volatile memory Ethernet provides the ability to access and monitor instrument activities via the internet from anywhere in the world The USB interface emulates

Manual for Model 336 Cryogenic Temperature Controller

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents